Home

Report Design

image

Contents

1.
2. To learn how to work with the Filter Editor refer to Filter Data via the Filter Editor Clear the Filter To clear the filter applied to a specific column do one of the following e Invoke the filter dropdown list see below and click All e In Grid Views right click the column header and select Clear Filter To clear all filter criteria click the Close Filter button within the Filter Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc s Sir Rodney s Marmalade 10523 Sir Rodney s Marmalade 31 00 10593 Sir Rodney s Marmalade 451 00 Unit Price gt 80 00 4nd Unit Price lt 100 00 Close Filter Button Disable Enable the Filter Click the Enable Filter button within the Filter Panel el j Sir Rodney s Marmalade 451 00 10523 Sir Rodney s Marmalade 481 00 10593 Sir Rodney s Marmalade 4851 00 Unit Price gt 80 00 And Unit Price lt 100 00 Enable Filter Button el Edit Filter All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners See Also Filter Data via the Filter Editor Examples of Using the Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc at Show Summaries Totals in Grids To change the type of summary for a specific column or apply a summary do the following 1 Right click a region within a group footer or grid footer under a specific column Supplier Category Product Mame Units In Stock Supplier Antonio del Yalle
3. CLEVERQ YOUR SUSINESS CG Report Manager User Manual Copyright 2008 2012 Better Days Enterprises LLC 3213 West Main Street 119 Rapid City SD 57702 2314 Revision February 4 2012 Version 1 917 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Table of Contents lial eo 0 blelnhO overuse emneye este en a Ser yee tn OSes Ne se eect See tntn MOT ereet Ott omen Nevers Terre 4 Startme the Report Mana er acere E a A E 5 Report Manager Concepts censes ea A aT EE eN TENER 7 PECTCRCN COS ais iia taeda eet eee ec eee te es 7 DACA OUT C 6 eerste esse ste certs erase antarctic TE 10 PICO CS See es sagt tails sean ee alee ee ena eee eee eee eee econ ete eas 11 ODBC cene E N 13 CEVEA 14 PDC Preiered Dal ars OULCE enuas e eds 15 Report Desio iS ern a E E a db aueaeaeesaaheetemuncdueem 15 Creating a New Repor DGS 1 aides wcceceisusisustaspieudeasslis a sie atiberaasneuaens 17 Edduna RePOn DESS ier eat aantaanicnad ical aantauicand toni 17 PPA AAV UC Tes T E E E A ES E EA E eh ate OAE Sanaa ET cata 18 Data Parame O e E E A ateceaeys 18 My Parameters eie a a ansteladiieed aunincie asin 21 lopak Parame oi Sosna 21 kepon De MUON Senie a E E 22 editing a Report Denmtiomsriensneniiii e a a 22 Creating a New Report Definition cccccccsssssseeecceeecceeeesseecceeeceeaaeeeseseceeeeeeaags 23 CCOO O a A eee pao ead ees 31 BACE OD aa a E E E 33 R nno REDONS eann a et en Pa 35 Manual Sele ChOM eenaa erin niu tod duende a aseunv
4. FE Description TH Check Box Toi Icon_17 Sm Icon_25 ny Bar Code l i ma Zip Code SE Parameters In the Property Grid the Picture Box control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to 2011 DevExpress Inc 349 Report Designer aso Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both The property sett
5. Ha myDataSet 3 Products SE Parameters 2 Select the parameter and in the Property Grid set its Description to Rows per Page Parameter Type to Int32 and Name to rowsNumber Parameter Type Int32 Value Design Name 2011 DevExpress Inc 309 Report Designer 310 4 Select the Page Break and set its Visible property to No Then click the ellipsis button for its Formatting Rules property and in the invoked Formatting Rules Editor click the Edit Rule Sheet button Formatting Rules Editor Rules applied to a control 5 Now in the invoked Formatting Rule Sheet Editor click oF to create a new formatting rule Set its Visible property to Yes and click the ellipsis button for its Condition property Formatting Rule Sheet Editor Condition Some properties are omitted Visible Yes formattngFulel 6 In the invoked Condition Editor define a logical expression for the rule e g DataSource CurrentRowIndex Parameters rowsNumber 0 And DataSource CurrentRowIndex 0 2011 DevExpress Inc sto Report Designer T Condition Editor DataSource CurrentRowIndex Parameters rowsNumber 0
6. Portrait Lett 1 E Landscape Top Ceea This dialog allows you to do the following e Change page orientation choose Portrait or Landscape e Select paper size e Choose paper source e Change page margins This can also be done in the Print Preview dialog iNote If you re working with a document that was loaded from file the Page Setup commands on the toolbar and main menu will be disabled 2011 DevExpress Inc oat Print Preview 142 Specify Page Margins in Print Preview To set document page margins do one of the following e Use the Page Setup dialog In the Page Setup dialog enter the required top left bottom and right page margins values into the appropriate editors Margins inches Left 2 Right 1 5 Top 1 5 Bottom Then click OK to save changes e Use drag and drop in the Print Preview window To use this approach point to the dotted line indicating the margin s border When the pointer changes to h drag the pointer to move the margin a Lett Margin 0 50 Note If you re working with a document that was loaded from file it is impossible to change its page settings e g page size orientation margins etc 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 Print Preview 143 Headers and Footers Insert Page Header and Page Footer into Printed Documents To insert a page header and page footer into a document click the Header and Footer button on the t
7. 4 Customize the card layout using drag and drop and customization menu and preview data in the view Layout page 2 Rearrange fields using drag and drop as required 3 Close the Customization window to apply the changes 2011 DevExpress Inc s Resize Cards in Grids Resize Cards in Card Views In Card Views to resize cards horizontally drag card separators if they are visible Record N 2 a Product Mame Tofu Product Mame Mascarpon Category a Produce Category TA Dairy Unit Price 2525 Unit Price 32 00 Discontinued Discontinued Card Separator Resize Cards in Layout Views In Layout Views to resize cards do the following 1 Click the Customization button displayed within the header panel Boo e amp Record 2 of 9 a Title Sales Represent Title Vice President 5 First Name Nancy First Name Andrew Last Mame Davolic Last Name Fuller Contact Info Contact Info Address Al Address A City Seattle City Tacoma Postal Code 98122 Region WA Postal Code 98401 Region WA Country USA Country USA BOO m o The LayoutView Customization window will open 2011 DevExpress Inc oot Layoutview Customization Template Card View Layout Hidden It Templatecard idden Items ma OS E Empty Space ttem i i Label Mo image data First Mame sid Last Mame a JC Separator Ee Motes Contact Info D Home Pho
8. Customize the point labels of a series Note that you may select labels of a series by clicking them in the chart preview Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout Note that you can select point labels to be modified directly in the chart preview area 2011 DevExpress Inc 31 Charting 32 a Series 1 a Series 2 Series selector Specifies a series to be customized Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page General Specifies whether labels should be visible and shown for zero values determines their text and resolve overlapping settings Line Determines whether labels lines should be visible and specifies their appearance Appearance Specifies the background color and fill style of labels Border Determines whether labels borders should be visible and defines their color and thickness Shadow Specifies whether a labels shadow should be visible and defines its color and size 2011 DevExpress Inc 32 Charting 33 Chart Titles Page Tasks e Create chart titles e Enable the word wrapping for lengthy chart titles e Customize the appearance and position of chart titles Page Elements Chart preview area Titles management section Chart Titles Basic HTML Support Titles list A very lengthy chart tite which demonstr mith ae a a eae Series 1 Series 2 Visible r Series 3 E Series 4 Position P 3 m Dock Bottom a Align
9. elect All Format l dd to Quick Access Toolbar File a r Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon i Mew Document 1 x To add a group of commands to the Quick Access Toolbar right click the group s caption and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar ERE k dd to Quick Access Toolbar Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon Minimize the Ribbon To remove any command from the Quick Access Toolbar right click the command and select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc a Wew Document 1 Biba im ple Pad m f Ge x Remove from Quick Access Toolbar Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon Minimize the Ribbon Oty x Select All aii Sma pj Find yt Skins Find 2011 DevExpress Inc ao Minimize Ribbon To minimize the Ribbon right click any command and select Minimize the Ribbon New Document 1 Ribbon Simple Pad E el fx Gallery Page Exit Find Format dd to Quick Access Toolbar Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon Minimize the Ribbon New Document 1 Ribbon Simple Pad A 3 You can also minimize and restore the Ribbon by double clicking any tab page header 2011 DevExpress Inc m Invoke Ribbon Commands To select a specific command you can click it with the mouse or invoke it via its shortcut
10. Insert entire row Insert a Row 1 Click a cell located directly below or above where you want to insert a new row 2 Do one of the following e To add a new row just above the row containing the selected cell click the Insert Rows Above button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar e To add a new row just below the row containing the selected cell click the Insert Rows Below button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar Add a new row directly below the selected row or 1 Right click a cell relative to which you want to insert a row 2 Click the Insert item in the context menu and select Insert Rows Above or Insert Rows Below 2011 DevExpress Inc so Rich Text Editor 507 HH Insert Columns to the Left Delete Cells HP Insert Columns to the Right Split Cells Cell Alignment E4 Insert Rows Below tral Increase Indent wg Insert Cells Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink Insert a Column 1 Click a cell located directly to the right or left of where you want to insert a new column 2 Do one of the following e To add a new column just to the left of the column containing the selected cell click the Insert Columns to the Left button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar Insert Columns to the Left Add anew column directly to the left of the selected column e To add a new column just to the right of the column containing the selected cell
11. Specifies the font settings for report elements Some of these settings are available in the Formatting e Formatting Rule Sheet Specifies the text color for report elements This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Invokes the Formatting Rule Sheet Editor allowing you to manage and customize formatting rules which can then be defined for a report s bands and controls To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the report during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values used to render the contents of a report s controls e Page Color e Style Sheet 2011 DevExpress Inc Specifies the fill color for report pages This color may be changed later in a report s Print Preview 413 Report Designer ata Allows you to invoke the Styles Editor which is intended to manage and customize a report s style sheets To learn more on this refer to Store and Restore Style Sheets Style Sheet s Path Allows you to define a path to the style sheet contained in a report style sheet file REPSS To learn more on this refer to Store and Restore Style Sheets Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of a report controls text This optio
12. Use the Insert or Add key Adds a new condition to this group OK Cancel Apply 2011 DevExpress Inc 63 Filter Editor ea This will create a new condition under the current one i Filter Builder And 4 For the second condition set the column to Discount operator to gt and operand value to 0 1 i Filter Builder And 5 To add a third condition to the same group click the button again Set the condition s column to Quantity operator to gt and operand value to 99 Below is the result be Product Name Equals Tofu Discount Is greater than or equal to 10 t Quantity Is greater than 99 amp OK J Cancel 6 Click OK or Apply to apply the created filter criteria How to Construct Filter Criteria Involving Different Logical Operators Some filter criteria contain multiple logical Boolean operators combining simple filter conditions For instance you want to see items whose price is under 10 and at the same time the available quantity is also less than 10 At the same time you may also want to see those items whose price is over 10 while the available quantity is also greater than 10 The resulting condition will look like this Price is less than 10 AND Quantity is less than 10 OR Price is greater than 10 AND Quantity is greater than 10 This is how you can do this 1 Invoke the Filter Editor 2 Clear existing
13. al v a J i d i PSL oleDbD ataAdapter1 SF dat F Preview Je HTML view U Scripts xtraReport1 PaperKind Letter Zoom Factor 100 E Group and Sort a Now you can specify a report filter using these parameters Don t forget to save your report design after loading the parameters Page 30 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Fr is Ex Eie Edt View Format i tal Save O ia Save To File Load Parameters Script To Clipboard Data Connection CleverQ Help z Dk E Ae ee ce v7 1 Hl Field List o 2 x EH dg BES Dashboards_and_Gauges Bika Parameters Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source dg1 S Application_Name Data Member Dashboards_and_Gauges E Company_Address fab Company_Name E CustomFilter E Dashboard SEJ Date_Range fab Title infap Title2 Title 1 Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch _ Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection us Style Sheet Collection f B DashboardName Watermark None e3 Report Explorer Property Grid amp Field List xtraReporti Report A at Appearance Background Colo C Transparent Border Color HB ControlText Border Width 1 Borders None Space forrepeating columns Contro
14. 1 500 000 00 San Francisco E _ RowFooter l D Finance 40 000 00 Monterey E Horztines 4 Engineering 1 100 000 00 Montere F F Y mi v VertLines a Customer Support 38 000 00 Monterey E te T Research and Development 460 000 00 Burlington WT lite Tree Customer Services 850 000 00 Burlington VT Fal TreeButtons _ TreeIndent 9 Sum 5 510 G Set up various printing options forthe current treelist 9K 3 cancel apy e Options tab Allows you to specify which elements are to be printed e Behavior tab Allows you to pre process a tree view before printing it For instance you can enable automatic column width or row height calculation 2011 DevExpress Inc 180 Print Preview set Warnings and Error Messages Warnings The specified file doesn t have a PRNX extension This message is invoked if you try to open a file with an extension different from PRNX Click Yes if you are sure that the file contains the compatible markup Otherwise click No One or more margins are set outside the printable This message is invoked when you try to print a area of the page document whose margins are outside of the printable area of the page Click Yes if you are sure that your printer supports the specified page margins Otherwise click No pe Errors The specified file doesn t contain valid XML data in the This message is invoked if you try to open a file with
15. 11 iF 123 100 The built in scripts validation capability is provided in this tab After clicking Validate the result is displayed in the Scripts Errors Panel For more information refer to Handle Events via Scripts See Also Designer Tab Preview Tab HTML View Tab 2011 DevExpress Inc 331 Report Designer 332 Smart Tag Most report elements have Smart Tags that provide easy access to the most frequently used settings Clicking an element s Smart Tag invokes an actions list with action links and editors allowing you to customize this element e Report Smart Tag A report s Smart Tag icon is located at the top left corner of the Design Panel Reporti E oo BM Report Tasks Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands en Data Source myDataset Data Member Products Data Adapter ProductsTableAdapter Ill pa ES ES Ess Filter String Print when Data Source is Empty T Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty EP e Detail Print Count Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch x J Formatting Rules Collection _ Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection Watermark None Se ENE e Band Smart Tag A band s Smart Tag icon is located on the band strip right next to its caption For instance the Smart Tag for the Page Header is shown in the following image Edit and Reorder Bands Print On Not with Report Header F
16. 2011 DevExpress Inc sss Vertical Grid sea Vertical Grid This section describes the capabilities provided by Vertical Grids Property Grids ag Employee 7 First Mame Margaret Steven Laura Last Name Peacock Buchanan Callahan Title Sales Representative Sales Manager Inside Sales Coordinator Title OF Courtesy j i iG Mr E Ms i Address Redmond WA London Seattle W Postal Code Country Swi GIP UK 38105 USA Home Phone 71 555 4848 206 555 1189 Photo amp Notes Data Editing e Edit Cells in Vertical Grids Layout Customization e Expand and Collapse Rows in Vertical Grids e Resize Rows and Columns in Vertical Grids Navigation e Navigation in Vertical Grids 2011 DevExpress Inc sea Vertical Grid s85 Data Editing Activate Cell Editor Do one of the following e Click a cell e Focus a cell for instance via the keyboard and press ENTER or F2 e Focus a cell and press any alpha numeric key The editor will be invoked and its contents will be replaced with the pressed character Select and Deselect Cell Text Press F2 or CTRL A Close Cell Editor and Accept Changes Made Do one of the following e Press ENTER e Click any other grid cell e Focus any other control Discard Changes To discard changes made in a cell press ESC Open Cell Editor s Dropdown Do one of the following e Activate a cell editor
17. Ceiling Value greater than or equal to the given numeric expression Returns the cosine of the angle Cos Value defined in radians Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Cosh Value the angle defined in radians Returns the exponential value of Exp Value the given float expression Returns the largest integer less Floor Value than or equal to the given numeric expression Returns the natural logarithm of a Log Value specified number Returns the logarithm of a specified Log Value 2 number in a specified Base Returns the base 10 logarithm ofa Log10 Value specified number Returns a specified number raised Power Value 3 to a specified power Returns a random number that is Rnd 100 less than 1 but greater than or equal to zero Rounds the given value to the Round Value nearest integer 2011 DevExpress Inc sa Expression Editor 55 Sign Value Returns the positive 1 zero 0 Sign Value or negative 1 sign of the given expression Sin Value Returns the sine of the angle Sin Value defined in radians Sinh Value Returns the hyperbolic sine of the Sinh Value angle defined in radians Saqr Value Returns the square root of a given Sqr Value number Tan Value Returns the tangent of the angle Tan Value defined in radians Tanh Value Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Tanh Value the angle defined in radians
18. Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e End Band Determines a band in which the control finishes drawing e End Point Determines the end point from a band s upper left corner where the control finishes drawing e Location 2011 DevExpress Inc 391 Report Designer 392 Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it e Start Band Determines a band in which the control starts drawing e Start Point Determines the starting point froma band s upper left corner where the control starts drawing e Width Specifies the width of the Box in report measurement units 2011 DevExpress Inc 392 Report Designer E Subreport The Subreport control allows you to include other reports in your current report There are several reasons for using subreports The first one is to reuse reports This can be of help if there is a particular report structure template that has to be included in all reports and the report must have consistent appearance and functionality A
19. Global parameters are those parameters not associated with a particular user These parameters are accessible by all users and provides a way to add information to a report that can be changed in one place Typical uses for Global parameters include company name company address phone numbers etc To access the Global parameters click on the Global Parameters block on the Navigator or use the pull down menu item Edit Parameters Global Parameters The following form will be displayed Page 21 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Olona Paranais a Parameter Name no spaces Parameter Value Company Marne j Sample Company m Company _Address 1 Main Street m Application Name CleverQ Reporter maa ummm The list can be sorted and filtered To add a new parameter press the button on the navigation bar To delete a parameter press the button As you hover over other buttons their function will be displayed Report Definitions While a report design contains the information that describes what the report will look like what it will contain where the data comes from calculations to be made and what parameters are going to be used to create the report when the report is run a Report Definition contains the value of parameters that are to be used when a report definition 1s run Several report definitions can use the same report design The previous section covered some different
20. In a similar fashion to categories Batch Groups are used to organize reports based on when they are run or who might be the recipient To edit the list of Batch Groups click on the Batch Groups box on the navigator or use the pull down menu item Edit Batch Groups You will see a form similar to the next figure Page 33 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual ad Hnten Groue edit a Batch Group Mame a Daily Evening J m Daily Morning m End of Month m End of Week Batch Group 1of6 Wi l 4 gt p gt ple x You can sort and filter this list Add new entries to the bottom of the list A report definition can belong to more than one batch group And you can have several report definitions part of the same batch group Once the report definitions are assigned to the batch group you can easily add the group to the Report Queue by pressing the button on the bottom of the form labeled Add Selected Batch Group to Queue The form in the next figure will be displayed Page 34 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual oo ding nes Queue entries jo guini Giggy Daily Evening Date and Time to Run Reportish aean 25 15 AM al Priority 1 _ Date Time Stamp included in filename Format POF e Printer gt Copies 1 Destination Folder C Documents and Settings ll UsersyApplication DatatReports Browse Additional settings Email Recurrance etc can be set by editing the entries on the list or cale
21. e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the the controls contained within the bands e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the controls contained within the bands as well as to assign an existing style to them or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the bands This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 408 Report Designer 409 e Visible Specifies whether the band should be visible in print preview Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessib
22. 2011 DevExpress Inc ass Rich Text Editor ase File Operations Create a New Document To create a new empty document use the New button of the Common toolbar or the CTRL N keyboard shortcut 2011 DevExpress Inc ase Rich Text Editor Load a Document 457 To load a document click the Open L button on the Common toolbar or use the CTRL O keyboard shortcut Organize 43 Favorite 4 Hard Disk Drives 2 MB Desktop Local Disk C 4g Downloads Cay 168 GB free of 224 GB T kr li i Recent Places Local Disk D ee 4 g Libraries 241 GB free of 241 GB b B Documents b a Music 4 Devices with Removable Storage 1 Select a file to preview b E Pictures p iTi Videos b li Computer p th Network File name The Rich Editor enables you to open documents of the following types Rich Text Format rtf Hyper Text Markup Language format htm html Text Files format txt web page archive format mht WordML xml Open Office XML format aka Office 2007 or docx Open Document Format odt 2011 DevExpress Inc 457 Rich Text Editor ass Save a Document To save a document click the Save lal button on the Common toolbar or use the CTRL S keyboard shortcut This allows you to save a document using the save parameters that were previously set If you want to save a document using another file name or
23. Auto created Series Argument Value Series 2 Add Insert Delete i Clear Mowe Up Move Down Note that valid Argument and Value entries must correspond to the Argument scale type and the Value scale type selected for the appropriate series on the Series Page Otherwise an error message will be invoked Series Binding Tab Use it to provide specific data binding options for each series Points Series Binding Auto created Series 1 ES choose a datasource USA Data filters Click the ellipsis button Argument Propertes Argument scale type DateTime lt KJ Argument Year Value Properties Value scale type Numerical Binding mode Values Value GSP Baja The following illustration demonstrates how it works 2011 DevExpress Inc as 12 31 2000 12 31 2001 12 31 2002 12 31 2003 12V31 2000 t2fsif2001 l2arsif2002 12 31 2003 Auto created Series Tab Use it to specify data columns used to generate series as well as the series view type and other options like sorting filtering and name template Choose a datasource i Argument scale type Qualitative Data Member 5 Argument View type Value Properties Value scale type Value Name prefix Name suffix Sorting amp Filtering Series sort order Point sort order Sort points by Data filters Familiar Data Source Options Automatic Binding Settings Automatic Layout Settings The f
24. Behavior Data Note Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both Automatic Binding Settings Enabled Specifies whether or not the Chart s data binding is automatically adjusted when its data source is a Pivot Grid Automatic Layout Settings Enabled Specifies whether or not the Chart s layout is automatically adjusted when its data source is a Pivot Grid Empty Chart Text Specifies the text to be shown in the Chart when it has no data to display Scripts This property contains events which you can handle by the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Small Chart Text Specifies the text to be shown in the Chart when it s too small to fit the diagram Visible Specifies whether a Chart should be visible in print preview Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of a Chart s properties Bookmark Navigation URL and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Data Adapter Determines a data adapter that will populate a Chart s data source which is assigned via the Data Source property It is automatically set to the appropriate value when the Data Member
25. PAGE UP Moves focus one page up or down PAGE DOWN CTRL HOME Moves focus to the first cell within the first node CTRL END Moves focus to the last cell within the last node TAB Moves focus away from the TreeList to the next CTRL TAB control in tab order SHIFT TAB Moves focus away from the TreeList to the previous control in tab order You can also click node indicator cells to move focus to the corresponding row while preserving column focus E Corporate Headquarters Monterey E GH Sales and Marketing San Francisco ed itr m S o g Engineering Monterey Indicator Cells 2011 DevExpress Inc s82 Select Tree List Nodes Change Focused Node To focus a node and clear the existing selection do one of the following e Click the node s indicator cell or any of its data cells Department Location E Corporate Headquarters Monterey gt Finance Monterey rey p Engineering Monterey E EH Sales and Marketing EEPE Indicator Cells e Select the node using the ARROW keys Select Multiple Nodes To select a node while preserving the current selection click the node s indicator cell or any of its data cells while holding the CTRL key down To toggle the focused node s selected state do one of the following e Press CTRL SPACE e Click the node while holding the CTRL key down To move focus between nodes while preserving the current selection use CTRL ARROW keyboard shortcut
26. Page 50 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Data Type Formula Only cqFormula cqDateRange cqDataType cqFilters cqFilter cqValue cqValueFormatted cqChart cqDisplayFilters cqError Indicator Gauge Notes cqGauge Gauge Name cqGaugelD cqindicator Indicator Name cqlnitialbateRange cqLockDateRange Gauge Defaults Dashboard Default Date cqDefaultDateRange Range Links Date Range to cqindDateRange Gauge cqDateRange cqDateRange cqindDataType Links Indicator to Gauge cqDataType cqDataT ype cqindFilters cqGaugeFilters cqFilters cqDashboardFilters cqFilter cqFilters cqFilter cqValue cqValueFormatted cqGaugelmage Use Picture Box Control cqChart Use Chart Control cqDisplayFilters cqDisplayFilters cqError cqError Displays errors cqDesiredHigh cqindDateRange cqDesiredHighDef cqindDataType cqDesiredHighFormatted cqlndFilters cqDesiredLow cqGaugeName cqDesiredLowDef cqDisplayDateRange cqDesiredLowFormatted cqGaugeTypeName cqFormula cqicon cqicon1 cqicon2 cqicon3 cqKeylndicator cqMaxValue cqMaxValueDef cqMaxValueFormatted cqMedian cqMedianDef cqMedianFormatted cqMinValue cqMinValueDef cqMinValueFormatted cqNote cqBenchmark Page 51 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Formula Only Indicator Gauge Notes cqBenchmarkDef cqBenchmarkFormatted cqTip cqTip1 cqTip2 cqTip3 cqValue cqValue1 Def cqValue1Formatted cqValue2 cqValue2Def cqValue2Formatted cqColor auto applied to border of cqico
27. To expand collapse groups of values do one of the following e Click a corresponding expand button Expand Button Expand Buttons Quantity EYear e H Quarter Sales Person Il Category Mame 4 l Andrew Fuller jy Grains Cereals 73 RRENA AEREE a i e Right click a value that has nested values and select the required Expand or Collapse command from the menu that opens Quantity lear H Quarter Sales Person IE Andrew Fuller R Collapse Expand All Collapse All Andrew Fuller j Expand Collapse Fields To expand collapse a group of fields click a corresponding field expand button Field Expand Button Quantity r Year H Quarter 1994 1995 Sales Person Category Name E Andrew Fuller ay Grains Cereals 73 60 D Meat Poultry 140 160 x joe Seafood TI 23 Andrew Fuller Total 327 243 2011 DevExpress Inc 12 127 Pivot Table Hide and Display Pivot Table Fields Hide Fields To hide fields do the following e Right click on an empty space within the header region and select Show Field List from the context menu that opens Order Year Order Amount country l l Refresh Data 4 UK OoOo r z i Order Quarter A C Show Field List E Quarter 1 a ef Show Prefilter B Meat Poultry j i En Froduce joy Seafood Quarter 1 Total gt Grains Cereale Seer 7 The Customization F
28. and click the Save button 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 3 Report Designer 274 Styles Editor x alow myEvenStyle myOddStyle Then in the invoked Save File dialog define a name for the style sheet file REPSS and click Save 4 Then delete the created styles using the button and close the dialog 5 Select the report and in the Property Grid click its ellipsis button for the Style Sheet Path property In the invoked Open File dialog load the created REPSS file eee Pee ee tee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee re Local Disk My Styles eaen ee oe ae as eee ee ee ot eee ee oe we eee ee ere ee oe ee ee eee oe oe eee ee ee ee ee ee oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee en ee ee ee e a a a a a m m e e m e RB New Folder Date modified Type _ myStyleSheet repss Favorite Links E Documents fi Recently Changed More Folders A Fie name myShleShest eps z When you invoke the Styles Editor via the report s Style Sheet property again you ll see that the styles are read only meaning that they are obtained from an external file 2011 DevExpress Inc 274 Report Designer 275 Style Sheet myEvensStyle style If the Style Sheet Path property is then set to None and a style sheet is loaded using the Styles Editor of the Style Sheet property all these styles will become editable To learn how you can assign styles to report elements refer to Use Odd and
29. Adding Reports to the Report Queue To add a report to the Report Queue you can do it from one of three places 1 From the Report List where you manually select one report to add to the queue Page 39 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual 2 From the Report Carousel where you manually select one report to add to the queue 3 From the Batch Group list where you select a Batch Group and add several reports to the report queue at the same time This can be opened from the navigator or from the pull down menu item Tools Add Batch Group to Queue From either of these sources you will get the following form displayed Banking Dashboard Date and Time to Run Reportish g ole 71651 4M Priority 1 ca _ Date Time Stamp included in filename Send to FTP site into Destination Folder Format PDF e Printer gt Copies 1 Destination Folder C Documents and Settings4ll Users 4pplication DataiReports Browse Additional settings Email Recurrance etc can be set by editing the entries on the list or calendar Add bo Queue Cancel On this form you can specify the date and time for the report to run The form will open with the data and time set for 3 minutes from the current time You can specify a priority which will be used only if more than one report has the same date and time If you are going to save the report to a file you can optionally include a date time stamp as part
30. And DataSource CurrentRowIndex 0 gt Returns the index of the current data row in a datasource Note that this index is zero based To save the changes and close the dialog click OK Then click Close to quit the Formatting Rule Sheet Editor as well 7 Now back in the Formatting Rules Editor move the created rule to the list of applied rules on the right using the arrow buttons in the middle of the dialog Formatting Rules Editor formattingRule 1 To save the changes and close the editor click OK The report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and in the Parameters section define the required value and click Submit 2011 DevExpress Inc Report Designer 312 Products by Categories Category 1 Chal Chang sasquatch Ale lt 3l Designer L Preview d HTML View Scripts Pagel of 21 Zoom Factor 100 Note that while in this example the number of rows is specified each time the report is being previewed you can make this number secure by setting the parameter s Value option to the desired value and then setting the report s Request Parameters option to No See Also Show the Current Row Index Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Grou Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records 2011 DevExpress Inc 312 Report Designer 313 Report Designer Reference A report is built from controls text labels image
31. Detail Report Detail3 DetailReport4 i ReportFooter2 Detail Report b 5 ReportHeader 1 E Detail4 f i l ReportF ooter 1 a ca ReportFooter one band per report To add a Detail Report band use the Context Menu If the bound data source contains a data relationship the submenu will contain an item with its name Otherwise add an unbound detail report and specify its data binding options later 2011 DevExpress Inc mo Report Designer ant Unbound T oom b Properties rT k In the Property Grid the properties of this band are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band e Font Specifies the font settings for the controls contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s
32. Formatting Rules Editor Rules available in a report Rules applied to a control formattingRule 1 If multiple rules are applied it is possible to customize their precedence by using the up and down arrow buttons at the right of the dialog So the rules are applied in the same order that they appear in the list and the last rule in the list has the highest priority The result is shown in the following image 18 00 19 00 Aniseed Syrup 10 00 Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning 22 00 Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix 21 35 Grandma s Boysenberry Spread 29 00 Uncle Bob s Organic Dried Pears 30 00 Northwoods Cranberry Sauce 240 00 Mishi Kobe Niku 97 00 lkura 31 00 Queso Cabrales 21 00 Queso Manchego La Pastora 36 00 Konbu 6 00 Tofu 23 25 Genen Shouyu 15 50 Pavlova 17 45 Alice Mutton 39 00 Cla tele tette fetta ta a ee el e e e e e Camarwon Tigers 222 pennn Ne L a e e e See Also 2011 DevExpress Inc 279 Report Designer 280 Conditionally Hide Bands Conditionally Change a Label s Text 2011 DevExpress Inc 280 Report Designer EN Conditionally Hide Bands This tutorial describes how to hide bands if a certain logical condition is met Note that no scripts are required to accomplish this task To demonstrate this feature we ll use a report with grouping similar to the one created in the following
33. See below for more information Shortcuts are associated with each page and command in the Ribbon To see the shortcuts press ALT or F10 Shortcuts will appear next to the corresponding tab pages and commands Alternative Page Gallery Page AL 3 Shortcuts can be composed of one two or three symbols If a shortcut is represented by one symbol you can invoke the command by pressing this symbol If a shortcut is represented by two or three symbols to invoke the command press the symbols one after another Initially when pressing ALT or F10 shortcuts are displayed for commands within the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Ribbon and for tab pages To access shortcuts for commands within a specific tab page you need to press the shortcut associated with this page For example to display shortcuts for commands within the Home page see the image above press H PR ithataeaee Hew Document 1 Ribbon Simple Pad M el fx 2011 DevExpress Inc m Rich Text Editor Rich Text Editor 443 This section describes the capabilities provided by the Rich Text Editor LITT SRE ce Sa ca ce E I FAIRY TALES Hans in Luck By the Germ gome men ar born to good luck all they do of try to do comes right all that falls to them is so mwh gain all their geese are swans all their cards are trumps toss them which way you will they will always like poor puss alight upon their legs and only move on so much
34. Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this control should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when the control s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the control will be split despite this property s value e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on 2011 DevExpress Inc 364 Report Designer 365 scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visibl
35. The Calculate a Checksum and Wide Narrow Ratio which should be in a range of 2 2 3 properties can be specified Code 93 was designed to supplement and improve Code 39 It is an alphanumeric variable length symbology providing higher reliability and density than Code 39 The Calculate a Checksum property can be specified It enables encoding of all 128 ASCII characters using Code 93 s Full ASCII Mode This is accomplished by using the and symbols as shift characters The Calculate a Checksum property can be specified MSI symbology also known as Modified Plessey is a low density numerical only symbology To specify the checksum use the MSI Checksum property It can be set to None Modulo 10 and Double Modulo 10 UCC EAN 128 symbology has the newer name GS1 128 It is based on the Code128 standard additionally specifying the Application Identifiers for data sections within the code It includes best before dates batch numbers quantities weights and other attributes The Character Set property can be specified Auto Charset is the recommended value The FNC1 Functional Character property defines a symbol that is not included in a bar code when met in text but used to generate the application identifiers The Human Readable Text property when set to Yes inserts parentheses into the text below the bar code for better readability The EAN 13 barcode contains 13 digits no letters or other characters
36. The Cross band Line control allows you to draw a line through several bands This can be useful if it is required to visually emphasize a section consisting of multiple band areas In other aspects it is Similar to a regular Line Cross band Box The Cross band Box control allows you to draw a rectangle through several bands This can be useful if it is required to visually encompass a section consisting of multiple band areas Subreport The Subreport control allows you Cross band Line to include other reports in your current report Add Controls to a Report To create a control drag it from the Toolbox panel onto the report area To automatically create a control bound to data drag a field from the Field List panel and drop it onto a report s surface When dropping a field onto an existing control this control will be bound to the data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 338 Report Designer 339 EE i aiii FA Categories El cooo AB aaa hy i i01 Icon_17 Sm Icon_25 STT Picture SE Parameters If you drag the field with the right mouse button when the button is released the context menu is invoked Use this menu to specify which control should be created paie myDataSet oe Categories a CategoryName Rich Text Bo ae Check Box Sm Icon_25 Ear Code fip Code i Picture E Parameters To learn more on data binding for report controls refer to Di
37. The Customize Bulleted 3 Click the Bulleted tab choose one of the existing List dialog will be invoked ustomire Bullet Bullet character Font pe Font a Characters Indent at Bullet position Text positon Note The Customize button is disabled if the None item of the Bullets and Numbering dialog is selected This item is selected automatically when you invoke the Bullets and Numbering dialog for lines of text rather than for a list 4 In this dialog change different list parameters to create your own list style For instance if you specify list parameters in the following way 2011 DevExpress Inc 490 Rich Text Editor ast Bullet character E lt o Font Character Bullet position Text positon you will get the list style as illustrated below Sociability Cohabitation Fighting Play AAS 2011 DevExpress Inc a Rich Text Editor 492 Multilevel Lists Create a Multilevel List as You Type 1 Point to the position within a document from which you want to begin your list i 2 Click the Multilevel list gt button on the Paragraph toolbar a a I l I I I i Multilevel list E Start a multilevel list 3 Type the text m 4 To change levels of the list press TAB and SHIFT TAB or click the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons on the Paragraph toolbar Press ENTER
38. The first two or three digits represent the country The leading zero actually Signifies the USA and UPC A coding The last digit is the checksum digit The control calculates it automatically and it should not be present in the control s text string So make sure that the text for this symbology contains no more than 12 digits If fewer digits are supplied the string is padded with zeroes on the left EAN 8 is a shortened version of the EAN 13 code It includes a 2 or 3 digit country code 4 of 5 data digits depending on the length of the country code anda checksum digit The control calculates the checksum digit automatically and it should not be present in the control s text string So make sure that the text for this symbology contains no more than 7 digits If fewer digits are supplied the string is padded with zeroes on the left 371 Report Designer 3 2 Industrial2of5 The Industrial or non interleaved 2 of 5 code is a numerical low density symbology based on two out of five code The Calculate a Checksum and Wide Narrow Ratio which should be greater than or equal to 2 5 properties can be specified Interleaved2of5 The Interleaved 2 of 5 code is a higher density numerical symbology based on two out of five code The Calculate a Checksum and Wide Narrow Ratio which should be greater than or equal to 2 5 properties can be specified A variant of non interleaved 2 of 5 code Itis a numerical only symbology
39. The invoked Report Wizard will guide you through the process of assigning a data source to the grid For detailed instructions on the Wizard s steps refer to Bind a Report to Data as this process is similar Note Note that after these steps the report s Data Source property must be set to None 2011 DevExpress Inc 250 Report Designer 251 Otherwise the grid will be blank at the preview and repeated as many times as there are records in the data source 4 After the dataset is created it is assigned to the grid s Data Source property Its Data Member property defines from which table or view of your dataset the grid obtains its data And the Data Adapter property is auto defined as well So once again click the grid s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the Run Designer link fieldOQrderID lt Orde Y You can add and delete MRPivotGrid fields and modify their settings Explorer style 6 Then switch to the Layout section in the navigation bar on the left Drag and drop the required fields to the Row Fields Column Fields and Data Items areas 2011 DevExpress Inc 251 Report Designer 252 Property Editor mi ix y mre G Modify the XRFivotGrid s layout sorting settings field arrangement fr click the Apply button to apply the modifications to the current XRPivotGrid You can also save the layout to an XML file this can be loaded and appl
40. click the Insert Columns to the Right button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar Insert aia to the Right Add a new column directly to the right of the selected column or 1 Right click a cell relative to which you want to insert a column 2 Click the Insert item in the context menu and select Insert Columns to the Left or Insert Columns to the Right 2011 DevExpress Inc 507 Rich Text Editor sos Delete Cells Insert Columns to the Right Split Cells Insert Rows Above Insert Rows Below Cell Alignment Insert Cells Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink 2011 DevExpress Inc sos Rich Text Editor 509 Delete a Cell Row or Column Delete a Cell 1 Click a cell to be deleted and then click the Delete button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar and select Delete Cells from the invoked list Or FES Split Cells Cell Alignment Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink 2 In the invoked Delete Cells dialog choose one of the available options 2011 DevExpress Inc sos Rich Text Editor sto Shift cells left F Delete entire raw Delete entire column le OK og p gt Cancel Shift cells up Delete entire row F Delete entire column le OK a fp Cancel a Delete entire row Delete entire column 201
41. display your selection using the corresponding view The table below details how you can select dates in different ways Click a date Click and drag across multiple dates Ofr click a start date hold down the SHIFT key and click an end date Hold down the CTRL key and click several dates A single date is selected and the Scheduler displays it using the Day View If the currently active view is of another type it is automatically changed to Day View The only exception is the Work Week View In this instance the entire work week is selected The continuous range of dates is selected The Scheduler adjusts the currently active view to display the selected range of dates If the selection is smaller than a week the view type is switched to Day View A week long range is displayed using the Week View If the range is more than a week then the Month View is used A set of dates is selected The Scheduler displays it using the Day View irrespective of the size of the selected range Click a week number A corresponding week long range is selected The Scheduler displays it using the Week View 2011 DevExpress Inc 553 Scheduler 564 Navigate Scheduler Resources When appointment data is grouped either by resources or by dates the number of resources shown on the screen within the Scheduler at once can make it difficult to see all the scheduled data To make the Scheduler s layout more readable
42. e Drag a column header from the column header panel to the group panel HE Formi Drag a column header here to group by that column Order ID Product Mame Guantity Discount 10246 Queso Cabrales 10248 Singaporean Hokkien F bs 10248 Mozzarella di Giovanni 10249 Tofu 10249 Manjimup Dried Apples 10250 Jack s New England cl e Right click a column header and select Group By This Column from the context menu Drag a column header here bo group by that column Supplier Antonio del valle Saaw il Antonio del Valle Saave Fil Mayumi Ohno Mayumi Ohno Mayumi Ohno A EG Y Ungroup Data Inik Price Sort Ascending Sort Descending Clear Sorting Group By This Column Group By Box Column Chooser Best Fit Clear Filter Filter Editor Best Fit fall colurnns 14 00 21 00 35 00 46 00 23 25 15 50 To ungroup data by a grouping column do one of the following e Drag a column header from the group panel to the column header panel 2011 DevExpress Inc HE Formi Product Mame Alice Mutton Aniseed Syrup Boston Crab Meat Camembert Pierrot Carnaryon URES Full Expand Order ID Sort Ascending Sort Descending Clear Sorting Untsroup Group By Box g Column Chooser Best Fit q Clear Filter SY Filter Editor Best Fit fall columns To remove grouping by all columns right click
43. l d Legs l e Claws 1 Whiskers 2 Behavior 2 a Sociability 2 b Cohabitation 2c Fighting 2d Play 5 Use TAB and SHIFT TAB or the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons of the Paragraph toolbar to change levels 2011 DevExpress Inc 496 Rich Text Editor Tables Insert a Table Insert a Table 1 Click the position within a document where you want to insert a table Insert Table Table Size Number of columns Number of rows le ok pe Cancel a Insert a Table inside Another Table Tables that are located inside other tables are called nested tables To insert a nested table 1 Point to the position within a table cell where you want to insert a table 2 Insert a table 2011 DevExpress Inc 497 497 Rich Text Editor 498 Add and Remove Table Borders Add Borders e Add Borders to the Whole Table 1 Select a table 2 Click the Borders button on the Table Styles toolbar and select one of the available border sets Bottom Border Top Border Left Border Right Border Outside Border Inside Border Inside Horizontal Border Inside Vertical Border e Add Borders to Specified Cells Only 1 Display gridlines to view boundaries of the table cells and select cells to be provided with borders 2 Click the Borders button on the Table Styles toolbar and select the border that you want to apply to cells Remove Table Borders e Remove Borders from the Whole Table
44. obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 342 Report Designer E Check Box The Check Box control is intended to display True False or Checked Unchecked Indeterminate states in a report by displaying or not a check mark which can be accompanied by a text description E E gt a In the Property Grid the Check Box control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Check Box e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as back
45. or HTML View Tab and view the result gt 2011 DevExpress Inc 202 Report Designer 293 Products by Categories Category 1 Chai Chang l Sasquatch Ale Steeleye Stout Cote de Blaye Chartreuse verte Ipoh Coffee Lau ghing Lumberjack Lager Outback Lager LakkalikOon Top of Report e See Also Add Bookmarks Create Hyperlinks 2011 DevExpress Inc 203 Report Designer 204 Miscellaneous The topics of this section cover the Report Designer features that don t fall into other categories This section consists of the following topics e Handle Events via Scripts e Show the Current Row Index e Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group e Add Page Numbers for Groups Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records Limit the Number of Records per Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 294 Report Designer 295 Handle Events via Scripts This document describes the basic principles of scripting which can be performed by handling the events ofa report and its bands and controls This documents consists of the following sections e Scripting Overview e Scripting Specifics e Example Custom Summary Scripting Overview Scripts are program commands placed within the event handlers of the required report elements And when the corresponding event occurs e g a mouse click the script code runs You can write scripts for a report or any of its elements bands and co
46. or just before it and double click with the left mouse button Another method is to place your cursor at the beginning of the word hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and click the Right Arrow e Selecting one paragraph Selecting one paragraph is similar to selecting one word Place the cursor in the paragraph and click three times with the left mouse button Another method is to place the cursor in the left margin and click twice to highlight the whole paragraph e Selecting entire document Click three times on the left side of the page in the margin area and the entire document will be highlighted Also the CTRL A keyboard shortcut can be used to highlight the entire document e Selecting one line The cursor in the margin will highlight one line with one click Another method is to place the cursor at the beginning of the line and use the SHIFT END keyboard shortcut to extend selection to the end of the line Similarly at the end of the line the SHIFT HOME keyboard shortcut can be used The following table lists the default keyboard shortcuts used for selecting text in the Rich Editor a CTRL SHIFT HOME Extends the selection to the beginning of the document CTRL SHIFT END Extends the selection to the end of the document CTRL SHIFT PAGE UP Extends the selection to the previous page CTRL SHIFT PAGE DOWN Extends the selection to the next page 2011 DevExpress Inc as Rich Text Editor 470 CTRL A Selects the entire d
47. styles and sizes and color Picture Box The Picture Box control is intended to display images of numerous formats in a report An image can be loaded from an external file from a bound data source or froma web location using the specified URL Panel The Panel control is a container that frames separate report 2011 DevExpress Inc 336 Report Designer 2011 DevExpress Inc Table Shape Bar Code Zip Code Chart Pivot Grid 3 M 337 controls to allow them to be easily moved copied and pasted and visually unite them in the report s preview with borders or a uniform color background The Table control is designed to arrange information in a tabular layout It may contain any number of Rows comprised of individual Cells Both Rows and Cells can be selected and customized individually In most aspects a Cell is similar to a Label but can also contain other controls e g Picture Box or Rich Text The Line control draws a line ofa specified direction style width and color It can be used for both decoration and visual separation of a report s sections The Line cannot cross bands as opposed to the Cross band Line control The Shape control allows you to embed simple graphic objects into your report You can choose one of multiple predefined shapes e g rectangles ellipses arrows polygons crosses and brackets of various kinds The Bar Code control transforms it
48. 290 15 00 19 00 14 00 15 00 C te de Blaye 263 50 15 00 46 00 14 00 19 00 16 00 10 00 22 00 21 35 Report Designer EN Create Hyperlinks This tutorial demonstrates how to embed a hyperlink into your report Note that a label will behave as a hyperlink both in a report s Print preview HTML preview and when the report is exported to PDF HTML MHT RTF XLS and XLSX formats To insert a hyperlink into your report do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Drop a Label onto the report and in the Property Grid change its Text to the one required for the link In addition to make the Label look like a typical link you can change its appearance appropriately e g make it blue and underlined 3 Now set its Navigation Target to the required value _blank _parent _search _self or _top and define the required Navigation URL Bookmark Navigation Target _ blank Navigation URL http www somewhere com Parent Bookmark none The hyperlink is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab or HTML View Tab and view the result www somewhere com t See Also Add Bookmarks Add a Cross Reference 2011 DevExpress Inc 201 Report Designer 292 Add a Cross Reference This tutorial demonstrates how to add a cross reference to your report A cross reference
49. Add a Sort In the invoked list choose a data member across which the report is to be sorted Group and Sort ra Adda Group MA Add a Sort Delet Move n Move Down Fedname A Products fe CategoryID 1 CategoryID FF Discontinued foal ProductID Productvame Gb QuantityPerUnit E ReorderLevel Em SupplierID E UnitPrice tga UnitsInStock Note that sorting across calculated fields is supported as well 2 TO manage the sorting order ascending or descending use the Sort Order drop down list And if multiple sorting criteria are specified you can define the priority for each one by selecting it in the Group and Sort Panel and using the Move Up and Move Down buttons The sorting is now applied Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 204 Report Designer 205 Products by Categories Category 1 Chai 18 00 Chang 19 00 Chartreuse verte 16 00 C te de Blaye 263 50 Guarana Fantastica 24 50 Ipoh Coffee 46 00 Lakkalik6 n 18 00 Laughing Lumberjack Lager 14 00 Outback Lager 15 00 Rh nbrau Klosterbier f 75 Sasquatch Ale 14 00 Steeleye Stout 18 00 455 75 Category 2 Aniseed Syrup 10 00 Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning 22 00 Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix 21 35 See Also Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report Add Calculated Fields to a Report Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result 2011 DevExpres
50. CleverQ Report Manager User Manual home page will contain links to the files Files indexed include PDF HTML HTM and MHT If an IndexMaster htm file exists it will be used as part of the Home Page This allows you to create a custom home page with a logo If you do not have this file a default home page will be created The repository may contain subfolders and these are treated as groups and will appear as a link on the parent index htm and will open a new index htm file created in the subfolder This allows you to group reports and organize the static web site more You might also use this feature to provide security on the website using Windows security to give access to users by subfolder Report Design If you will be creating new reports or modifying existing reports you will use the Report Designer The concepts regarding Report Designs was covered in an earlier section and it is suggested that you review this section again In this section more details about report design will be covered Using the Report Designer Each report design must have a data source You can establish this ahead of time or create a data source directly from within the Report Designer For reports that are based on the CleverQ QBD file which is the default for all system reports included with the software the data source should be established ahead of time using the Data Sources functionality of the Report Manager Warning If you move your CleverQ Q
51. Collapse m Trademark BMW S clear Grouping m Trademark Cadillac m Trademark Dodge Expand Collapse Master Rows in Grid Views To expand collapse a master row do one of the following e Click the master row s expand button 2011 DevExpress Inc a3 Expand Button Company Mame Contact Title 4 Specialty Biscuits Lid Sales Representative Peter Wilson 4 PB Kn ckebr d AB Sales Agent Lars Peterson m Refrescos Americanas LTDA Marketing Manager Carlos Diaz m Heli SOGwaren GmbH amp Co Ka Sales Manager Petra Winkler Record 1 of 29 e tX e Double click the indicator cell corresponding to the master row Company Mame Contact Title 4 4 Specialty Biscuits Ltd Sales Representative Peter Wilson l PE kn ckebr d 46 Sales Agent Lars Peterson l Refrescos Americanas LTDA Marketing Manager Carlos Diaz ia Heli SOGwaren GmbH amp Co Ka Sales Manager Petra Winkler Record 1 of 29 gt gt gt a JIL v Indicator Cells e Focus the master row and press CTRL PLUS to expand the row or CTRL MINUS to collapse the row Expand Collapse Cards in Card and Layout Views Do one of the following e Click a card s Expand button Model SL500 Roadster Trademark Mercedes Benz Hyperlink http Ua mercedes com Picture Description LAJ e Click a card s caption and press PLUS to expand the card or MINUS to collapse the card 2011 DevExpress Inc ea Hide an
52. Date Is less than or equal to 7ToDate The parameterized report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and in the Parameters section define the required values and click Submit 2011 DevExpress Inc 255 01 11 95 01 12195 01 12 95 01 13 95 10370 10371 10372 10373 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379 10380 10381 10382 Switzerland France Brazil lreland Poland USA Canada UK Sweden Brazil lreland Venezuela Austna UK Report Designer 256 195 68 1 17 0 45 890 79 124 12 20 12 20 39 22 21 5 03 39 03 7 99 34 24 Zoom Factor 100 2011 DevExpress Inc 256 Report Designer 257 Chart with Static Series This document describes how to create a report with a Chart control bound to data so that a particular series has its own data source and other settings To simplify the example both series obtain their data from the same data source However different data sources can be used for different series if necessary This example describes how to construct a chart of products and their prices for a chosen category 1 k Product Name Po a Category Unit Frice 50 Queso Cabrales Dairy Products 21 00 Queso Manchego La Pastora Dairy Products 38 00 ue Gorgonzola Telino Dairy Products 12 50 a0 Mascarpone Fabioli Dairy Products 32 00 Geitost Dairy Products 2 50 Raclette Courdavault Dairy
53. DevExpress Inc 493 Rich Text Editor a different list parameters 1 Select the multilevel list or text to be transformed into the multilevel list to which you want to apply your own style 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the resulting context menu The Bullets and Numbering dialog will be displayed Bu 3 Click the Outline Numbered tab choose one of the existing styles and click Customize The Customize Outline Numbered List dialog will be invoked 2011 DevExpress Inc 494 Rich Text Editor a95 Customize Outline Numbered List Number format Level Number format Number style 2 3 4 5 6 Fi a 9 Number positon Text positon Indentat 0 257 2 Follow Number With Note The Customize button is disabled if the None item of the Bullets and Numbering dialog is selected This item is selected automatically when you invoke the Bullets and Numbering dialog for lines of text rather than for a list 4 In this dialog change different list parameters to create your own list style For instance if you specify list parameters in the following way 2011 DevExpress Inc a95 Rich Text Editor ase Customize Outline Numbered List Number format Level Number format Number style Start at dana 2 Number position Text position Follow Number With a be 1 Physiology la Skeleton 1 b Mouth le Ears
54. E a aa AE aE aa a aaa EA a ER EAEE AEAEE EE aaie 99 Finish Layout CUStONVIZ AOI ais fs cosiecewcacccwctssacemetecussudss nace tecccwus iudwedenanuecs couse sresstceesenuswvanenmendcussedeleseoceaverstcetecsunncvncudasaudevens 100 Hide and Display Elements using a Layout Managel cccccsesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaneeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeessessenanseesenaneeesenes 101 Change Bement Layo wh icccesceercscescsadecctecsscacctepecetsasesctacesccs dares cont a S A ARa aeae T ETA 102 Resize nf rfoce ENS 1G S a a E E E E nine 103 Add Empty Regions Separators Splitters and LabelsS snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mennene 104 Change Text Label Onur sicccecce ccc ciegicccensins cusstcccuaceesatntodecsansdceewoetnsantneccecteussuvecnduruassseceestosns xteta catesensixxecbenssaasaemeeeceasansteeecee 105 Work with Interface Bement Group isi icecccciscescivecicescaccnccscch ccnsteceteancvsvsiacevaccsssncesccndtusnsenceseussunesiecsceusancueecectvesnestnteusensecess 106 Create and Delete Tabbed Groups iisicec soca iisccwtend ag faceccacecaa sin cck ooecsavedeete deus xecveet Sexen ces asveecwseecivcsaetiessiuasceucenbisestencescndeusssauteee 108 sav and RESTOre Lay OG riia Ea EE Eaa ea aE a a ae ENER 112 Save and Restore Interface Layo Wie iiccccccscs ccsctccsccceecaticcecesancancecsacesgnnteccoces ve suvets ont skendcestonsacavceauatrecsunscdbenosansannetectaassnnentees 112 Naviga lon BANS i ciisecescicea
55. Embedding Fields Mail Merge Document Protection e Protect and Unprotect a Document e Edit a Protected Document Miscellaneous e Insert a Bookmark e Insert a Hyperlink e Insert a Page Break e Insert a Picture e Insert Page Numbers 2011 DevExpress Inc aaa Rich Text Editor aas e Insert a Symbol 2011 DevExpress Inc as Rich Text Editor a Text Editor Ul Editor Elements The Rich Text Editor consists of visual elements that provide you with capability of editing and viewing documents Horizontal ruler Text Editing Surface FAIRY TALES Hans n Luck Vertical scrollbar o Vertical ruler By thee Grime Brothers Some are born to good luck all they do of try to do comes right all that falls to them is so much gain all their gesse are swans all their cards are tramps toss which way you will they will always like poor puss alight upon their lees and only move on so much the faster The world may very likely not always think of them as they think of themselves but what care they forthe world what can it know about the matter One of these lucky beings was neighbour Hans Seven lone years he had worked hard for his master At last he said Master my time is up I must go home and see my poor mothar once more so 4 a nen i Horizontal scrollbar pdr Pua Gera pura Baa Main Elements The main area of the Rich Text Editor control is the Text Editing Surface
56. If there are other controls below the current one they will be moved up to fill the gap Note that if a control overlaps the shrinking Rich Text by even one pixel it will not be pushed up by the shrinking Rich Text Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this control should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when the control s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the control will be split despite this property s value Process Duplicates Determines the control s behavior when its data source contains consecutive repeating records They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave Suppressed except for the first entry Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the repeated records Suppress and Shrink Process Null Values Determines whether to process Null blank values if they appear in the control s data source They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave suppressed Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the blank records Suppress and Shrink Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For
57. Il Filter String Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection _ Style Sheet Collection _ Watermark None Note In this case data binding steps are omitted since a report already has a bound data source Note that the initial report layout will be lost after completing the wizard The Report Wizard provides two different ways to setup your report e Standard Report Wizard Using this wizard you can easily create a banded report displaying data in a tabular format While setting up your report you ll be able to group data add totals to your report apply one of the predefined report styles etc e Label Report Wizard This wizard is useful if you need to print out labels In this case you re likely to purchase label paper that meets your particular requirements Depending on paper supplier and label type your report will need to generate labels with a specific size and location within paper sheets With the Label Report Wizard you won t have to adjust these settings manually since we provide a wide choice of paper suppliers and their products Simply choose your paper type and the report is adjusted automatically After completing the wizard you get an empty report that clearly indicates label boundaries and of course properly positions labels within paper sheets 2011 DevExpress Inc ats Report Designer ato Standard Report Wizard The Re
58. Items Drafts Motes Expanded Group To collapse a specific expanded group click the expand button within the group s header Expand Button HAJ Calendar To expand a specific collapsed group click the collapse button Collapse Button Motes A ba Motes Expand Groups in the Navigation Bar That Displays One Group at a Time 117 To expand a specific collapsed group click the group s button The previously opened group will be collapsed 2011 DevExpress Inc 117 Navigation Bars ons Active Group Mail 4 Inbox LA Gubbox Sent Items al Deleted Items LA Drafts Calendar Contacts Motes Collapsed Groups 2011 DevExpress Inc ns Pivot Table 119 Pivot Table This section describes the capabilities provided by the Pivot Table which represents data in a cross tabulated form Quantity l ear H Quarter Sales Person fs Category Mame fs Ei E5 E 19 1996 Total Sesan O e fe Andrew Fuller ij Beverages 121 274 326 345 674 110 Jr ma e2U eve 155 305 ef 293 320 ol n34 96 230 326 E Anne Dodsworth 118 198 123 ao 203 ol 209 149 ony 04 116 16 fo 156 eal r fe 103 243 346 Data Editing e Edit Data in Pivot Tables Data Presentation e Sort Data in Pivot Tables e Filter Data in Pivot Tables Layout Customization e Expand and Collapse Groups in Pivot Tables e Hide and Display Pivot Table Fields e Reorder Pivot Tab
59. L E ProductName a Note You can also create a new label for your total by simply dragging it from the Control Toolbox 3 Now select the newly created Label click its Smart Tag and in its actions list click the ellipsis button for the Summary item And in the invoked Summary Editor specify the summary options The following image shows an example of how you can set up your total Note that the Summary Running option is set to Report to ensure that all values from the specified data field are taken into account 2011 DevExpress Inc 21 Report Designer 212 Summary Editor 2 5 Total Units 0 i Total Units 32 Ignore null values C None amp tNote The Ignore NULL values option won t affect the result in this example since NULL values are treated like zeros by default So Sum won t change whether these values are taken into account or not This option makes sense for functions like Count or Average because the number of elements counted will depend on it Note also that value formatting is applied to a summary independently of the general formatting and has a greater priority When calculating totals for groups you can sort the groups against a summary function result To save the settings and close the dialog click OK Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 212 Report Designer 213 Chang Queso Cabrales Sir Rodne
60. OK to save changes and close the dialog Note If the Image button is disabled then logo insertion is not supported by your software vendor 2011 DevExpress Inc 147 Print Preview as Scaling Scale Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor To scale a document click the Scale 4 button on the toolbar The Scaling dialog will be invoked Set the required percentage value in the editor Adjust to 80 K normal size Click OK to save changes and close the dialog iNote If you re working with a document loaded from file you cannot use scaling 2011 DevExpress Inc ms Print Preview 149 Scale Print Preview by Specifying Width in Pages To scale a document to fit into X pages click the Scale AJ button on the toolbar The Scaling dialog will be invoked Set the required number of pages in the editor Fitt 4 H pages wide Click OK to save changes and close the dialog amp tNote If you re working with a document loaded from file you cannot use scaling 2011 DevExpress Inc mo Print Preview 150 Zooming Zoom Print Preview In or Out Zoom In and Out of a Document e To zoom in a document click the Zoom In button on the toolbar or press CTRL PLUS SIGN e To zoom out of a document click the Zoom Out button on the toolbar or press CTRL MINUS SIGN To zoom in or out of a document you can also hold down CTRL and rotate the mouse wheel Use the Magnifier Tool Use
61. P ProductName UnitPrice j j PageFooter one band per page Units per Page Count UnitPrice The Page Header Footer bands are the best place for information that should be printed on every page For example use them to display the header of a table which is continued from the previous page an example can be found at the Table Report tutorial Note If you insert page break right after the Report Header by setting its Page Break to After the Band the Page Footer and Page Header bands will not be printed on the first page In the Property Grid the properties of these bands are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band e Font Specifies the font settings for the controls contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Chan
62. PRNX format Loading is stopped an incompatible markup This file cannot be loaded in the Print Preview Try to open a file with a compatible markup 2011 DevExpress Inc ast Report Designer 182 Report Designer This guide contains information about the basic principles of creating reports with Report Designer The Report Designer allows you to create new reports from scratch bind them to data and even pass them to another workstation and load them into another instance of the report designer In addition to report editing capabilities it allows you to display its Print Preview and send its output to a printer or export it to a file on disk Report Designer Eile Edit View Format 5 A RenortHeader is i label3 aS GroupHeader 1 mA label4 7 E Detail Units Count Count UnitPrice ja p f a ae fone band per report The following sections are available in this guide e Report Editing Basics e Create Reports e Report Designer Reference e Report Wizard e Preview Print and Export Reports Note Some features described in this guide may differ from what you see in your application This depends on your application vendor 2011 DevExpress Inc 182 Report Designer Report Editing Basics This section describes the most basic tasks you may encounter when initiating a report edit in the Report Designer The following documents are available in this section Report Editi
63. Pfft ft feta Merge Cells Merge the selected cells into one cell Note The Merge Cells button becomes available after you have selected the table cells to be merged Split Cells 1 Click a cell or select multiple cells that you want to split 2 Click the Split Cells button on the Merge toolbar Baa i anon E p o G Da Split Cells Split the selected cells into multiple new cells 3 In the invoked Split Cells dialog set the number of columns and rows into which the selected cells should be split If multiple cells are selected you can first merge these cells and then spit the newly created cell into the specified number of columns and rows select the Merge cells before split check box in the dialog Menge oele before split OK gt 1 Cancel or each of the selected cells can be split clear the Merge cells before split check box 2011 DevExpress Inc 51 Rich Text Editor sta Split Table 1 Click any cell included into a row relative to which you want to split a table This row will be the first row of the second table 2 Click the Split Table button on the Merge toolbar 1 i A Split Table Split the table into two tables The selected row wil become the first row of the mew table 2011 DevExpress Inc sta Rich Text Editor 515 Align Text in Table
64. Picture EF Parameters SFI None Special Capabilities After a control is bound you can apply formatting to its dynamic content e g for it to be treated as currency or date time content For details on this refer to Change Value Formatting of Report Elements 2011 DevExpress Inc 194 Report Designer 195 It is possible to make a control display a result of a summary function calculated across the data field to which it is bound For details on this refer to Add Totals to a Report Another noteworthy option is to combine both static and dynamic content within the same control e g to append some text prefix or postfix to a value obtained from a database or even bind a control to multiple data fields at one time This is detailed in Use Mail Merge in Report Elements If it s required to perform some pre calculations over the data field to which a control is bound this can be done by creating a calculated field and binding the control to it This is detailed at Add Calculated Fields to a Report In turn a calculated field may contain both dynamic and static parameters which can be requested each time a report is being previewed For more information refer to Add Parameters to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 195 Report Designer 196 Use Mail Merge in Report Elements The mail merge feature allows you to combine both static and dynamic content within the same control e g to append some text pref
65. PivotGrid OrderID Produck Name Quantity Filter Grea Then you can display the required field using the functionality provided by the Customization Form as follows 1 Click the required field in the Customization Form PiyvotGrid Field List Drag Items to the PivotGrid B OrderID Product Mame La it Quantity Add Ta Filter Area 2 In the dropdown combobox select the Pivot Table s area within which the field is to be displayed 2011 DevExpress Inc 129 Pivot Table 130 PivotGrid Field List Drag Items bo the Pivoktsrid O i L x E Orderlp Row Area Column Area Filter Grea Data Area Data Aree E 3 Click the Add To button PiyvotGrid Field List COEECEEEEELEELELLLLLELLLLLLELCELLLLLELCELLELLELCELLLLLECCE Alternatively you can drag and drop the field from the Customization Form onto the required area of the Pivot Table Order Amount a Sales Person USA Grand Total PivotGrid Field List ra p eee ee eee ee eee are rt a Quarter 2 NES FEAE 24 978 30 210 125 252 Quarter Order Product Mame Quantity Data Area a 2011 DevExpress Inc 130 Pivot Table 131 Reorder Pivot Table Fields To move a field to another position use drag and drop ope
66. Products 55 00 io Camembert Pierrot Dairy Products 34 00 Gudbrandsdalsast Dairy Products 36 00 i Fl temysost Dairy Products e Mozzarella di Giovanni Dairy Products To adjust a Chart by manually creating its series do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox onto the report s Detail band x There are no visible series to represent ina chart z Try to add new series or make sure that atl least one of them is visible Note that after you drop the Chart the Chart Wizard may be invoked if its Show wizard every time a new chart is added option is enabled In this example we don t need to use the Wizard so click Cancel to close its window 3 To bind the Chart to a data source click its Smart Tag In the invoked actions list expand the Data Source drop down selector and click Add New DataSource 2011 DevExpress Inc 257 Report Designer 258 Data Source Data Member There are no visible series to represent in a chart Try to add new series or make sure that at least one of them is visible Data Adapter Formatting Rules H Add New DataSource Run Wizard Annotations Palettes The invoked connection Wizard will guide you through the process of assigning a data source to the Chart For detailed instructions on the Wizard s steps refer to Bind a Report to Data as this process is Similar iNote Note that after these steps the
67. SHIFT TAB e In Grid Views press LEFT ARROW In Card Views and Layout Views press UP ARROW If a cell editor is active pressing LEFT ARROW moves focus to the previous cell if the caret is positioned at the beginning of the current cell s text or if the cell s text is selected in its entirety To focus the first cell within the current row in Grid Views press HOME To focus the last cell within the current row in Grid Views press END To focus the first row card e press CTRL HOME in Grid Views e press HOME or CTRL HOME in Card Views and Layout Views To focus the last row card e press CTRL END in Grid Views e press END or CTRL END in Card Views and Layout Views To move focus to the Auto Filter Row displayed at the top of a Grid View do one of the following e Click this row e If a top data row is focused press CTRL UP ARROW Move Focus Away From the Grid Control Press CTRL TAB or CTRL SHIFT TAB 2011 DevExpress Inc Select Grid Rows and Cards Select Individual Rows Cards To select a row card and clear the existing selection do one of the following e In Grid Views click the row s indicator cell or any of its data cells Trademark J 4 Trademark Jaguar T Trademark Lexus B J Trademark Mercedes Benz 7 a w Sports C230 kompressor Sport Loupe 159 g Indicator Cells e In Card and Layout Views click the card s caption or any of its data cells e Select the row card using the
68. Saavedra Pu Dairy Products Queso Cabrales 22 ey Dairy Products Queso Manchego La Pastora 6 m Supplier Beate ileid m Supplier Carlos Diaz MaAs 125 Footer A context menu displaying a list of supported summary types will be displayed Count Sum Min Max _ Count Average None 2 Select the required option from the context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc a2 Layout Customization Expand and Collapse Rows and Cards in Grids Expand Collapse Group Rows in Grid Views To expand collapse a group row do one of the following e Click the row s expand button Category Category ts ron reena Jm e B Category Saloon Category w Sports t fF Category W Truck Expand Button e Double click the group row e Double click the indicator cell corresponding to the group row J Trademark Jaguar Trademark Lexus E j2 E Trademark Mercedes Benz 7 a w Sores C230 kompressor Spork Coupe 159 g Trademark Indicator Cells e Focus the group row and press PLUS to expand the row or MINUS to collapse the row e Focus the group row and press RIGHT ARROW to expand the row or LEFT ARROW to collapse the row To expand or collapse all group rows right click the group panel at the top of the control This opens the group panel context menu Then select Full Expand or Full Collapse respectively eem r Full Expand Category Mi Full
69. Specific Date button or Dynamic Date button Page 26 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual cel vane on ga C lle Te aT rte oe a ae et _ 5 aa g rameters i Choose L i Specific Date Dynamic Date it June gt O10 gt Date Range Sp This Year 5 M TWW eT F 5 1273 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 7 1 A g d L i I K I f a j b f Sry 7 z E a iat wo 8 ain ae em ee onli apts ee a aan l who m os E Yameters tors by Category 3 Choose tors by Category 3 Specific Date Dynamic Date si eters x Ba Date Range All This Year Today This Week This Week bo date This Month This Month to date This Fiscal Quarter This Fiscal Quarter bo date This Year This Fiscal Year This Fiscal Year to date Yesterday Last Week Last Week bo date Last 30 Days Last Month Last Month bo date Last Fiscal Quarter Last Fiscal Quarter bo date Last Year Last Fiscal Year Last Fiscal Year to date Last 12 months Mest Week Next 4 Weeks Nest Month Next Fiscal Quarter Next Fiscal ear Custom Date Range Specific Date weet ee Pi I A aaa 1 gt 4 Page 27 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Warning The date parameters are unique in that they can be a date or a string value An absolute date is a real date type but a dynamic
70. Stretch property The Shape image will be stretched to cover maximum space within the control s borders e Visible Specifies a value indicating whether the current control should be printed when set to Yes or hidden No on report generation Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 367 Report Designer aes If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is
71. String Functions Ascii String Returns the ASCII code value of Ascii a the leftmost character in a character expression Char Number Converts an integerASCIICode to a Char 65 Char 51 character CharIndex String1 String2 Returns the starting position of CharIndex e devexpress String1 within String2 beginning from the zero character position to the end of a string CharIndex String1 String2 Returns the starting position of CharIndex e devexpress 2 StartLocation String1 within String2 beginning from the StartLocation character position to the end ofa string Concat String1 StringN Returns a string value containing Concat A ProductName the concatenation of the current string with any additional strings Insert String1 StartPosition Inserts String2 into String1 at the Insert Name 0 ABC String2 position specified by StartPositon Len Value Returns an integer containing Len Description either the number of characters in a string or the nominal number of bytes required to store a variable Lower String Returns String in lowercase Lower ProductName PadLeft String Length Left aligns characters in the defined string padding its left side with white space characters up to a specified total length PadLeft String Length Char Left aligns characters in the PadLeft Name 30 lt defined string padding its left side with the specifi
72. Text You can add bullets to existing lines of text in two ways The first method is to use the Paragraph toolbar 1 Select the text lines that you want to transform into a list p 2 Click the Bullets button on the Paragraph toolbar Another way to do the same thing is to use the context menu 1 Select the text to be transformed into a list 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the invoked context menu Sociability Cohabitation Fighting Play Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph E Bookmark Hyperlink 3 In the invoked Bullets and Numbering dialog click the Bulleted tab and choose the list style that you 2011 DevExpress Inc 488 Rich Text Editor 489 want to apply Bullets and Numbering Bulleted Numbered Outline Numbered Create Your Own List Style You can create your own style for a bulleted list on the basis of one of the existing list styles by changing various list parameters 1 Select the bulleted list or text to be transformed into the bulleted list to which you want to apply your own style 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the resulting context menu The Bullets and Numbering dialog will be displayed 2011 DevExpress Inc 489 Rich Text Editor 490 Bullets and Numbering Bulleted Numbered Qutine Numbered styles and click Customize
73. The Calculate a Checksum and Wide Narrow Ratio which should be greater than or equal to 2 5 properties can be specified PDF417 This Portable Data File symbology is used in a variety of applications and can also be used to generate postage accepted by the United States Postal Service It consists of a variable number of rows each of which is like a small linear bar code Among other options the Error Correction Level specifies the amount of redundancy to protect a barcode s legibility This symbology is used by the United States Postal Service to assist in directing mail The code usually contains the zip code and delivery point number Unlike most other barcodes PostNet actually encodes data in the height of the bars The UPC A barcode contains 12 digits no letters or other characters The first digit is the prefix signifying the product type The last digit is the check digit The check digit is calculated using the first eleven figures when the barcode is constructed So fora correct UPC A make sure that the text contains no more than 11 digits If there are fewer than 11 the string is padded with zeroes on the left This symbology is a variation of UPC A which allows for a more compact barcode by eliminating extra zeros The first digit is always zero the last digit is a checksum digit of the original UPC A code Not every UPC A code can be transformed into UPC EO E g the control s text string 4210000526 is dis
74. To cancel the sorting click the same item again or Remove All Sorting to cancel sorting for all dimension fields 2011 DevExpress Inc 122 Pivot Table 123 Filter Data in Pivot Tables By default a Pivot Table processes all records when calculating its values Data filtering allows you to process only those records that meet your requirements Simple Filtering To filter against a field do the following e Hover over the field header The filter button E will be highlighted lt 2 Product Sales Shipped Year 15 942 14 27 642 99 toc AF CO e Click the filter button to display the filter drop down list containing field values that can be filtered Product Mame Shipped Quarter FP Product sales shipped Year Category Name t Ha Ra show all Beverages Jj Beverages a Condiments Condiments 0 Confections Confections 5 eases Dairy Products E Saai orains Cereals i i EA grains Cereals MeatiPoultry Meat Poultry Cancel 2 i gp Produce 9 177 08 47 491 56 paiana 15 652 56 tAr ARE N e Deselect field values that must be hidden and select fields that must be visible Then click OK to close the drop down filter list and apply the filter In this manner you can filter data against multiple fields The filter drop down invoked for fields arranged into a group has a tree like interface which allows you to manipulate the values of all fields
75. To format the control s text via its Smart Tag invoked its actions list and specify the required format You can either type it in the Format field or click its ellipsis button and use the Format String Editor Format FormatString Editor Category sample DateTime Wednesday January 20 2010 Number Percent Currency General Mid yyyy Mid yy MM iddjyy MM dd yyyy yy MM fdd ddMMM yy dddd MMMM dd yyyy The result is shown below m gt a Wednesday 20 Jaruary 2010 Add the User Name 1 Select the Page Info control click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the drop down list for the Page Information entry and select User Name Current of Total Page Numbers Page Number Roman Lowercase Page Number Roman Uppercase Current Date and Time User Name Collection 2 To format the control s text via its Smart Tag invoke its actions list and specify the required format e g Current User 0 2011 DevExpress Inc ze Report Designer 217 The result is shown below E a Andrew Fuller See Also Create or Modify Watermarks of a Report Add Page Numbers for Groups 2011 DevExpress Inc 217 Report Designer os Create or Modify Watermarks of a Report This document describes how to add a text watermark in a repor
76. a band of any type except for the Detail band since it is required in a report right click anywhere ona report s surface and in the invoked Context Menu point to Insert Band and choose the band type Paste Delete TopMargin Insert Detail Report ReportHeader Zoom b T Properties Prope GroupHeader Detail GroupFooter ReportFooter PageFooter BottomMargin See Also Detail Band Grouping Bands Report Header and Footer Page Header and Footer Page Margin Bands Detail Report Band for Master Detail Reports 2011 DevExpress Inc 396 Report Designer 397 Detail Band The Detail band is the central part of a report Unlike other bands it cannot be deleted the present report structure includes the Detail band in its core In a data bound report the contents of the Detail band are repeated for every data entry e g if you re building a report listing say products it will be rendered for each product in the database And if static data is also present in the Detail band in the resulting report it is repeated with each new entry F Detail This item has been expired HHA ProductName 0 TopMarain CHE Detail i kA label2 This item has been expired Chai This item has been expired Chang This item has been expired Aniseed Syrup This item has been expired Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning This item has been expired Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix This item has been exp
77. a date time value that is AddDays OrderDate 30 the specified number of days away from the specified DateTime AddHours DateTime HoursCount Returns a date time value that is AddHours StartTime 2 the specified number of hours away from the specified DateTime AddMilliSeconds DateTime Returns a date time value that is AddMilliSeconds StartTime MilliSecondsCount the specified number of 5000 milliseconds away from the specified DateTime AddMinutes DateTime Returns a date time value that is AddMinutes StartTime 30 MinutesCount the specified number of minutes away from the specified DateTime AddMonths DateTime Returns a date time value that is AddMonths OrderDate 1 MonthsCount the specified number of months away from the specified DateTime AddSeconds DateTime Returns a date time value that is AddSeconds StartTime 60 SecondsCount the specified number of seconds away from the specified DateTime AddTicks DateTime TicksCount Returns a date time value that is AddTicks StartTime 5000 the specified number of ticks away from the specified DateTime AddTimeSpan DateTime TimeSpan Returns a date time value that is AddTimeSpan StartTime away from the specified DateTime Duration for the given TimeSpan 2011 DevExpress Inc 52 Expression Editor 53 AddYears DateTime YearsCount Returns a date time value that is AddYears EndDate 1 the specified number of years away
78. al et tape NG a Mareen al rt la cmt ce a ha cli 134 File Management rasipisecensaiceasscacanace nuanced a E aatencucasuan passes auidigusacam E 137 Save Print Preview to FIG cinei aa e aa E a E aaa AE E aaa aa AAA a ae aaar aeaa 137 L ad a Print Preview Trom a File cossiga a A aa Ea E aa 138 Printing and Page Setup ea eaa a oat sage E a aa a aE aea OE a a EEA Ea cde a aaa EES A ENEE 139 Printa Document Via the Print Dialog csini a a aa a a 139 Print a Document Using Default Settings svaisscacdccsnrcenciecesunscicennceusauaenstieeedevacuiacccntieh avadintentesensddcceudanuecnaveeseusatertediaeutadienet 140 Change Printing Settings via the Page Setup Dialog nnnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 141 Specify Page Margins in Print Pre Vie W a tae re araea aaa decane dk ceed ea E Aa Ee aa AA A aaa aa aa AE AAAA AAA AEA KA KAGA 142 Headers and FOOLON S cicicicassotis ce cessnicatees anlowmeagten cot anacassavatemnasiy samustadvenaurduacuaesuanenbsesauidacenetenduuavsbansavaueabacdsunwbatasuten uenenaduanauvelonurneedls 143 Insert Page Header and Page Footer into Printed DOCUMENES ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeeeeseeeseneneeesenanseeseoes 143 Insert Page Numbers into Printed Documents cccceceeeeeee esse neeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeaaeeeeeasseesenesseeeeeesseeeeneseesenanseeseneneeesones 144 Insert Date and Time into Printed DOCUM CNKHS ceecceeeeeeseee
79. also can apply mail merge to this label 4 In addition you can enable the corresponding Group Footer band by checking the Show Footer option in the Group and Sort Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 208 Report Designer 209 es Ad Add a wn _ Add a Sort X De Delete LQ 3 Move Up To manage the sorting order of the group s items ascending or descending use the Sort Order drop down list 5 Then you can calculate a total across the group by placing a Label onto this band and specifying its Summary properties in the following way GroupFooter1 m E gt a u Sum UnitPrice ja Running Ignore Null Values No Running Gets or sets a value specifying a report area for which the arithmetic function is calculated Note also that value formatting is applied to a summary independently of the general formatting and has a greater priority The report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 20 Report Designer 210 To learn how groups can be sorted against a summary function result see Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result To learn how page numbers can be added to groups independently from the report s page numbers refer to Add Products by Categories Category 1 suarana Fantastica Ipoh Coffee Rh nbrau Klosterbier Category 2 Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Vegie spread Category 3 Teatime Chocolate Biscuits sir Rodney s Marma
80. an existing data source you have already defined 2 to use the report wizard This will require you know the location and associated information about the database you will connect to 3 to start with a blank report design You can choose your data source using the design interface Once you make your select and press OK the report designer will appear At this point refer to the later section about Report Design and Appendix A Editing a Report Design To edit an existing design select the report from the Report Design List and press the Edit View Report Design button The report designer will appear similar to the figure below Page 17 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual ad Fequrt asjana Widiedines uy Gutsyury Guuy Ce f efx me e wew romas OOOO y OE i la Save O B S Save To File Load Parameters Script To Clipboard Data Connection CleverQ Help p Times New Roman 9 75 B JIU A w Z Z Z HG dataSet1 E Indicator Definitions fab Advice1 i E Advice2 v izi ReportHeader one band per report al Advices Application_Name E Company_Nam amp _ fab Category E lt _ lt RRR E Colori Title1 E Cobr2 Tie2 a o coo Date Range Oate_Range E Data Type Data Type B E E i s i ab DesiredLo Category findicator_Definitions Category G i sti Indicato Name Calculated Value Formula al a ho PageHeader one band per page l al Icon2 Title1 fab Icon3 Indica
81. and press ALT DOWN ARROW or F4 e Click the editor s dropdown button Close Cell Editor s Dropdown For all editors providing a dropdown you can close the dropdown by pressing ALT DOWN ARROW If the calculator is displayed in the dropdown it can be closed via CTRL ENTER Dropdowns displaying lists of items can be closed by clicking an item with the mouse or by selecting an item with the keyboard and pressing ENTER Change Values Change Date Time Values You can edit these cell values without opening the dropdown calendar Position the caret at the portion of a date time value that needs to be changed To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Numeric Values To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Values of Cells That Provide Dropdown Items To select the previous value press CTRL UP ARROW To select the next value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Note This feature is not applicable to all editors Edit Images 2011 DevExpress Inc sss Vertical Grid sse To copy cut paste load and save images in image editors right click the image and select the required command via the context menu Cut Copy Paste a Delete gt Load a Save 2011 DevExpress Inc sse Vertical Grid 587 Layout Customization Expand and Collapse Rows in Vertical Grids Expand and Collapse Data Rows Do one
82. be included in the result Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens e Sheet name Define the sheet name e Text export mode Choose whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLSX format string if it is possible or embedded into cell values as plain text e Show grid lines Check if it s required to show grid lines in the resulting XLSX file e Export hyperlinks Check if it s required to export hyperlinks See Also XLS Specific Export Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 172 Print Preview 173 CSV Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define CSV specific exporting options using the following dialog CSV Export Options Encoding Cyrillic Windows Text export mode Value Text separator e Quote strings with separators e Encoding Define the encoding used in the exported document e Text export mode Choose whether to use the formatting of the data fields in the bound dataset for the cells in the exported document Note that if this property is set to Text all data fields are exported to the CSV file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into those strings e Text separator Define a text separator comma by default e You can also specify whether to quote strings with separators 2011 DevExpress Inc 173 Print Preview 174 TXT Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define TXT specific exporting options using th
83. code of the specified type Multiple standard bar code symbologies are supported E E E Note The barcode quality can degrade when the report is exported to formats other than PDF To ensure reliable barcode recognition print the report directly from an application using the native printing methods The Module and Auto Module properties of a control should be used with care In the Property Grid the Bar Code s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Alignment Determines the alignment of the barcode image within the control To define the text alignment use the Text Alignment property e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text and image color for the bar code This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar A AX e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Bar Code e
84. column do the following e Focus any cell in the column against which a search will be performed e Type the initial character s of the value to be located The nearest row that contains the specified value in the clicked column will be located To proceed with the search in the forward direction press CTRL DOWN ARROW To proceed with the search in the backward direction press CTRL UP ARROW To erase the previously typed characters in the search string press BACKSPACE ie Performance Attributes 325 B F l Ea e n Saloon S Type 3 0 3 Liters 44 320 00 10 25 2002 A o amp No Cadillac EFi g an Saloon Seville 4 6 Liters 2011 DevExpress Inc os Navigate Through Grid Records Move Focus Between Rows and Cards To move focus between cells and rows use the ARROW TAB HOME END PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys Note that the ARROW HOME and END keys are used for navigation between rowSs cards only when the focused cell is not being edited Othewise these keys affect focus movement within the currently edited cell To focus the next cell do one of the following e Press TAB e In Grid Views press RIGHT ARROW In Card Views and Layout Views press DOWN ARROW If a cell editor is active pressing RIGHT ARROW moves focus to the next cell if the caret is positioned at the end of the current cell s text or if the cell s text is selected in its entirety To focus the previous cell do one of the following e Press
85. contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the controls contained within the bands e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the controls contained within the bands as well as to assign an existing style to them or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment 2011 DevExpress Inc 401 Report Designer 402 Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the bands This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior Group Fields This property is available for the Group Header band only It invokes the Group Field Collection Editor allowing you
86. date like Last Month is a string value When including a date parameter in your report design you must be careful that the parameter type is specified appropriately Field List Parameters ab Application Marne SET Company Address slab Company_Name SE CustomFilter ab DateRange el EndDate tose E Titlet fab Title2 eS Report Explorer l Property Grid StartDate Parameter a Behavior a visible Yes Data Description Parameter Type Value T 6 2010 11 45 AM Design Mame StartDate Parameter Type Specifies the type of the value associated with the Another issue with dynamic dates is sometimes they can be a single date e g Yesterday and other times they can be date ranges e g Last Year You must setup your report design filters and cqControls appropriately so the date parameters will work There are two special parameter names you can use that will convert the string date ranges to absolute date types StartDate and EndDate So for example you want to extract data for last year and use the dynamic date range Last Year Set two parameters StartDate Page 28 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual and EndDate to Last Year When the report is run the parameters will be replaced by the correct absolute dates Your report filter will want to look something like this tersine Eaton And m x Column Date Is less than or egual to EndDate E lt A
87. delete a group of conditions do one of the following e Focus the group s logical operator and press DELETE or SUBTRACT e Click the group s logical operator and select Remove Group To delete all conditions do one of the following e Focus the topmost logical operator and press DELETE or SUBTRACT e Click the topmost logical operator and select Clear All To cut a condition group of conditions to the clipboard focus this condition or the group s logical operator and press CTRL X or SHIFT DELETE Clipboard Operations To copy a condition or a group of conditions to the clipboard focus this condition or the group s logical operator and press CTRL C or CTRL INSERT To cut a condition or a group of conditions to the clipboard focus this condition or the group s logical operator and press CTRL X or SHIFT DELETE To paste a condition or a group of conditions from the clipboard to the focused group press CTRL V or SHIFT INSERT Change a Column in a Filter Condition To change a condition s column invoke the column list by doing one of the following e Click the current column e Focus the current column via the keyboard and press SPACE or ALT DOWN ARROW Then choose the required column from the list that will be invoked Change an Operator in a Filter Condition To change a condition s operator invoke the operator list by doing one of the following e Click the condition s current operator e Focus the current operator via the keybo
88. do one of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow near the Send via E Mail button EPN e On the File menu choose the Send via E Mail item Choose the required format in the invoked list 2011 DevExpress Inc 164 Print Preview 165 HTML File MHT File RTF File ALS File ALSA File CSV File Text File Image File Then you may be prompted to define format specific options See corresponding help topics in this documentation for details e g PDF Specific Export Options Once you ve specified exporting options the Save As dialog appears allowing you to enter the file name Finally the created document will be attached to a new empty message created in your default mail program 2011 DevExpress Inc 165 Print Preview 166 PDF Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define PDF specific exporting options using the following dialog PDF Export Options Page range oe Don t embed these fonts Tahoma Times New Roman Images quality Highest Compressed _ Show print dialog on open Password Security Document Open Password Application My application Author My name Keywords key words Subject My subject Title My Title General Options e Page range Define the pages which will be included in the complete file Separate the pages with a comma seta range of pages with a dash e Don t embed these font
89. down the ALT key when dragging a bar command 2011 DevExpress Inc 567 Toolbars and Menus ses Restore the Default Layout of Bar Commands You can customize the layout of bar commands within a bar by hiding and rearranging them Subsequently you can revert to the default layout of bar commands This topic describes two ways to do this Restore the Default Layout Using Quick Customization 1 Click the dropdown button displayed at the right edge of any bar s B Bold Ctrl B Customize we Italic Ctrl I OF Underline Ctrl U y Align Left Ctrl L Center Ctrl E Align Right Ctri R w Bullets Reset Toolbar Restore the Default Layout in Customization Mode 1 Open the Customization window 2 Select a bar in the list whose layout is to be restored Customization Toolbars Commands Options Toolbars m MainMenu Standard Font StatusBar PaintStyle 3 Click Reset 2011 DevExpress Inc ses Toolbars and Menus seo Customization Toolbars Mainhlenu Standard iv Format Font StatusBar PaintStyle 2011 DevExpress Inc ses Toolbars and Menus 570 Navigation Keyboard Navigation in Menus and Toolbars Navigate between Toolbar and Menu Items To switch focus to the main menu press ALT or F10 The following shortcuts allow you to navigate through bars and bar items They are in effect when a bar menu is focused CTRL TAB Moves focus to another ba
90. feature we ll use a report with grouping similar the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report 1 Select the Detail band and in the Property Grid expand the Multi Column Options section First set the required Mode It determines whether the number of columns is manually specified or it depends on the fixed column width E Multi Column Options Multi Column Options Column Count 1 Column Spacing 0 Column Width 0 Direction First Down then Across None Mode Use Column Count Gets or sets the mode in wt 8 Column Width 2 Then if you ve chosen to Use Column Count set the Column Count to 2 and Column Spacing to 10 The Direction determines the order in which records of the same group are processed E Multi Column Options Multi Column Options Column Count 2 Column Spacing 10 Column Width 0 First Down then Aros v Mode First Down then Across iFirst Across then Down Direction Gets or sets the direction in which a detail band is printed on a page when a multicolumn is enabled 3 Now on the Detail band s surface a grey area appears delimiting the available column s width Adjust the controls width so that they fit within the effective borders v E Detail P n D E ProductName UnitPrice space forrepeating columms Controls placed here willbe pnnted meorrectly The multi col
91. filter conditions if any by clicking the button 2011 DevExpress Inc 64 Filter Editor es i Filter Builder Use the Delete or Subtract key Removes this condition E Filter Builder ore 6 Click the button to add a new condition to the current group 2011 DevExpress Inc es Filter Editor 66 i Filter Builder Clear All 9 For the condition within the created group set the column to UnitPrice operator to gt and operand value to 10 E Filter Builder bu Unit Price Is less than 10 00 6 ee Quantity Is less than 10 6 10 Click the button to add a new condition to the new group 2011 DevExpress Inc 66 Filter Editor E Filter Builder z Unit Price Is less than 10 00 0 Quantity Is less than 10 Use the Insert or Add key Adds a new condition bo this group Cancel 11 For the new condition set the column to Quantity operator to gt and operand value to 10 E Filter Builder z Unit Price Is less than 10 00 0 Quantity Is less than 10 0 amp 12 Click OK or Apply to apply the created filter criteria See Also Filter Data via the Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc Grid This section describes the capabilities provided by the Grid control which represents data in a tabular or card form supports data editing sorting grouping filtering summary calculation and many other f
92. fit one or two pages If you want to preview more pages simultaneously refer to the Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview topic 2011 DevExpress Inc 52 Print Preview 153 Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview To preview two or more pages at one time click the Multiple Pages button on the toolbar Then in the invoked dialog hover over the page icons depending on the required number of pages to preview 2 4 x ERE 2x 2 Pages When the required number of pages has been selected click the popup window to close it and apply changes to the document view 2011 DevExpress Inc 153 Print Preview as Viewing and Navigating Navigate Between Pages in Print Preview To navigate between pages use the scrollbars or navigation buttons d4 4 P P onthe toolbar These buttons allow you to switch to the first previous next or last page of a document 2011 DevExpress Inc 154 Print Preview 155 Use the Hand Tool in Print Preview The Hand Tool enables you to scroll content by dragging the document instead of using scrollbars To activate the Hand Tool click the Hand Tool vy button on the toolbar Then after you click a document s page the mouse pointer is changed from y to Drag the mouse pointer to scroll the document 2011 DevExpress Inc 55 Print Preview 156 Navigate in Print Preview Using Bookmarks If a document contains bookmarks you can use the Doc
93. following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 9 e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 44 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Label e Style Priority Specifies the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles Specifies odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control ora newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Specifies the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of a Label
94. for your dataset in the next step Choose from the list of data connections currently in the Wizard or add a new connection if the one you want is not listed Which connection should the wizard use Connection String BC Once a connection has been set up click Next to proceed to Step 3 Choose the Table or View 2011 DevExpress Inc a22 Report Designer az Step 3 Choose the Table or View Note This wizard step appears only if you re creating a new report from scratch In this instance familiarity with database connections is required so we recommend that you contact your application administrator or vendor for assistance If you re modifying an existing report you will skip this step and start with Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report Purpose Select a table or a view whose data will be used in your report Page Interface The list on the left hand side shows all tables and views available in the database you specified in the previous wizard step To select a required item click it and then press the right arrow gt button Report Wizard Choose the table or view The table or view you choose determines which columns will be available in your report What item do you want to access Available item s Selected item Products H a Views Note Note that you can select only one table or view to be bound to the report Therefore it s impossible to create a
95. form opens it will open in the day view and on the current date with the current time on top Page 42 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual ag Pauni Miana Balanda wednesday June 23 lt dune gt lt 2010 gt From Jan 01 01 1 Banking Dashboard To Jun 24 2M TW TF5 as RR 1 Z J3 4 5 6 7 amp 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 23 24 25 26 27 20 29 30 BS amp amp EF Today Right mouse click on various elements to change view timescale etc 1113 10 PM 3 15 PM Banking Dashboard 13 37 PM 3 42 PM Dashboard Definition 2 3 37 PM 3 42 PM Indicators Balance Sheet You can go to different days by using the monthly calendar on the top right of the screen By right mouse clicking on various elements you can change the view timescale edit entries etc There are views by day week workweek month and timeline By right mouse clicking on an individual entry and selecting Open you have the ability to change the time and also set the Recurrence of the report This is the only way you can set reports to recur Page 43 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Se nilieiinss Hailiies gnasi uuninunss Bie Size Subject indicators Balance Sheet Location Label Mone Start time 6 23i2010 3 52 22 PM All day event End time 6 23 2010 4 30 00 PM Resource any Show time as After pressing the Recurrence button you will get the fo
96. format any part of it The formatting options include font face styles and sizes and color oO _ gt _ alRich Text Coniro s Oo E _ A content from an external TXT or RTF file can be loaded to this control via its Smart Tag i El Rich Text Tasks i Edit Text Clear Load File Data Binding None Anchor Vertically None Formatting Rules Collection Can Grow _ Can Shrink In the Property Grid the Rich Text control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 2 e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 44 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For
97. functions by selecting the Functions category 2011 DevExpress Inc 49 Expression Editor so See Also Expression Operators Functions and Constants 2011 DevExpress Inc 50 Expression Editor 51 Expression Operators Functions and Constants WinForms Controls gt Expression Editor gt Expression Operators Functions and Constants This topic lists operators and functions supported by the Expression Editor It also provides information on how constants can be specified in expressions Operators Adds the value of one numeric FirstName LastName expression to another or UnitPrice 4 concatenates two strings Finds the difference between two Price1 Price2 numbers Multiplies the value of two Quantity UnitPrice 1 expressions BonusAmount Divides the first operand by the Quantity 2 second Returns the remainder modulus Quantity 3 obtained by dividing one numeric expression into another Compares each bit of its first Flag1 Flag2 operand to the corresponding bit of its second operand If either bit is 1 the corresponding result bit is set to 1 Otherwise the corresponding result bit is set to 0 Performs a bitwise logical AND Flag amp 10 operation between two integer values Performs a logical exclusion on two Flagi Flag2 Boolean expressions ora bitwise exclusion on two numeric expressions Returns true if
98. good example is a report header that contains the company information logo date etc The second reason for using subreports is creation of master detail reports or invoice reports with hierarchically linked data However for master detail reports creation another approach is recommended using Detail Report bands Name subreportl Report Source Report Source Report Report Source Url None Report Source Url Formatting Rules Collection You can click a subreport to open the report to which it is linked in a new Design Panel In the Property Grid the Subreport s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Behavior e Can Shrink Determines whether a Subreport s height should be decreased if its contents don t completely fill the control Use this property to specify whether the height of the Subreport control should be taken into account when generating a report This may be required because usually the mutual location of report controls is considered when generating a report document But as the Subreport control actually represents a report itself the height of a Subreport normally should not be taken into account in the generated re
99. gt Reset Layout Birth D 325 Rename T Hide Text E Text Position d g Ungroup LJ Create EmptySpace Item Create Tabbed Group Change a Label s Visibility To hide a layout item s text label or a group s caption right click the item group and select Hide Text from the context menu To display a layout item s hidden text label or a group s hidden caption right click the item group and select Show Text Change a Label s Position To change the position of an item s label or a group s caption right click the item group to open the context menu Then select Text Position and the required command from this submenu 2011 DevExpress Inc 105 Layout Manager 106 Work with Interface Element Groups To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Combine Layout Items into Groups 1 Select a layout item that is to be added to a new group by clicking it You can select multiple items simultaneously by clicking them while holding the SHIFT key down 2 Right click any of the selected layout items and select Group from the context menu Employee ID Title SS ee I Saaaaa s Sy Hide Customization Form Birth Date W Reset Layout T Hide Text El Text Position d Hide Item TP Group C Create EmptySpace Item EI Size Constraints Note that only adjacent selected layout items can be combined into a group and on
100. here you can specify the parameters that you will use to control what data is contained on areport Parameters fall into four 4 types Data Text Numeric and Date There is no limit to the number of parameters you can have with a report Note If you leave a value blank for the Data Text Numeric or Date parameters the user will be prompted for a value when the report is previewed or added to the queue For date parameters a blank value will popup a calendar to enter a specific data If you set the date parameter value to Choose Specific the same thing will occur a popup calendar will appear allowing you to specify a specific date If you want to enter a specific data range you should have two parameters one for the start date and one for the end date and set the filter in the report design accordingly You can also set the date parameter value to Choose Dynamic and a list of date options will appear so the user can choose something like This Year Data Parameters have already been discussed and here you can choose to include those parameters needed for this report definition In the previous figure you see the Parameter Name Dashboard The parameter name column contains a dropdown list of parameters previously defined The Operator column will normally just contain an The value column will contain a dropdown of values either from the data source or from the list In this example we are able to pull a l
101. im EE im om Sia a File Management e Save a Print Preview to a File e Load a Print Preview from a File Printing and Page Setup e Print a Document via the Print Dialog e Print a Document Using Default Settings e Change Printing Settings via the Page Setup Dialog e Specify Page Margins in Print Preview Headers and Footers e Insert Page Header and Page Footer into Printed Documents e Insert Page Numbers into Printed Documents e Insert Date and Time into Printed Documents e Insert the User Name into Printed Documents 2011 DevExpress Inc 134 Print Preview e Insert a Logo into Printed Documents Scaling e Scale Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor e Scale Print Preview by Specifying Width in Pages Zooming e Zoom Print Preview In or Out e Zoom Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor e Zoom Print Preview to Show Whole Pages or Fit Content e Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview Viewing and Navigating e Navigate Between Pages in Print Preview e Use the Hand Tool in Print Preview e Navigate in Print Preview Using Bookmarks e Search for a Specific Text in Print Preview e Switch Print Preview Display Mode Watermark and Background e Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print Preview e Remove a Watermark in Print Preview Exporting e Exporting from Print Preview e PDF Specific Export Options e HITML Specific Export Options e MHT Specific Export Options e RIF Specific Export Options e XLS Spe
102. in the group via a single drop down 2011 DevExpress Inc 123 Pivot Table EZE E Show AN E 1994 E 1994 Quarter E quarter 3 hama Bee Lae September _ August _ Beverages 54 September 904 16 _ emag m m 1995 5g 5 r ae Pr 3 495 66 3 956 80 4 313 65 Produce 304 32 3 190 82 2 704 92 To remove filtering against a specific field invoke the field s filter drop down list and select Show All You can tell whether a field is being filtered by looking at its header Filter buttons for these fields are visible even when you re not hovering over the field headers Filtered Field l Product Sales Shipped Year t Category Mame t l 1994 BoMeatiPoutry 16 120 46 a pam s a 40 950 10 15 Build Complex Filter Criteria To build complex filter criteria consisting of multiple filter clauses using various filter operators you can use the Prefilter Filter Editor 2 Category Mame Begins with Beverages a Shipped Quarter Equals Qtr 1 Category Mame Begins with Produce 3 Shipped Quarter Is between Qtr 1 and Qtr 3 ok cawe J apply The Prefilter doesn t affect filtering via filter drop down lists of fields see above To invoke the Prefilter click an empty space within the Pivot Table s header region and select Show Prefilter from the context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc 124 Pivot Table 125 Order Year Order Amo
103. more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts 2011 DevExpress Inc 346 Report Designer 347 Behavior Data Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both The property setting is useful for data bound controls located between upper and lower controls which are allowed to resize depending on their contents Note that if the Anchor Vertically property is set to Bottom or Both the Can Grow and Can Shrink properties see below values are ignored and don t participate in calculating a final height value of this control Can Grow When this property is set to Yes the control s height can be automatically increased if required to display the text If there are other controls below the current control they will be pushed down to prevent them from overlapping Note that if a control overlaps the growing Rich Text by even one pixel it will not be pushed down by the growing Rich Text Can Shrink When this property is set to Yes and the text does not completely fill a Rich Text then the control s height will be decreased to the height of its text
104. most of the Style Priority s options Use Background Color Use Border Color etc are set to Yes 2011 DevExpress Inc 269 Report Designer 270 This means that if any style is assigned to a control its properties will have a higher priority than the appearance properties of this element or its parent You can assign a higher priority to an element s appearance property by disabling the corresponding Use property Background Color 9s sa Tomato Some properties are omitted Style Priority Collection none none controlStyle1 Background Color E Turquoise a Ha E a Flay E J label E _ E _ _ _ E The same principles are applied to the odd even styles feature which allows you to alternate the appearance of consecutive data rows in your report For details on this refer to Use Odd and Even Styles Note When conditional formatting is applied to an element its appearance definition has the highest priority See Also Use Odd and Even Styles Store and Restore Style Sheets Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 0 Report Designer 271 Use Odd and Even Styles This tutorial describes how to apply odd and even styles to report controls e g to alternate the background color for each record To utilize odd and even styles do the following 1 Create a table report 2 Select the detail table and in the Property Grid expand its Styles Invoke the drop down li
105. move or use the scroll bar on the bottom right or the record selectors on the bottom left Report Manager Concepts Preferences The preferences for the Report Manager can be set by clicking on the Preferences block on the Navigator or from the Edit Preferences menu selection You will see the following form Page 7 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Preferences Program Starting Form Navigator First Month of Fiscal Year Jan Repository Location C Data Documents Report Repository Location where reports are sent from the Report Queue FTP The preferences are organized by the following categories Program Email FTP Web Data The Program preferences include the starting form setting the starting month of the Fiscal Year and repository location The starting form preference determines how the Report Manager will open The repository location is the default directory on your computer where reports processed by the Report Manager will be stored The Email preferences include all the necessary items needed to send emails with reports as attachments when the Report Manager processes the report queue and the report is setup to be sent via email Page 8 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Preferences Program SMTP Server Email SMTP User Name if required FTF SMTP Password if required SMTP Enable SSL Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA Default From Email Add
106. or Add a Sort Then to control whether the corresponding Group Header or Footer band should be seen use the Show Header and Show Footer check boxes An ascending or descending grouping sorting mode is specified via the Sort Order drop down list You can change the order in which multiple grouping and sorting criteria are to be performed via the Move Up and Move Down buttons To remove a grouping or sorting criterion select it and click Delete Note If the Group and Sort Panel is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Windows Group and Sort See Also Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report Field List Property Grid Report Explorer Scripts Errors Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 322 Report Designer 323 HTML View Tab The HTML View Tab allows you to preview the HTML output of a report h Category 1 Chai 18 00 Chang 19 00 Sasquatch Ale 14 00 Steeleye Stout 18 00 Cote de Blaye 263 50 Chartreuse verte 18 00 Ipoh Coffee 46 00 Laughing Lumberjack Lager 14 00 Outback Lager 15 00 Lakkalik6ori 18 00 Category 2 Aniseed Syrup 10 00 Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning 22 00 Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix 921 35 Northwoods Cranberry Sauce 40 00 Genen Shouyu 15 50 Gula Malacca 19 45 xd Designer F Preview w Scripts See Also Designer Tab Preview Tab Scripts Tab 2011 DevExpress Inc 323 Report Designer 324 La
107. p Vertical Lines Default Ary Filter Headers Default E Data Headers Default Column Default Category Neme Productname 5 endo Beverages 5 070 60 6 295 50 11 366 10 10 034 90 8 560 60 18 595 50 Beverages Total 15 105 50 14 856 10 79 961 60 Confections 126201 8670 1 368 71 scottish Longbreads 3 909 00 4 175 00 8 084 00 g Row Headers Default Confections Total 5 191 01 4 261 70 9 452 71 Lf Headers On Every Page Grand Total 20 296 51 19 117 80 39 414 31 7 Unused Filter Fields e Options tab Allows you to specify which elements are to be printed e Behavior tab Allows you to pre process a Pivot Table before printing it For instance you can enable field value merging 2011 DevExpress Inc 179 Print Preview aso Customize Printing Settings of Tree Views If allowed by your application vendor you can customize additional print settings of a document For example if you are about to print out a tree view you may be able to customize its printing options To do this click the Customize L button on the toolbar The Print Options dialog will be invoked Print Options rx es Options Behavior Preview Print Department Budget Location ome Corporate Headquarters 1 000 000 00 Monterey E O reien Sales and Marketing 22 000 00 San Francisco Foote gt Field office East Coast 500 000 00 Boston Footer i T Marketing
108. pages In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available e The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available e Page range Defines the pages which will be included in the result Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens e Page border color Specifies page border color e Page border width Sets page border width 2011 DevExpress Inc 175 Print Preview Passing Parameters 176 Some documents or reports allow you to control data display and what data is to be displayed by specifying parameter values To show the Parameters window click the Parameters button on the main toolbar A window allowing you to change parameter values will be invoked Enter the required values and click Submit To reset settings click Reset Parameters From 1 1 1995 To 12 31 1995 2011 DevExpress Inc Chop suey Chinese Queen Cozmha La maison d Ase Pnncesa Isabel Vinhos Wartian Herthi Tortuga Restaurante Mere Pailarde Du monde entier Wolski Zajazd Blondel pere et fils 01 03 1995 02 07 1995 02 14 1995 04 17 1995 05 31 1995 06 05 1995 07 24 1995 08 07 1995 08 24 1995 08 25 1995 09 12 1995 18346 144 3456 216 576 1224 130 360 54 108 176 Print Preview Mis
109. pagination It does not display complex formatting features that are most appropriate to the page layout You can use it for the simplest representation of the document as well as quick text editing To enable this view click the Draft View button on the Document View toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 46s Rich Text Editor aee n Draft View View the document as a draft to quickly edit the text ALE S Certain elements of the document such as headers and footers will not be visible in this view ae LI C k i Ay By the anmm Brothers Some men are born to good luck all they do or try t to do comes right all t much mn an their geese are swans all their cards are toumnsetossthem which wa In draft view the horizontal ruler is available To show or hide it click Horizontal Ruler on the Show toolbar S ak A L S L Horizontal Ruler View the horizontal ruler used to measure and line up objects in the document Print Layout View The print layout view is intended to display all formatting in the document including complex formatting and can be used to preview the document printout To enable this view click the Print Layout button on the Document View toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc as Rich Text Editor 467 Se Print Lay
110. per report Wednesday January 27 2010 The Report Header is the first band of a report on the first page not counting margins as they are out of page zones The Report Header also precedes the Page Header making it the best place to display the report s name company logo date of creation and user name etc And if you plan to add a Chart that visualizes the report s data place this control onto this band The Report Footer finalizes the informative part of the report It is placed before the Page Footer and Bottom Margin on the report s last page Use the Report Footer for report grand totals or conclusions In the Property Grid the properties of these bands are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band e Font Specifies the font settings for the controls contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the preceden
111. property is defined To learn more on this refer to Chart with Static Series Data Member Determines the data source member which supplies data to a Chart To learn more on this refer to Chart with Static Series Usually it is not necessary to specify the Data Member property when binding a Chart to data This property should only be set directly if the dataset contains more than one table Data Source Determines a Chart s data source To learn more on this refer to Chart with Static Series Pivot Grid Data Source Options Determines a Chart s data source To learn more on this refer to Chart with Static Series Series Data Member Determines the name of the data field whose values are used to automatically generate and populate a Chart s series To learn more on this refer to Chart with Dynamic Series When Chart binding is used to automatically generate series within a chart control based upon the data obtained from the associated data source defined by the Data Source property a rule needs to be defined that helps the Chart recognize the data records whose values are used to construct individual series objects To do this the Series Data Member property which specifies the data field whose values 2011 DevExpress Inc 379 Report Designer 380 Note are taken into account when series objects are automatically created and populated can be used Each automatically generated series gets its name from the data field speci
112. returns _ _ pe a Export mode The following modes are available The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without preserving the page by page breakdown The Single file page by page mode allows export of a document to a single file while preserving page by page breakdown In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available Page range Specify the pages which will be included in the resulting file Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens Page border color Choose the color for the page border from the available palettes Page border width Define the page border width Title Enter the required document title Character set Define the character set for your HTML document Also using the appropriate check box you can choose whether to remove carriage returns See Also MHT Specific Export Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 168 Print Preview 169 MHT Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define MHT specific exporting options using the following dialog MHT Export Options Single file page by page Page range 1 5 7 9 Page border color MM Black Page border width
113. s Group Header band As this control is bound to data we will bind its Bookmark property to the same data field using the Data Bindings property Property Grid Y SS GroupHeader1 E Category CategoryID J E Formi Hal myDataSet Navigati A Products Tag i sfa CategoryID Text SE Discontinued ab ProductName fab QuantityPerUnit E ReorderLevel fia UnitPrice Note that as with other bindable properties you also can apply value formatting to the Bookmark property e g Category 0 3 Then for this Label specify its Bookmark and set the Parent Bookmark property to the Report Header s label to define the document map s hierarchy 2011 DevExpress Inc 289 Report Designer 290 Navigation Target Navigation URL The report with bookmarks is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result TOTI a Oe 1 41S po JAL a P Products by Categories a Category 1 Chal Chang Sasquatch Ale Steeleye Stout Chartreuse verte Ipoh Coffee Laughing Lumberjack Lager Outback Lager Lakkalikoon Category 2 Aniseed Syrup Chet Anton s Cajun Seasoning Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix iew 9 HTML View Scripts Page1of2 Zoom Factor 100 See Also Create Hyperlinks Add a Cross Reference 2011 DevExpress Inc
114. section s header or footer 4 Change the contents of the header or footer on the first page or delete the contents of the header or footer to use no header or footer on the first page of the document Create a Different Header or Footer for Odd and Even Pages 1 Click the Header or Footer button on the Header amp Footer toolbar Header Edit the header of the document The content in the header will appear at the top of each printed Footer Edit the footer of the document The content in the footer will appear at the bottom of each printed page 2 Click the Different Odd amp Even Pages button on the Options toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc ste Rich Text Editor sta AER r Different Odd amp Even Pages Specify that odd numbered pages should have a different header f and footer from even numbered pages 3 If necessary click the Show Previous and Show Next buttons on the Navigation toolbar to move into the header or footer areas of odd or even pages Show Previous Navigate to the previous section s header or footer Show mext Navigate to the next section s header or footer 4 Create the header or footer for odd pages in the Odd Page Header or Odd Page Footer areas and create the header or footer for even pages in the Even Page Header or Even Page Footer areas 2011 DevExpress Inc sto Rich Text Editor s20 Embedding Fields Mail Merge The Mail Merge feature
115. separate with a comma Sample Parameter from a Data Source Parameter Detail Be Sig Parameter Name No Spaces Data Type Enter either a data source for a list or manually enter a list Data Source Data Source Field Monthly Daily Annual Weekly Quarterly Current List separate with a comma Sample Parameter from a List NOTE Parameters can be created and edited by any user Deleting or changing an existing parameter may affect other user s report designs and report definitions so be careful what you change Page 20 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual My Parameters My parameters are those parameters associated with a particular user These parameters are only accessible by the user who created them and provides a way to personalize a report Typical uses for My parameters include name address phone numbers email addresses etc To access the My parameters click on the My Parameters block on the Navigator or use the pull down menu item Edit Parameters My Parameters The following form will be displayed oo sey Pare ter a Parameter Name no spaces Parameter Value gt myname JohnDoemhotmail com ma ea ea a a a a The list can be sorted and filtered To add a new parameter press the button on the navigation bar To delete a parameter press the button As you hover over other buttons their function will be displayed Global Parameters
116. set a preference to have the opening form be the Report Manager Navigator a list of Report Definitions or the Report Carousel Refer to a later section about the various preferences available When the Report Manager is started from a gauge drilldown or to display a particular scorecard that report is automatically opened in print preview The Report Manager Navigator provides a clickable flowchart showing the relationships of the various Report Manager elements Each block can be clicked to open that particular element Dia yivs ty Details of the use of the Navigator form is described throughout this manual Page 5 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual The List of Report Definitions is the place to go to see the report organized and ready to either add to the queue or preview immediately Category Name Balance Sheet Parameters This Year Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year 0 ma iT WA Er mu a 4ll Dashboards For This Year Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboard Definition El Gauges Dashboard Definition Gauges E Income Income Scorecard E Indicators Dashboard Definition Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Indicators Balance Sheet Indicators Profitability Analysis a E Parameters 4 simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data s Balance Sheet Parameters Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year All Dashboard
117. source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Rtf Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appro
118. specific data source like a SQL Server database and not the default QBD file By changing this preference report designs with the data source type PDC will use this Page 9 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual preference So you can change this preference and all your PDC reports will be connected to the data source specified by this connection string rather than the connection saved with the report design To set the PDC initially you can start a report design with the wizard and then click on the Data Connection button If the report is not connected to the default QBD file you will be prompted to change it to the QBD file If you reply with No you will then be prompted to save the connection string in the PDC preference Data Sources Data Sources within the Report Manager are used for two purposes 1 To specify a data source for a report design and 2 to specify a source for creating a list of items to be used to select parameters for a report For example if a report is to be based on employee data you might want to specify where the data is coming from This can be used as the data source for the report but when you want to select a particular employee for a particular report definition the same data source can be used to create an employee parameter and the dropdown list for the employee parameter will contain a list of employees to choose from There will be more examples of this later You can see a list of exist
119. te Sh OP a Si Sie SR rs i ae Se ee Redo Ctrl Redo 2011 DevExpress Inc 478 Rich Text Editor Formatting Format Text To format text first select it and then use the Font toolbar to change the font family size color etc Font ies hen Romar e a Shruti ae S imHei Simplified Arabic Simplified Arabic Sinun Simsun ExtB Sylfaen Symbol Ewupol Tahoma Times New Roman Also you can modify the font using the Font dialog Select the text that you want to format right click it and choose the Font item from the context menu Cut Copy Paste Increase Indent Decrease Indent Paragraph Numbering List Bookmark Hyperlink The Font dialog appears as illustrated below 2011 DevExpress Inc 479 479 Rich Text Editor 480 Font style Font SIZE Font color Underline style Underline color Cas EEE Effects Strikethrough Superscript E Double strikethrough Subscript Hidden Underline words only F OK E Cancel In this dialog you can specify all required font parameters and apply them to the selected text In addition the Rich Editor provides a list of default keyboard shortcuts for text formatting O eee font size and style of the selected text CTRL CLOSEBRACKETS Increases the font size of the selected text by one point CTRL OPENBRACKETS Decreases the font size of the selection by one point CTRL SHIFT PERIOD Incr
120. that displays a document to be edited Here a document can look as it will appear when you print it Print Layout View or with reduced formatting and pagination Simple View or Draft View For more information see Switch Document Views To the top and to the left of the Text Editing Surface the Rich Text Editor displays horizontal and vertical rulers which you can use to align text graphics and other elements in a document The horizontal ruler controls the horizontal spacing of paragraph margins columns and tabs F 1 oonan F tot J 0 tote 4 00 A i Em sum dolor stamet consectetuer adipscing eit Integer auctor metus eget eros Tabs alignment centerec left aligne ghtaligned ut telus id metus rhoncus elementum Duis vestibwum mi ve ligua Suspendise potent Vestou um ante ipsum primis in Jo udbus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae The vertical ruler allows you to set the top and bottom margins of the document 2011 DevExpress Inc ae Rich Text Editor 447 i I I The vertical alignment of text on a page Note If the ruler is hidden switch the current view to either the Draft View or Print Layout View At the bottom and at the right of the Text Editing Surface there are horizontal and vertical scrollbars allowing you to navigate through a document Context Menu The Rich Text Editor supports the Context Menu that appears when you right click within the Text Editing Surface
121. that is pasted after you press the Script to Clipboard button Page 52 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Appendix A DevExpress End User Documentation The following section is provided by Developer Express and describes in detail the use of the various Report Manager Elements including Charts Filter Editor Grid Pivot Table Print Preview and Report Designer Page 53 Contents Table of Contents Interface Elements for Windows Home Page Charing axe savendicecteuracae rac wca cada anaden E E E 9 CEG VIZ An Ch doce neate ser occa ered gene E A E A a E tan lena tauaueds E 10 chart Type Pagnini aE aA E end casa Ge dew he daar nove iene E ce ouvert E A E eam enon 12 fat oy oY er gr 9 el sie a Le epee epee rere eee eee cre errr ee rent a rt nT er Seria Terrain irr errr reer htt Mr aie sea aN EA AN 13 Series PAG Ea ea OENE E E A E venta E a d SA EME a aE E E EE A ceautuGunvea reucdaans 15 Dalai AGC aiaa OA OEO EESE E a EE E E AOON A 17 CHART PAGE teiaa a aE I E E EREE ETE A e aia aE A aA 21 Diagrami AG adra a ree OO TAE AON E a a Ea ER aE EAE E aa a NN 23 PANGS PAG eC A E E TE E N T E E E E r E ATA N N N SAE N A A A TE E E teas 25 AXES PIGO E E a E a aA 27 Sr IES VIEWS PagE nioni Aa a aa ENE E OA A E aa a aE ORTAN 29 POMEL ADC IS PAJE coe EEE ar S E veestaes 31 Chart Titles PAC Caesars a ae cee EE A a rE O E E E E EN 33 Legend AGC ccvas cc teuceieinc aE eE ESTEE coax EE ES E a aes 35 Annotauons Fa
122. the document 2011 DevExpress Inc ast Rich Text Editor 452 Close Header and Footer Close the Header and Footer Tools You can also double dick the document area to return to editing it Tabl RE CE T ees Rows 4 Columns SE 2011 DevExpress Inc a52 Rich Text Editor asa Alignment x EHEH SHE HEH Shel HEH Help restrict people from editing the document by specifying a password 2011 DevExpress Inc 453 Rich Text Editor asa Ribbon Interface The comprehensive functionality for the Rich Text control can be provided via a set of Ribbon tabbed pages Ribbon pages are structurally and visually split into logical groups Each of these groups includes commands that have some common features Ribbon Tab Name Visual Appearance Ee Dans sw i Page Layout Show All Show All View Merged Field Codes Field Results Page Layout Mailings Mailings TS Page Layout ile Insert Page Layout M 2011 DevExpress Inc asa Rich Text Editor a55 Header amp Footer Tools Design gt t Header amp Footer Tools Heacer Footer Table Tools Design Table Tools Layout Table Tools Align Top Left Align Center Left Align Bottom Left aie E Insert Rows Above Align Top Center Align Center Align Bottom Center EA Insert Rows Below 5 Align Top Right Align Center Right Align Bottom Right a COU
123. the Chart which are not described here The chart is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 260 Report Designer 5 5 5 5 5 nn nn nn nn nnn nn nn nnn nn nnn nnn nn nn nn nnn nn nnn nn nn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nen aaa Chart with Dynamic Series See Also 2011 DevExpress Inc Report Designer 262 Chart with Dynamic Series This document describes how to create a report with a Chart control bound to data so that all series are auto created based on a common template which specifies universal options for all series This is possible when the data for all series their names along with points arguments and values are stored in the same data table ei cop in 2000 i B GSP in 2001 Se d i E 57 in 2002 FAR WEST 2004 2 115111 E GSP in 2003 CREAT LAKES 2004 1 758915 1 F GSF in 2004 EF TE MIDEAST 2004 2 140662 ee lt GBINEW ENGLAND 2004 0 664181 PLAINS 2004 0 763082 MEW ENGLAND GREAT LAKES SOUTHESSTROCEY MOUNTAIN ROCKY MOUNTAIN 2004 0 377666 MIDEAST PLAINS SOUTHWEST FAR WEST SOUTHEAST 2004 2 581437 MEV ENGLAND riL Note that in this scenario the view type and certain other settings will be the same for all series To adjust a Chart with automatically created series do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox o
124. the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Behavior e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it 2011 DevExpress Inc 388 Report Designer 389 Cross band Line The Cross band Line control allows you to draw a line through several bands This can be useful if it is required to visually emphasize a section consisting of multiple band areas In other aspects it is similar to a regular Line i PageHeader one band per page Ch v E Detail EHEHE Another cross band control available is the Cross band Box In the Property Grid the Cross band Line control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e For
125. the Series Template Label Visible property to No Alternatively you can specify the Resolve Overlapping Mode option to enable automatic collision detection and resolution for the labels Customize Axis Labels To avoid overlapping axis labels select an axis and set its Label Staggered property to Yes If required it is possible to customize many other properties for the Chart which are not described here The chart is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 265 Report Designer 266 B SSP in 2o00 FE asp in 2001 I GSF in 2002 F GSF in 2003 F sp in 2004 1 0 5 0 MEW ENGLAND GREAT LAKES SOUTHEAST ROCKY MOUNT AN MIDEAST PLAINS SOUTHWEST FAR WEST L 4 I I I I I I I I I I 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I See Also Chart with Static Series 2011 DevExpress Inc 266 Report Designer Styles and Conditional Formatting The topics of this section cover appearance related information about the Report Designer This section consists of the following topics e Understand Styles Concepts e Use Odd and Even Styles e Store and Restore Style Sheets e Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Conditionall
126. the Table will be split despite this property s value Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 357 Report Designer 358 Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 358 Repor
127. the data bound series which are contained within the Series collection of a Chart Series Sorting Allows you to define the sort mode of a Chart s series None by default Descending or Ascending Series Template Allows you to customize a template for series which are created dynamically as a result of binding a Chart to data via the Data Source and Series Data Member properties The settings which are available via the Series Template property are common to all such data bound series These settings allow you to provide centralized customization of all dynamically created data bound series To learn more on using this property refer to Chart with Dynamic Series Note that the settings which are customized via the Series Template property don t apply to the series contained within the Series collection of a Chart Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Elements Annotation Repository Provides centralized access to all annotations that are present in the Chart
128. the group panel and select Clear Grouping from the context menu Trademark jar Full Expand Category J Full collapse Trademark BMW Clear Grouping Trademark Cadillac Trademark Dodge Change Group Order To change group order move a grouping column header to another position within the group panel 2011 DevExpress Inc Grid HE Form i Order ID J Product Mame t E order 1p 10248 _ Order 1p 10249 Order ID 10250 Order ID 10251 See Also Expand and Collapse Rows and Cards in Grids 2011 DevExpress Inc Filter Grid Data Invoke the Filter Dropdown List e In Grid Views hover over the column header Click the filter button H within the column header that appears Order ID Pro Unit Price Quantity 10302 Alice Mutton 10302 R ssle Sauerkraut 36 40 z5 10302 Ipoh Coffee 36 650 lz 10303 Boston Crab Meat 14 70 40 e In Card Views click the Customize button and then click the Filter button corresponding to the target column Custom sort iter 7 Mode Sorts iter Category Sort Filter Description Filter Hyperlink __ Sort Fiter Picture Filter Title Sales Represe First Mame Janet Last Name Leverling City Kirkland Create a Simple Filter Condition To select records that contain a specific value in a specific column card field do the following 1 Invoke the filter dropdown list
129. the previous word CTRL RIGHT ARROW Moves the cursor to the next word CTRL UP ARROW Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous paragraph CTRL DOWN ARROW Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph CTRL HOME Moves the cursor to the start of the document and scrolls the document to show the cursor position CTRL END Moves the cursor to the end of the document and scrolls the document to show the cursor position CTRL PAGE UP Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous page CTRL PAGE DOWN Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next page 2011 DevExpress Inc aea Rich Text Editor aes Switch Document Views The Rich Edit control provides a number of document views that you can switch depending on what you want to do Simple View A simple view shows a document without a page layout This view can be useful when you want to concentrate on text editing To enable this view click the Simple View button on the Document View toolbar JIPE bees d Bl CAIM TA LES Simple View View the document as a simple memo U C k This view ignores the page layout to draw attention to text editing By the Grimm Brothers Some men are bor to good luck all they do or try to do comes nght all that a to them 1 1s 50 much gain all their geese are swansyall thei cardearetrmps toss Draft View The draft view is a view without
130. the target day in the Day View mode e Go to Today Moves focus to the current date preserving the existing view mode e Go to Date Invokes a dialog shown below to select the date and view type The date can be selected either by using the Calendar control or by entering a string with the placeholders To select the desired view type use the Show In drop down box i GoTo Date x Date f 15 2009 m a ee 4 January P 4 2009 F 5 M TW T F 26 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 86 9 10 11 12 13 146 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Using the Calendar Control If the Scheduler control is accompanied by the Calendar control you can use that control to navigate through dates The common look of the Calendar control is illustrated in the following picture 2011 DevExpress Inc 552 Scheduler Scroll button months Scroll button years 4 May 4 2007 June 2007 gt gt s M TW T F S S os M TW TFS 1 29 350 1 2 2 19 7 q 3 4 o FN 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Mf fa fe fh fs Current date 3 Week numbers th oth ke kh ka Today Holidays highlighted if 19 20 21 22 23 Selected dates 2007 fsa Trw T F sj em eee o i 1 2 3 4 3 6 7 8 9 10 ii i2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 Days with appointments 43 6 78 Today button You can select either a particular date or a range of dates in the Calendar control and the Scheduler control will
131. to modify other parameters e g file format or location click the Save As Fe button on the Common toolbar or press the F12 key ERNES Sp 1S ree Save As F12 Save As After that the Save As dialog will appear Note that the same dialog appears if you click the Save lm button to Save a document which has been never saved before o Save As Cow p lt Loca Documents of the Rich Edit Organize New folder oe Date modified Type Libraries E T PEE No tems match your search al Music Pictures E Videos jE Computer tka Network 4 File name My Rich Text Document Save as type Rich Text Format rtf Hide Folders Save Cancel In this dialog you can specify document name document format and the location to which the document should be saved The Rich Edit control allows you to save documents in the following formats e Rich Text Format rtf e Hyper Text Markup Language format htm html e Text Files format txt e web page archive format mht e WordML xml e Office Open XML format aka Office 2007 or docx e Open Document Format odt 2011 DevExpress Inc ase Rich Text Editor aso Note When saving a document in HTML format in line pictures are saved in the FileName _files folder where FileName is the name of the document file Image files are named imageN png where N is the picture index starting from the begi
132. via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in report measurement units which is to be preserved within the control when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation whe
133. 0 Layout Manager tor Hide and Display Elements using a Layout Manager To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Hide an Element Do one of the following e Right click on the layout item and select Hide Item from the context menu Employee ID Title Gone haa Eirst Name aa rr Hide Customization Form Job Title gt Reset Layout Report Ta Ben ee T Hide Text Birth Date Ei Text Position Hide Iter i TP Group C Create EmptySpace Item Ol Size Constraints e Drag the layout item onto the Hidden Items list of the Customization Form Display a Hidden Element Drag the required item from the Customization form s Hidden Items list onto the main form 2011 DevExpress Inc o Layout Manager 102 Change Element Layout To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Change Element Layout To rearrange items within the form use drag and drop operations 2011 DevExpress Inc 102 Layout Manager 103 Resize Interface Elements To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Resize Layout Items To resize a layout item drag the layout item s edge Employee ID Title First Mame Last
134. 00 33 ij Chans 31900 17 ii Sasquatch Ale 14 00 111 i Steeleye Stout 15 00 20 ij Cote de Blaye 2634 17 ij Chartreuse verte 16 00 ga ij Ipoh Cof 34000 17 10 Laughing Lumberjack 14 00 32 ij Laz i Outback Lazer 15 00 13 10 Rh nbr u Elosterbia 7 75 125 i Lakkalikoan 18 00 57 ij w Guarana Fant stica 450 20 ij 2 Anisead Symp 10 00 13 70 Chef Anton sCajm 22 00 453 D z e Grandma s 25 00 120 i Boysenberry Spread Northwoods 340 00 i ij Genen Showy 1550 33 ij Gula Malacca 419 45 27 ij Sirop d eable 2850 113 ij Vereepread 943 90 24 ij Louisiana FieyHo 21 03 78 i Pepper Sauce Louisiana HotSpicd 917 00 100 Okra Original Frankfurter 1300 32 ij w Chef Anton s Gumbo 2135 0 ij Mix If you want to customize your report further click Next If data grouping has been applied on this page you ll proceed to Step 6 Summary Options If you haven t grouped your data you ll skip the Summaries step and go to Step 7 Choose Report Layout 2011 DevExpress Inc azs Report Designer a2 Step 6 Summary Options Note This wizard step is only available if you ve applied data grouping in the previous step Step 5 Add Grouping Levels If you haven t grouped data this step is skipped Purpose Use this page to specify totals to be displayed for each data group and grand totals for the entire report For instance you may need to display the sum of values in a particular field the average value etc S
135. 05 is a simple filter condition where Discount is a field name gt is an operator and 0 05 is a value This condition when applied to a data aware control will display records that have values in the Discount column greater than or equal to 0 05 Here is how to create this condition via the Filter Editor it s assumed that the underlying data source contains the Discount column otherwise this column will not be accessible in the Filter Editor s column list 1 Invoke the Filter Editor To invoke the Filter Editor in a grid control right click any grid column s header and select the Filter Editor option Formi See Order ID Product Mame Unit Price Quantity Discount m 10380 Nor 24 Sort Ascending Fo 18 10 m 10380 Pert At Sort Descending 20 20 10 m 10380 Car Clear Sorting 20 6 10 m ee Group By This Column i Sis iis BS Group By Box E Column Chooser 7 Best Fit g Clear Filter F Filter Editor Best Fit fall columns To learn how to invoke the Filter Editor for other controls see corresponding sections in this documentation 2 The Filter Editor will pop up When invoking the Filter Editor for a grid control if no filtering has yet been applied the Filter Editor will contain a new filter condition referring to the clicked column If for example the Filter Editor has been opened by right clicking a Product Name column it will look li
136. 1 Title reporti Character set Unicode LITF 3 Remove carriage returns a oe th Gan n Export mode Choose one from the available modes to export a document The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages The Single file page by page mode allows export of a document to a single file divided into pages In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available Page range Define the pages which will be included in the result Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens Page border color Choose the color for the page borders from the available palettes Page border width Define the width of page borders Title Enter the required document title Character set Define the character set which will be used in the exported document Also using the appropriate check box you can choose whether to remove carriage returns See Also HTML Specific Export Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 169 Print Preview 170 RTF Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define RTF specific export options using the following dialog RIF Export Options Export mode Single file page by
137. 1 DevExpress Inc s2 Rich Text Editor 521 document Show All Field Codes Show All Field Codes The Show All Field Results button on the Mail Merge toolbar displays field placeholders if the View Merged Data button is switched off If this button is switched on then the current record of the data source is displayed in place of the field Show All Field Results Show All Field Results The merge field code looks like the following MERGEFIELD field name MERGEFORMAT The optional MERGEFORMAT switch which you can add manually retains formatting applied to the field e Perform a Merge To finalize the process you should create the resulting document To do this click the Merge to New Document button on the Mail Merge toolbar he a ec fT A eC TC TC CT VC CT nL Merge to New Document 2011 DevExpress Inc 521 Rich Text Editor 522 Document Protection Protect and Unprotect a Document Add Protection to a Document To protect a document by specifying a password follow the steps below 1 Click the Protect Document button on the Protect toolbar m Protect Document Help restrict people from editing the document by specifying a password 2 In the invoked Start Enforcing Protection dialog specify a password to restrict people from editing a document To do this type a password in the Enter new password optional box and confirm it in the
138. 1 DevExpress Inc sto Rich Text Editor 511 Delete entire column Shift cells left Shift cells up Delete entire row Delete a Row 1 Select a row to be deleted or click on one cell included into that row 2 Click the Delete button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar and select Delete Rows from the invoked list Delete Table or 1 Select a row to be deleted and right click it 2 Select Delete Rows from the invoked context menu H3 Merge Cells Cell Alignment Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink Delete a Column 2011 DevExpress Inc 51 Rich Text Editor 512 1 Select a column to be deleted or click on one cell included into that column 2 Click the Delete button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar and select Delete Columns from the invoked list m Delete Rows 0 Delete Table or m 1 Select a column to be deleted and right click it 2 Select Delete Columns from the invoked context menu HJ Merge Cells Cell Alignment Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink 2011 DevExpress Inc 512 Rich Text Editor 513 Merge or Split Cells Merge Cells 1 Select cells that you want to merge For example you can select multiple cells a whole row or column 2 Click the Merge Cells button on the Merge toolbar PCat FEB SS m j
139. 1 Select a table 2 Click the Borders button on the Table Styles toolbar and select No Borders from the invoked list 2011 DevExpress Inc 498 Rich Text Editor 499 Bottom Border Top Border Left Border Right Border All Borders Outside Border Inside Border Inside Horizontal Border Inside Vertical Border e Remove Borders from Specified Cells Only 1 Display gridlines to view boundaries of the table cells and select cells from which you want to remove borders 2 Click the Borders button on the Table Styles toolbar and select No Borders from the invoked list Show or Hide Gridlines Gridlines show boundaries of a table cells when no borders are applied Unlike borders gridlines are shown on screen only and never printed To show or hide table gridlines click the View Gridlines button on the Table toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 499 Rich Text Editor soo T View Gridlines Show or hide the gridlines within the table 2011 DevExpress Inc soo Rich Text Editor sot Customize a Style of Cell Borders Before you add borders to table cells you can specify a style to be applied to borders To set a style for cell borders do the following 1 Select a table or specific cells whose borders you want to customize 2 Change required options Line Style Line Weight Pen Color on the Draw Borders toolbar 3 Add borders using the Table Styles toolbar 2011 DevExpress I
140. 5 Ca c GroupFooter Group Union None Formatting Rules Collection _ Print at Bottom las Then you can do the same for the Group Header as well The report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result Category 1 Laughing Lumberjack Lager Unit Price 314 00 Quantity per Unit 24 12 oz bottes Units in Stock amp 2 Units on Order 0 Outback Lager Unit Price 315 00 Quantity per Unit 24 355 ml bottles Units in Stock 15 Units on Order 10 Lakkalikoori Unit Price 310 00 Quantity per Unit 500 ml Units in Stock 5 Units on Order 0 Page 2 of 2 TT See Also Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result Show the Current Row Index Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records Limit the Number of Records per Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 305 Report Designer 306 Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result This tutorial demonstrates how to sort groups based on the result of a function summary specified for them To demonstrate this feature we ll use a report similar to the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To sort groups by a summary function result do the following 1 Select the Group Header band and click its Smart Tag In the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Sorting Summary option ia
141. 7 2 1969 11 15 1994 7 Houndstooth Rd London WG2 7LT UK 71 555 4444 452 Emr Record 1of9 gt gt gt gt lt On this form you can sort filter and group data It may appear that you can edit the data but the data is read only and will not be written back to the database ODBC The ODBC connection allows you to connect through Open Database Connectivity data sources setup on your computer This is done using the Windows Control Panel or Administrative Tools prior to making the data source in the Report Manager ODBC connections provide the ability to connect to Microsoft SQL Server MySQL Oracle ora variety of other database management systems There is even an ODBC driver available for QuickBooks Check the Intuit website for more details NOTE If you are using a 64 bit computer you will need to run the 32 bit ODBC driver to be compatible with the Report Manager This can be done by manually running the odbcad32 exe in the syswow64 directory under Windows After selecting ODBC as the Data Source Type the ODBC DSN dropdown will be populated with the installed ODBC data sources on your machine Choose the data source name You may need to enter a User Name and or Password to access this data Once the DSN is selected and optionally user name and or password entered you will need to select a Table or View from that database to use as the data source There can be only one table or view per data source so if the
142. ARROW Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the previous or next time cell within the current day Week View Moves focus to the previous or next day Month View Moves focus to the same day of the week for the previous or next week Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the corresponding time cell of the previous or next day Week View Moves focus to the left or right of the corresponding cell of a column The view is scrolled to the previous or next week if necessary Month View Moves focus to the previous or next day PAGE DOWN Moves the row focus one page down preserving the column focus PAGE UP Moves the row focus one page up preserving the column focus HOME CTRL HOME CTRL END TAB Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the start of Work Time within the current day Week View Month View Moves focus to the first day shown in the current week Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the end of Work Time within the current day Week View Month View Moves focus to the last day shown in the current week Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the first cell of the day s visible time span Week View Month View Moves focus to the first day shown in the current week Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the last cell of the day s visible time span Week View Month View Moves focus to the last day shown in the current week Switches to appointments navi
143. ARROW keys Select Multiple Rows or Cards To select a row card while preserving the current selection do one of the following e In Grid Views click the row s indicator cell or any of its data cells while holding the CTRL key down e In Card and Layout Views click the card s caption or any of its data cells while holding the CTRL key down To toggle the focused row s card s selected state do one of the following e Press CTRL SPACE e Click the row card while holding the CTRL key down To move focus between rows and cards while preserving the current selection use CTRL ARROW keyboard Shortcut Supported by Grid and Card Views Select a Range of Rows Cards To select all rows cards press CTRL A supported by Grid and Layout Views Before pressing this shortcut ensure that the focused cell is not being edited To select a continuous range or rows cards you can do the following e Use ARROW PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys while holding the SHIFT key down e To selects all rows cards between the currently focused row card and another one click the target row card while holding the SHIFT key down e To select a continuous range of cards in Layout Views drag with the mouse around cards that are to be selected marquee selection Copy Selected Records to the Clipboard Press CTRL C or SHIFT INS 2011 DevExpress Inc Layout Manager 98 Layout Manager This section describes the capabilities provided by the Layout Manage
144. Annotations Provides access to the annotations collection of the Chart Diagram Allows you to customize a Chart s diagram elements main and secondary axes and panes By default a Chart is displayed in the Default Pane but if necessary you can display each Chart s series in a separate pane To do this click the Pane s ellipsis button to invoke the Pane Collection Editor allowing you to manage and customize panes Then select the required series within the Chart and set its View Pane property to the required pane Note that the diagram is null until no visible series exists in the Chart s collection So to access the diagram s options you should create a series first 2011 DevExpress Inc 380 Report Designer 381 Layout Legend Allows you to customize a Chart s legend by defining such properties as text alignment and antialiasing font style background color or image border options markers size and visibility shadow options etc Series Invokes the Series Collection Editor which allows you to manage and customize a Chart s series Note that series which are bound to data at the level of a chart control in particular using the Data Source Series Data Member and both the Argument Data Member and Value Data Members properties are created dynamically based upon the data obtained from the specified data source and they are not presented within the Series collection To perform a centralized customization of such serie
145. Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the controls contained within the band e Text Alignment Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Level Specifies the order of several Detail Report Band objects in a report It allows the reordering of different Detail Report Bands at the same level of master detail relationships The lower the level number the closer the band is to the Detail band e Page Break Use this property if the current report design requires that the band s section should be separated from previous sections or follow ups Specify the Before the Band or After the Band values to insert a page break before or after the current band In many cases this property may be used instead of the Page Break control e Print when Data Source is Empty Specifies whether the band should be printed if its data source is empty e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible 2011 DevExpress Inc oat Report Designer on Specifies whether the band should be visible in print preview Data e Data Adapter Determines a Detail Report Band s data adapter that provides the detail data for the report To learn more refer to Master Detail Report D
146. BD file from one location to another the report designs will be pointing to the previous location In order to fix this choose the pull down menu item Tools Fix CleverQ Report Data Source levert Repon Managen File Edit View Windows 4dd Batch Group to Queue ol Horizaton Process Queue When you create a new report design using either the New button from the Report Design List or the pull down menu item File New Report Design you will be prompted to select a data source for the report Page 46 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Salar Depry utes Poy Panyi Enter the number for the source of data for this report 1 Fredefined Data Sources 2 Report Wizard Create source using wizard 3 Blank Create source from design intertace Cancel Choose 1 for an existing data source you have already defined This selection is necessary if you are going to use your CleverQ QBD file as the source 2 to use the report wizard This will require you know the location and associated information about the database you will connect to 3 to start with a blank report design You can choose your data source using the design interface Selecting 2 or 3 are used when you are connecting to a data source external to the CleverQ QBD file Once you make your select and press OK the report designer will appear When you are in the Report Designer to view the data source or add a new one if you choose option 3
147. Bands So changing these properties values will cause changing the appropriate bands Height value as well and vice versa Note e Page Height Specifies page height in report units This property can only be set if the Paper Kind property is set to Custom Page Width Specifies page width in report units This property can only be set if the Paper Kind property is set to Custom Paper Kind Determines the type of paper for a report Setting this property to any value different from Custom will prevent the Page Height Page Width and Paper Name properties from being customized If the Paper Kind property is set to Custom then the printer paper will be selected according to the Paper Name 2011 DevExpress Inc me Report Designer 417 property s value In this case it s also necessary to set the Page Width and Page Height properties to the corresponding values of the paper selected e Paper Name Determines the name of the custom paper used in the printer that will print the document The Paper Name property s value is in effect only when the Paper Kind property is set to Custom If the printer on which a document is printed doesn t support the paper type specified by the Paper Name property s value then it will default to the Letter paper size In this case it s also necessary to set the Page Width and Page Height properties to the corresponding values of the selected paper e Printer Name Determines the name of the
148. Cells By default text is aligned to the top left corner of a table cell You can change both the vertical and horizontal alignment of text in a table cells 1 Click a cell or select multiple cells containing text that you want to align 2 Click one of the available buttons on the Alignment toolbar HaHa HaHaHa P m bl 1 a Po R a L Align Center Center text horizontally and vertically within the cell Paap pp 2011 DevExpress Inc 51 s Rich Text Editor ste Set Background Color of Cells 1 Select a table or specific cells whose background color you want to set 2 Click the Shading arrow and select a color to fill in the background of the selected cells 2011 DevExpress Inc ste Rich Text Editor 517 Header and Footer Headers and footers are the areas at the bottom or on the top of each page in the document You can insert text or graphics into headers and footers for example page numbers a company logo the document title or file name or the author s name Insert a Header or Footer 1 Click the Header or Footer button on the Header amp Footer toolbar Header Edit the header of the document The content in the header will appear at the top of each printed Footer Edit the footer of the document The content in the footer will appear at the bottom of each printed
149. Choose whether a diagram should be rotated set its padding values and if it contains several panes define the panes layout direction e Elements Add or remove secondary axes and panes e Scroll amp Zoom Enable or disable a diagram s scrolling and zooming and specify the scrolling and zooming options 2011 DevExpress Inc 24 Charting 25 Panes Page Tasks e Customize panes properties Page Elements Chart preview area Pane selector Panes Population Age Structure a Data estimate for mid 2000 sats o SSUEJeaddy Size Size mode UseWeight Weight 1 0 4 Japuog 1e0 MOPEYS 150 120 wn a 2 Cc O D 5 2 m oo 30 WOOF 9 0125 60 30 53eg Jj025 T United States Russia Mexico United Kingdom Brazil Japan Germany From Win Geonive com Customize the diagram s panes Note that you may select a pane by clicking it in the chart preview Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout Pane selector Specifies a pane to be customized Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e General Determines whether the selected pane should be visible specifies its name size mode and size value 2011 DevExpress Inc 25 e Appearance Specifies a pane s background color and fill style and its background image e Border Determines whether a pane s border should be visible and defines its color e Shadow Dete
150. Data in Pivot Tables Values of dimension fields are always arranged in ascending or descending order The sort order is indicated by an Up or Down arrow displayed within a corresponding dimension field s header Descending Ascending Order Order Quantity Cuantity l ear H guarker 4 4scendin _ S SSS Order _7 1996 Total 1995 o peer Sales Person Ht Category Mame ori ore E Andrew Fuller confections 27 293 320 385 eel ore see 348 674 274 You can also sort the values of a particular dimension field by the summary values calculated against a specific data field To do this right click a column or row header and choose the dimension field whose values should be sorted by the column row summary values A specific indicator marks the column row whose summary values are used to define the sort order Sorting Indicator Drop Filter Fields Here Z Product Sales Grand Total Sort Category Name by This Column Category Name Product Name E aMeat Poultry 1 571 52 1 933 56 5 098 50 33 503 43 41 766 76 80 368 69 ce Mut 6 962 28 13 382 85 11 885 25 32 230 38 16 120 46 90 160 15 65 851 61 162 132 22 E Produce 9 177 08 47 491 56 36 962 15 93 630 79 15 652 56 42 495 02 51 992 55 130 070 15 Grand Total 40 950 10 190 086 73 154 796 31 385 833 14 You can sort values of multiple dimension fields against a single column row
151. Even Styles amp tNote Note that the styles loaded from a style sheet file have priority over the styles which exist in a report s style sheet So if the styles stored in the report have the same names as the styles loaded from a style sheet file then the styles from the file will substitute for their namesakes See Also Understand Styles Concepts Use Odd and Even Styles Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc 275 Report Designer 276 Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance This tutorial describes the steps to conditionally change a control s appearance e g make a Label s text red if its value exceeds some threshold Thanks to the formatting rules feature to achieve this no scripts are required so you shouldn t write any code To conditionally change a control s appearance do the following 1 Create a data aware report 2 Click the report s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Formatting Rule Sheet option Reporti B y MaE ems o Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source myDataset Data Member Products Data Adapter ProductsTableAdapter Filter String Ill ES ES ESS _ 7 Print when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style
152. Mame Birth Date Hire Date Lock Size To lock a layout item s size and prevent it from being resized for instance when the size of the container changes right click on a layout item and select the Size Constraints Lock Size menu command Employee ID Title oe jie Hide Customization Form Job Title gt Reset Layout Report To E T Hide Text Birth Date E Text Position Hide Iter ce Group CJ Create EmptySpace bem EI Size Constraints d 2011 DevExpress Inc 103 Layout Manager 104 Add Empty Regions Separators Splitters and Labels To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Add Empty Regions Empty regions enable greater control over element layout They can be used for example if you want elements to be aligned to the right or bottom edge of a resizeable container To add an empty region do one of the following e Drag the Empty Space Item from the Customization form and drop at the required position on the form e Right click the Layout Control and select Create EmptySpace Item from the context menu Employee ID Title cae S Eirst Name rr Hide Customization Form Job Title gt Reset Layout Report Ta ME T Hide Text Birth Date Ei Text Position Gh Hide Item Group C Create EmptySpace Item Gl Size Constraints A new empty region will be added at the b
153. Not Contain Any Records To cancel printing when a report does not contain any records simply set the report s Print when Data Source is Empty property to No You can quickly perform this via the report s Smart Tag Report 1 E oOo DMa 4 Snot Report Tasks Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands r Data Source myDataset Data Member Products Data Adapter ProductsTableAdapter Ill 2 HREM q Detail Print Count Data Source is Empty E E Detail Print Count Li k i i lt Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch 1 Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection Watermark None 1 om 1 1 EEN See Also Show the Current Row Index Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Limit the Number of Records per Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 308 Report Designer 309 Limit the Number of Records per Page This tutorial demonstrates how to define how many records should be displayed at each page in a report s Print Preview Note that no scripts are required to accomplish this task To demonstrate this feature we ll use a report similar to the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To limit the number of records per page do the following 1 To add a parameter to the report in the Field List right click the Parameters section and in the invoked menu choose Add Parameter
154. Press ENTER to create the next item of the list 5 To finish the list press ENTER twice Make a Numbered List from the Selected Text You can add numbers to existing lines of text in two ways The first one is to use the Paragraph toolbar 1 Select the text lines that you want to transform into a list 2 Click the Numbering button on the Paragraph toolbar Another way to do the same thing is to use the context menu 1 Select the text to be transformed into a list 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the appeared context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc 484 Rich Text Editor as Sociability Cohabitation Fighting Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph E Bookmark Hyperlink 3 In the invoked Bullets and Numbering dialog click the Numbered tab and choose the list style that you want to apply Bullets and Numbering Bulleted Numbered Outline Numbered Create Your Own List Style You can create your own style for a numbered list on the basis of one of the existing list styles by changing different list parameters 2011 DevExpress Inc 485 486 Rich Text Editor 1 Select the numbered list or text to be transformed into the numbered list to which you want to apply your own style 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the resulting context menu The Bullets and Numbering dialog will be displ
155. Products UnitPrice Elements In addition you can filter the series data To do this click the ellipsis button for its Data Filters property and in the invoked dialog create and adjust the filtering criteria 2011 DevExpress Inc 259 Report Designer 260 Data Filter Collection Editor And E Or Misc o yID DataFilter Condition Equal Data Type System Int32 Value 4 To save the changes and quit the dialog click Close Then back in the Series Collection Editor click Copy to create a similar series but change its View to Point 6 Finally to improve your Chart s appearance you can make the following adjustments Remove the Chart s legend as it shows the same data for both series To do this click the Legend and in the Property Grid set its Visible property to No The point labels for Seriesi are unnecessary so select the label and set its Visible property to No Customize the appearance of the Series2 markers e g replace the default circle with the upside down triangle by the View Point Marker Options Kind property and set its Size to 12 Rotate the X axis labels for better readability To do this select the AxisX item in the chart by mouse click and adjust properties for its labels via the Label property For instance if the Angle property is 20 and the Antialiasing property is set to Yes the labels look neat If required it is possible to customize many other properties for
156. Reenter password to confirm box Start Enforcing Protection m m ii i e Enter new password optional 555 Reenter password to confirm 5555 h OK j Cancel a You can also allow particular users to change certain parts of a document Give Users Permission to Edit Certain Parts of a Document Before adding protection to a document you can specify certain parts of the document where you want to remove the restriction and allow a particular user or group of users to modify these parts 1 Select a part of a document to be unrestricted 2 Click the Range Editing Permissions button on the Protect toolbar n Range Editing Permissions Range Editing Permissions Personal Courtesies Each team member represents a specific area of expertise or business unit Team members will bring their individual perspectives to the team and will also consider what is best for the company 3 In the invoked Editing Permissions dialog select a user or group of users to be allowed to edit the selected part of a document 2011 DevExpress Inc 522 Rich Text Editor 523 Editing Permissions lawyer somecompany com Everyone projectmanager somecompany com senior somecompany com novice somecompany com Personal Courtesies Each team member represents a specific area of expertise or business unit Team members will bring their individual perspectives to the team and will also consider what is best for the
157. Restore Layout Save and Restore Interface Layout You can save the current layout of controls to an XML file and subsequently restore it Save the Layout of Controls 1 Invoke Customization mode 2 In the Customization form that opens click the Save Layout button laa 3 The Save As dialog will appear It allows you to specify the XML file to which the layout is to be saved Load a Layout of Controls 1 Invoke Customization mode 2 In the Customization form that opens click the Load Layout button 3 The Open File dialog will appear It allows you to specify the XML file from which the layout is to be loaded 2011 DevExpress Inc 12 Navigation Bars 113 Navigation Bars This section describes the capabilities provided by the Navigation Bars Contacts A Contacts Calendar Ee Calendar Topics in this section e Navigation Pane e Navigation Bar 2011 DevExpress Inc Navigation Bars ata Navigation Pane Expand Groups A Navigation Pane displays only one group at a time Other groups are collapsed and their buttons are displayed at the bottom or in the Overflow panel You can use the horizontal splitter to control the number of group buttons shown outside of the Overflow panel 3 Inbox E Outbox A Sent Items al Deleted Items LA Drafts Overflow Panel Collapsed Group Collapsed Groups To activate a group click its caption button Minimize the Navigat
158. Search Match case Find whole words only Regular expression 2 In the Find what box type the text to replace 3 In the Replace with box type the replacement text 4 Select other search options that you want and click Find Next Replace or Replace All Use Regular Expressions to Find and Replace Text You can use regular expressions to search for specific text containing a particular pattern 1 Click Find or Replace on the Editing toolbar Find text in the document Or press CTRL F or CTRL H The Find and Replace dialog will be invoked Find and Replace Find what cm Match case Find whole words only Regular expression 2 Select the Regular expression check box 3 In the Find what box enter the regular expression pattern using a list of specific characters 2011 DevExpress Inc 473 473 Rich Text Editor 474 Find and Replace Fra Any single character Zero or more One or more Search PEPE PERA Beginning of paragraph E Find whole words only 5 End of paragraph v Regular expression b Beginning of word B End of word Any one character in the set Any one character not in the set Or Escape special character Tag expression w Word character s Space ortab d Integer 4 If you want to replace the found text click the Replace tab and enter the replacement text in the Replace with box Note You can tag
159. Send to FTP site into Destination Folder Format HTML Single Printer Copies 1 Destination Folder C Documents and Settings 4ll Users 4pplication DatatFeports Dashboards Browse Email Options Email To Email CC Email Subject Email Message Status Report saved to C Documents and Settings 4ll Users 4pplication DatalReports Dashboards Income Dashboard htm User ID Larry Date Time Added 7 10 2010 6 41 AM Date Time Processed 7 10 2010 6 45 AM Copy and Create New Queue Entry By going to this form you are able to email the report after it as been processed as an attachment You can enter the Email Email Subject and Message Sending emails are also controlled by a set of preferences which are setup one time These include SMTP Server SMTP Username SMTP Password Default From Email Address Default Email Subject Default Email message and SMTP Server Port In addition to editing the entries on this form you can delete the entry by pressing the button and closing the form You can also create a copy by pressing the Copy and Create New Queue Entry Report Queue Calendar The Report Queue Calendar is another way of looking at Queue entries It 1s convenient since it uses a familiar calendar format You can get to this view by pressing the lower icon on the Report Queue block in the Navigator You can also get to this form from the pull down menu item View Report Queue Calendar When the
160. Sheet Collection Watermark None E a Hf E I I And in the invoked Formatting Rule Sheet Editor create a new formatting rule by using the oP button and click the ellipsis button for its Condition property 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 6 Report Designer 277 Formatting Rule Sheet Editor formattingRule 1 3 Then in the invoked Condition Editor define the required Boolean condition which means that its result is returned as either true or false In this tutorial we will format fields if the UnitPrice value is greater than 30 Condition Editor EHO Products h a Discontinued ab ProductName fab QuantityPerUnit fi ReorderLevel f UnitsInStock fa UnitsOnOrder To save the condition and close the dialog click OK 4 Now back in the Formatting Rule Sheet Editor define the formatting to be applied e g specify the desired font color 2011 DevExpress Inc 277 Report Designer 278 Formatting Rule Sheet Editor formattingRule To save the changes and quit the dialog click Close 5 Finally select the band or control to which the formatting rule must be applied in this example it is the Detail band and via its Smart Tag access its collection of Formatting Rules y And in the invoked Formatting Rules Editor move the rule from left to right using the gt button for it to come into effect for this band 2011 DevExpress Inc 278 Report Designer 279
161. Specifies a series to be customized Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e General Specifies a series bar s width distance color transparency etc e Appearance Specifies a series color transparency and fill style Additionally determines whether series points should be painted individually e Border Determines whether a series border should be visible and defines its color and thickness e Shadow Specifies whether a series shadow should be visible determines its color and size e Fibonacci Indicators Allows you to add or remove Fibonacci indicators of a required kind Fibonacci Arcs Fibonacci Fans or Fibonacci Retracement Specifies their points arguments and value levels Determines whether to display additional levels Specifies the appearance of the indicators lines and labels e Trendlines Allows you to add or remove trendlines Determines whether to extrapolate them to infinity Specifies their points arguments and value levels Defines their color dash style and thickness e Regression Lines Allows you to add or remove regression lines Determines their value level and appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc 30 Charting 31 Point Labels Page Tasks e Resolve overlapping of point labels e Customize the appearance of point labels Page Elements Chart preview area Series selector Point Labels A Series 1 A Series z visible Layout Settings aueseaddy
162. Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar To define the alignment of the barcode image use the Alignment property Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Auto Module When this property is set to Yes the barcode image is stretched to fit the entire control s width When 2011 DevExpress Inc 369 Report Designer 370 this option is turned off this behavior is determined by the Module property e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Bar Code Should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a B
163. The context menu provides common commands and displays suggested corrections if you right click the misspelled word 2011 DevExpress Inc 447 Rich Text Editor government cdo 2011 DevExpress Inc phase in plan that The European Commission has just announced an ag the EU rather than German which was the other possib o had some re Ignore All Add to Dictionary Check Spelling Cut Copy Paste Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink 448 448 Rich Text Editor aaa Toolbars The Rich Text control can be accompanied by a set of toolbars that provide a comprehensive functionality for the Rich Editor Visual Appearance Fat Oae e Clip P A ee j 2011 DevExpress Inc ao Rich Text Editor aso Page Break Ctrl Return Start the next page at the current position 2 Create a bookmark to assign a name to a specific point in a document You can make hyperlinks that jump directly to a bookmarked location Header 4 Footer x BEREE 2011 DevExpress Inc aso Rich Text Editor ast Insert symbols that are not on your keyboard such as copyright symbols tademark symbols paragraph marks and Unicode characters Go to Footer Activate the footer on this page so that you can edit it Options x Different First Page Specify a unique header and footer for the first page of
164. This copies the selection and places it on the Clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard 3 Point to the position where you want to insert the contents from the Clipboard 4 Click the Paste Pe button on the Clipboard toolbar or press CTRL V or press SHIFT INSERT This pastes the contents of the Clipboard Wie ell se Paste Ctrl V Paste the contents of the Clipboard 2011 DevExpress Inc 475 Rich Text Editor 476 Check Text Spelling The Rich Text Editor supports spell check All misspelled words in your document words that are not found within the available dictionaries in the Spell Checker are underlined You can work with misspelled words via the context menu invoked when right clicking the underlined word mpr a L ad Mle ee Alea Bie gms Mieco i a a alee Renn ee iy iN a wipe pe ale a wiiipeh pala nes F l I l l l I I The European Commission has just announced an ae the EU rather than German cage was the other possibili government cdonceded that Fnolish spelling had some rc phase in plan that aded Ignore All Add to Dictionary Check Spelling Cut Copy Paste Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink In the context menu you can do one of the following e Select one of the suggested corrections for the misspelled word to correct it e Ignore th
165. To load static information to your report from an external file drop an appropriate control from the Control Toolbox e g Label Rich Text Box or Picture Box After it is properly positioned edit its content using the Smart Tag For instance the following instructions describe how to display a rich text a formatted text with embedded images into your report 1 Drop the Rich Text control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band iy E Detail i gach Text 2 To load content from an external RTF or TXT file select the created control and click its Smart Tag In the invoked actions list click the Load File link Edit Text Clear Data Binding None Anchor Vertically None Formatting Rules Collection Can Grow _ Can Shrink Then in the invoked dialog locate the required file and click Open 2011 DevExpress Inc 190 Report Designer so See Also Change Fonts and Colors of Report Elements Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Use Mail Merge in Report Elements 2011 DevExpress Inc 191 Report Designer 192 Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Report controls can either display static information or dynamic data fetched from the bound database Data bound controls are indicated by a yellow database icon in their top right corner both in the Design Panel and Report Explorer Detail gt Thi
166. a Scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 382 Report Designer 383 e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data e Data Adapter Determines a data adapter that will populate a Pivot Grid s data source which is assigned via the Data Source property It is automatically set to the appropriate value when the Data Member property is defined To learn more on this refer to Cross Tab Report e Data Member Determines the data source member which supplies data to a Pivot Grid To learn more on this refer to Cross Tab Report 44Note Usually it is not necessary to specify the Data Member property when binding a Pivot Grid to data This property Should only be set directly if the dataset contains more than one table e Data Source Determines a Pivot Grid s data source To learn more on this refer to Cross Tab Report e Fields Invokes the Pivot Grid Field Collection Editor allowing you to manage and fully customize a Pivot Grid s fields e OLAP Connection String Specifies a connection string to a cube in an Microsoft Analysis Services database A sample connection string is shown below OLAPConnectionString Provider msolap Data Source localhost Initial Catalog Adventure Works DW Cube Name Adventure Works Query Timeout 100 A connection string can be built via the Connection String Editor To invoke it click the ellipsis button for the OLAP Connection String property To represent information from the bo
167. a Source Name Data Source Type Access ODBC C CleverQ Access File User Name if req d Password if req d i Table Query View Employees Test Select Field Value The field value is only here to test the data source Itis not stored as part of the data source View Data ee ee es ee ee ee eee You can also check out the source by pressing the View Data button Page 12 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual View Data Df x Drag a column header here to group by that column i Sales Representative 206 555 9857 5467 2 Fuller Andrew Vice President Sales Dr 2 19 1952 8 14 1992 908 W Capital Way Tacoma WA 98401 USA 206 555 9482 3457 Em m 3 Leverling Janet Sales Representative Ms 8 30 1963 4 1 1992 722 Moss Bay Blvd Kirkland WA 98033 USA 206 555 3412 3355 Emr m 4 Peacock Margaret Sales Representative Mrs 9 19 1958 5 3 1993 4110 Old Redmond Rd Redmond WA 98052 USA 206 555 8122 5176 Emy m 5 Buchanan Steven Sales Manager Mr 3 4 1955 10 17 1993 14 Garrett Hill London SW18IR UK 71 555 4848 3453 Emr m 6 Suyama Michael Sales Representative Mr 7 2 1963 10 17 1993 Coventry House London EC2 7R UK 71 555 7773 428 Emy m 7 King Robert Sales Representative Mr 5 29 1960 1 2 1994 Edgeham Hollow London RG19SP UK 71 555 5598 465 Emy m 8 Callahan Laura Inside Sales Coordinator Ms 1 9 1958 3 5 1994 4726 11th Ave N E Seatte WA 98105 USA 206 555 1189 2344 Em 9 Dodsworth Anne Sales Representative Ms
168. a a Ea A EA 529 MSE PICU UNE E a a Gaumere con aaudecaudicussevenes tcenziwecescavanccau ten sayssneeasuxeteos gavcessntuntasseuen nig dhestn osc yaveeteusueaemseenesece 530 mser Page NUMDELS iiinn e cevadsedsesosutc E e a a a A des a Oa EEES 531 MSE aS VMD E E 533 S CNE CIO osa a a a a ates A a E ANO A 534 Appointment Management scence nananana a anaE aA a A E a A aara Eea E e AAE aAA E AAAA EEA REA 536 Cr ate aN Ap POHO A I ea aa aaa aa aa aaa a aa aa aa a A eE a Aaa e a aa aa Oaa a EEEa aaea 536 Edt amApPpPOnNniMEn sie e E E E aE A a R 539 Manage REME ES a a a a Aa Aar a a a a eaaa paR ERS Eaa 543 Delete M APPOINTMENT Aa E A A a A E a aA a SEa 545 Restrictions for Operations with Appointments ssssssnssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 547 Layout Customization a E a a EEE E A E EIES 548 SOW BUC IN Scheduler Vi eW S a aa aa a a a a tet ea a Ea a aA Aa aaa ease cacosnsskatetacueressecdeecancaseanaaueecusieecueacess 548 SCHE dule Gr OUI cats cce gee qoeessteustucncee tau atan canes 550 Zoom the Scheduling ALG aise ies osasoececs cee cerwevscccacdececcusscas vareececusasausecesausonsevecucecadtecsuee wdsconeseecveusedcssaniieasvenisncetwenenaauaedceecuccssss 551 Selection and Navigation sede crscceeenscteetcicepccaenatevcoceet Sieseesceec esata tenacsenssueenesvesassnescectose is uaa tev ensenesvestoessanvesecnucsuasannecbenssansteneteceusensieecsss 552 Navigate Dates in the SCNE GUI Piiceisccccc
169. a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 363 Report Designer 364 Line The Line control draws a line of a specified direction style width and color It can be used for both decoration and visual separation of a report s sections The Line cannot cross bands as opposed to the Cross band Line control SS In the Property Grid the Line s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Foreground Color Specifies the Line s color e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Line Direction The line can be drawn vertically horizontally and from one corner of the rectangle representing the Line control to another across the rectangle That is Vertical Horizontal Slant and Back Slant types e Line Style You can select the solid by default dashed dotted or mixed style for the line e Line Width Specifies the Line s width in report measurement units e Padding
170. a e 1 3 2009 3 Toyota Prius 1 6 2009 6 Camry 1 4 2009 4 a Toyota Camry Prius 1 5 2009 5 gen 1 4 7009 4 Prius 1 6 2009 6 i Toyota Prius 1 4 2009 4 Brass 1 5 2009 5 1 5 2009 5 on a 1 6 2009 6 Note If you don t need to group your data simply click Next on this page to skip this step Page Interface The list on the left hand side displays data fields that can be used to group data To apply grouping do one of the following e Select columns and click the right arrow gt button e Drag required columns to the box on the right hand side e Double click columns Note that grouping fields on the right hand side can be selected by clicking them This is useful if you need to remove them or change their order To accomplish the latter use the up arrow O and down arrow LJ buttons 2011 DevExpress Inc azs Report Designer 427 Report Wizard Do you want to add any grouping levels E You can have several groups each witha single field value or specify several fields in the same group E ProductName Ea UnitPrice CategoryID E unitsinstock UnitsOnOrder ProductName UnitPrice Units InStock UnitsQnOrder Result You can stop the wizard on this step by clicking Finish In this case your report will look similar to the image below 2011 DevExpress Inc 427 Report Designer as Reporti CalegoryID Discontinued Product Name Unit Price Units In Stock Units On Order il Chai 16
171. above click on the top left corner in the design layout area as shown in the next figure zgan e a ase Dal YH Hs Save To File Load Parameters Script To Clipboard Data Connection CleverQ Help z rreren 978 u f Fe AY PP EEL TEES WS o_O Field List ee ee aay in Sano wom ew NewDataSet Edit and Reorder Bands a l PF i BigTicketRatio E Color i Color2 E Color3 3E DashboardFilters 5 DashboardGaugelD E DashboardName 5 DashboardNum j Data Source dataSet1 Data Member Views I Data Adapter oleDbDataAdapter 1 How Ww Filter String Kk Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection HOB Watermark None Appearance Background Colo C Transparent LED Border Color HB ControlText Border Width 1 Borders None ble he JARRE oe I a oleDbD ata dapter1 la dataSet1 F Preview Je HTML view w Scripts xtraReport1 PaperKind Letter I Zoom Factor 100 EL E Group and sort 18 Page 47 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual The name of the Data Source is arbitrary and if you created the report from an existing data source this will automatically be named as will the Data Member and Data Adapter The Filter String will be where you enter the filter that will tie parameters to data and filter what data sh
172. age Number Roman Uppercase Anchor Vertically Current Date and Time User Name Formatting Rules Collection Select whether to display only the page number Latin or Roman uppercase or lowercase or the current page number with total pages 2 To format the control s text via its Smart Tag invoked its actions list and specify the required format e g Page 0 of 1 2011 DevExpress Inc ata Report Designer 215 Page 1 of 1 3 Using the control s actions list you also can specify the starting page number and the running band e g this option is available when there are groups in a report and it s required to apply independent page numbering for them For details on this refer to Add Page Numbers for Groups The result is shown below Page l of 2 Chai 18 00 Chane 19 00 Aniseed Syrup 310 00 Chef Anton s Cajun Seasonneg 322 00 Chef Anton s Gumbo Mm 2135 Grandma s Boysenbemy Spread 29 00 Uncle Bob s Organic Dned Pears 30 00 Northwoods Cranbery Sauce 340 00 Wish Kobe Miku 07 00 Add System Date and Time 1 Select the Page Info control click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the drop down list for the Page Information entry and select Current Date and Time Current of Total Page Numbers Page Number Roman Lowercase Page Number Roman Uppercase 2011 DevExpress Inc 21 5 Report Designer ate 2
173. ained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can be then accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Text The Text box should contain digits or dashes Other characters are displayed as empty zip boxes If the current report has a data source the Text property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Text Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are alig
174. aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 368 Report Designer 369 Bar Code The Bar Code control transforms its content into a bar
175. alog Then click on the appropriate text box depending on the required alignment and do the following e To add a date stamp click the Date Printed z button e To add a time stamp click the Time Printed button When you click one of these buttons the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position You can surround this alias with any text you like If you no longer need to display date and time in your document delete this alias Click OK to save changes and close the dialog 2011 DevExpress Inc s Print Preview 146 Insert the User Name into Printed Documents To insert user name into a document s header or footer first invoke the Header and Footer dialog Then focus an appropriate text box depending on the required alignment and click the User Name T button When you click this button the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position You can Surround this alias with any text you like If you no longer need to display user name in your document delete this alias Click OK to save changes and close the dialog 2011 DevExpress Inc 146 Print Preview 147 Insert a Logo into Printed Documents To insert a logo into a document s header or footer first invoke the Header and Footer dialog Then focus an appropriate text box depending on the required alignment and click the Image H button Select the image from the dropdown list Click
176. an be printed only once e g ina Report Header can repeat on each page e g in a Page Header or can repeat with every entry in your report s data source a data bound label which is placed onto the Detail band v E Detail Al This item has been expired ee ProductName a TopMarain g EYE Detail A label This item has been expired Chai This item has been expired Chang This item has been expired Aniseed Syrup This item has been expired Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning This item has been expired Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix This item has been expired Grandma s Boysenberry Spread Static information can be either edited in place or loaded from an external file Change Static Information Text elements e g Labels and Rich Text Boxes allow in place editing of their content Simply double click an element and activate the editor E ai gt a xr La j E i E Note For in place editing you also can utilize the Formatting Toolbar Another way to change a control s static information is by clicking its Smart Tag Then the invoked actions list will contain a link or a button allowing you to edit this control s content 2011 DevExpress Inc 189 Report Designer 190 Edit Text Clear Load File Data Binding None Anchor Vertically None Formatting Rules Collection Can Grow _ Can Shrink Load Static Information to Your Report
177. ar Code s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Bar Code will be split despite this property s value e Module Specifies the width of the narrowest bar or space in the barcode in report measurement units You may set this property to Yes for automatic adjustment of its value when the control is resized Note that if the Module value is too low the barcode output may become unreadable by a barcode scanner When the Auto Module property is set to No there could be a situation when the barcode image generated with the current setting of Module property is larger than the control itself In this case the control displays a warning as illustrated below a E gt a Control s boundaries are too small for the barcode So increase the dimensions of the control to avoid this e Orientation The barcode image within the control can be rotated If you need this feature use the Orientation property to specify one of four possible orientations Normal Upside Down Rotate to the Left and Rotate to the Right for an image within the control e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Show Text Determines whether to display the numerical value or only the barcode within the control e Symbology The Symbology defines the mapping between barcode text and an i
178. arameters can come from a data source a list or just a single specific value If they are to come from a data source or list you will need to set them up before you can use them This is done from the Navigator by clicking on the Parameter block or from the pull down menu item Edit Parameters Data Parameter After making this selection you will see a list of data parameters as shown in the next figure Page 18 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual eiaa Parametern Drag a column header here to group by thak column Filters Filter Filter 1 Filter 1 Filter Filter Dashboards and Gauges DashboardName Monthly Daily Annual Weekly Gu Smile Normal Frown Filter4 Filter4 Indicator Category Category Filter3 Filter3 Filter Filter Yes Mo Parameters Reportame a vendor Mame FilterS Filters parameters C w Et o i o o lH oM This list shows you the data parameters already created Several come with the software initially Two type of parameters can exist 1 from a data source 2 from a list A good example of a parameter from a data source is any of the filters associated with CleverQ data or something like a list of dashboards Page 19 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual adi enale etal Bi Slag Enter either a data source for a list or manually enter a list Data Source Dashboards and Gauges Daca Source Field DashboardName List
179. ard and press SPACE or ALT DOWN ARROW Then choose the required operator from the list that will be invoked Edit a Condition s Value To edit a condition s value click the operand value and type text To activate the operand value s edit box without changing the value click the value or focus the operand value via the keyboard and press F2 SPACE ENTER or ALT DOWN To close the active edit box press ENTER To discard changes to the value and close the active edit box press ESC Navigation To focus a specific filter condition or a group s operator within the Filter Editor do one of the following e Click the target element 2011 DevExpress Inc so Filter Editor eo e Use arrow keys to move focus via the keyboard See Also Examples of Using the Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc e Filter Editor ot Examples of Using the Filter Editor The Filter Editor allows you to filter data display those records that meet specific requirements by visually constructing filter criteria in a straightforward graphical form The following sections demonstrate how to construct filter criteria using the Filter Editor How to Construct a Simple Filter Condition Basically filter conditions specify what data to select from a data source and display in a data bound control A typical simple filter condition consists of three parts the column field name operator and a value s For instance Discount gt 0
180. are Eaa a EE aE an ea A AAE Ea A A AAE EEA rE a 446 Korell oY eE E A a a A E E E E E E E A A eueerens et 449 RIDDON IM ErTAC Oinin a EEEE EO A A a aE e a aAa EEE D i 454 FIE OD CR ALOIS raae a T EENE e Ae ET E E SA 456 Greate a NeW DOCUM EMI Gane aeaa eaa aaa eE e e Eaa vast Ea EE EAA su a A SEE EEE E EE OE EE ced a aE KENE A 456 Load a Docume n vecatcac ci cevdaieiccicce vetoes cena cece aP bien a ene Ea EEE E AAE ga en succes rand O IERE ETSA E N 457 Save a DOCUM ENE ruinaa e a sete wad oa aai E a E LEA E N Ra AE EAEE E E Ea 458 Printa Docume n bisonia a aaa ES a VAV aae ila E AVS 460 Margins and Page Orientation aaaeei iaaa aaa a a aa KE A aE E a aE A uaa E a A H aa E 462 View ING ald Navigating sisir cenon aiia caeen cus csecraneadeidieevanveaeiaeniew coc O NA dee acest eee dads AEN Aaaa UME ENa KAA AOE ia 464 Navigate through a DOCU CIMl vis sediccsiccienets corte ninvesteriaveiweadciesiearene se biarievievedncsenientenecietetideinstivicvewindeaesienertnbianeieeretanies 464 SWITCH DOCUNTONE VIC W Sccecrateittcereemicetecteeuarerctanctcteterctvawthcesaeteewccucctoananetonetpnsemncuu a E a Sae EEA 465 ZOOM A DOCUMEN boaa Gea cerca raae ve ced verse AE aaron cea vanwe cass E AEE EAEE e E EE E a AEEA ENEE AE ENAR 468 TEx CEIM O aaa E TS E A A aE aa E E EN 469 SCIE CU TOT aoin a aE O AE E E Aae A ESE E e E a aa OAE 469 Delete TEK icilia E E e a i E AV 471 Fmd and Replace TEx eaan r eE ra aE EE EE an Ea A EN O EE seus E AAA EAO GAVEN 472 vea Cl DO a
181. argins ation A Orientation ae Find jO Size iB Bookmarks First g a E dany Pages J Close Print aS Last Page Preview Banking Dashboard Banking Acid Tet Ftio l Het Work by Yer pan auan From the Preview window you can view the report print the report export it email it as well as several other functions Refer to Appendix A for more details about the Preview window Page 38 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Report Carousel To open the Report Carousel click on the bottom icon in the Reports Block on the Navigator or use the pull down menu item View Reports Carousel The Report Carousel provides a nice way to browse reports The key here is the entire description can be seen to assist the user in understanding the reports You can click on the form to have the report carousel move or use the scroll bar on the bottom right or the record selectors on the bottom left Balance Sheet Parameters This Year i Description A simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data source UserID system Title1 Balance Sheet Parameters gt Title2 Category Banking To run a report press the Preview button Report Queue The purpose of the Report Queue is to have the Report Manager process the report at a specified time and set the destination for the report You can schedule the report to run periodically set the format and location and email recipient as well
182. aries depending on the element where you invoked the Context Menu E E E a labell 7 Bring To Front Send To Back Of Align To Grid Cut Paste Delete Insert Band Insert Detail Report Zoom b Properties See Also Smart Tag 2011 DevExpress Inc e Report Designer 317 Control Toolbox The Control Toolbox lists all available controls and allows you to add them to your report JS OS 8e0 4e e5es8 0 To add a control from the Toolbox do one of the following e Double click an item in the Toolbox for the appropriate control which will be created at the Detail band s top left corner e Drag and drop an item from the Toolbox onto the required location within a report Py E Detail m L anchTexti j e Select an item in the Toolbox and then click the required location within a report e Select an item in the Toolbox and then indicate the bounding rectangle by holding the left mouse button Select the h Pointer item when you need to perform selection re positioning or resizing operations It is automatically selected after you drop a control onto a report If the Toolbox is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Toolbars Toolbox See Also Design Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 317 Report Designer ais Design Panel The Design Panel is the Report Designer s main area where a report is being constructed and previe
183. asaeeseeesseeeeeesseeseeasaeesonaseeesonesseesenenseesenes 566 Rearrange Bar Commands nituan aar Ea a E a a aaa A a ea a E a aeii 567 Restore the Default Layout of Bar COM mandS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 568 NAVIG atl ON UAA EEn S E E E O ene A E E NE elaine ennai neuen E ET 570 2011 DevExpress Inc Contents Keyboard Navigation in Menus and Toolbars ccceeesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeasseesenesseeseeessessonenseeseneneeesones 570 DE 1G Ctr GC OMMAN S ars et tcc tascos event tenwe seers ceca ccaens ecco asbocauncren E a asenvenucecu sea twadeee 571 Invoke Toolbar and Menu COMM aide ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeeees aa eeeeeeeesaaeeseeseeasaaaeeeeeeeasssaeeesseeaasseeeesseneesenenees 571 TTE CoL S ce ticace aucuco ie uaan wn vnes aenecuen a a i omemee une om eouusnucaawuse ae enacen ee meen ecneen 572 Data EMO aa E aE O EE a EEA 573 Data PIES 6 MUAtlON hcsicscesiceccscasrencncssisne EO A AEEA 575 Show Summaries Totals in a Tree List ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaee nse aaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeasaeaaaaeeeeeseeeseeseaneesesseeeeeeessesseeeaanes 575 DOPE Iree EIS NOG Sasainn a a aE E AEA a O EEEE ENA 576 Layout Customization a E a E A E a a aaa E EREE 577 Expand and Collapse Nodes in a Tree LiSt ccceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee saa eeeeeeea saa eeeeeeeaasseeeeseeeeasseeeeseeeaessee
184. ation s shadow Select Chart Elements If you are working with 2D charts you can highlight and select different chart elements via the mouse Selection Any chart element that can be selected is highlighted when the mouse pointer hovers over it Highlighted Constant Line TARTSA au JU su07 l I l I I Highlighted Series To select a particular chart element simply click it Selected Constant Line SUI JUEJSUO SU Jue ysu07 la i i i a i T s s i T T T Ti T tha i i F F a Ar a a ty ald tf a p 7 3 i r i Me Ti th ss 1 Selected Series Selectable Elements Chart elements which can be highlighted or selected are shown in the following illustration 2011 DevExpress Inc 39 Series point label Constant line Chart title Chart area Diagram ale Cha rt Title Secondary axes 0 0 4 0 6 0 8 E i a Series 1 1 5 1 1 6 a a B Series 2 Legend Constantine 1 0 5 Strip 1 Legend marker 1 4 SUIqIUE sUO7 ee _ m O 6 Tickmarks 0 5 0 4 i Data point marker 0 2 Series Axis labels 0 ii T Custom Label 1 Custom label 2 Axis of arguments Primary axis Axis title Custom labels 2011 DevExpress Inc 40 Zoom a Chart If you are working with 2D XY charts Bar Line Point etc or 3D charts you can zoom in or out of a chart This allows you to see some of the chart s data in greater detail or get a more general picture or your da
185. attan Bar e Point and Line Series Point Bubble Line Scatter Line Swift Plot Step Line Spline 3D Line 3D Step Line and 3D Spline e Pie Series Pie Doughnut 3D Pie and 3D Doughnut e Funnel Series Funnel and 3D Funnel e Area Series Area Stacked Area 100 Stacked Area Spline Area Spline Area Stacked 100 Stacked Spline Area 3D Area 3D Stacked Area 3D 100 Stacked Area 3D Spline Area 3D Spline Stacked Area and 3D 100 Stacked Spline Area e Radar and Polar Series Radar Point Radar Line Radar Area Polar Point Polar Line and Polar Area e Range Bar and Gantt Series Range Bar Side by Side Range Bar Gantt and Side by Side Gantt e Financial Series Stock and Candle Stick 2011 DevExpress Inc 12 Charting 13 Appearance Page Tasks e Choose a palette to color a series e Choose the style specifying the chart s appearance Page Elements Palette editor Style editor Appearance Style Gray Color 3 al Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 Choose a palette to color series or their data points Also choose the style which specifies the chart s appearance depending on the current palette Chart preview area Chart preview area Previews a Chart s layout Palette Editor Specifies a palette to colora series 2011 DevExpress Inc InAfoo BEES Grayscale mie Median OEEO R e Ba Metro m m el Mixed ITI P E ie Modul
186. ay hidden ones The Commands tab allows you to access bar commands and add them to bars The Options tab allows you to control options affecting the display of menus and bar commands 2011 DevExpress Inc set Toolbars and Menus sez Finish Toolbar Customization To finish customization click the Customization window s Close button Customization Toolbars Commands Options 2011 DevExpress Inc s62 Toolbars and Menus ses Hide and Display Toolbars Use the Quick Customization Menu Right click any bar and check or uncheck the required toolbars File Edit Format Toolbars Help z Standard w Format w Font StatusBar o o PaintStyle Customize Use the Customization Window Open the Customization window Under the Toolbars tab check or uncheck the required toolbars Customization Toolbars Commands Options Toolbars MainMenu Standard Format Font statusbar PaintStyle 2011 DevExpress Inc 563 Toolbars and Menus sea Hide and Display Bar Commands Temporarily Hide and Display Bar Commands You can temporarily hide bar commands and then restore hidden commands within a specific bar as follows 1 Click the dropdown button displayed at the right edge of the bar 2 Select Add or Remove Buttons and then select the name of the clicked bar displayed at the top of the submenu A check list of bar commands display
187. ayed Outline Numbered 3 Click the Numbered tab choose one of the existing styles and click Customize The Customize Numbered List dialog will be invoked Customize Numbered List Number format Number position Left Aligned at 0 2 Text positon Indentat 0 57 tNote The Customize button is disabled if the None item of the Bullets and Numbering dialog is selected This item is selected automatically when you invoke the Bullets and Numbering dialog for lines of text rather than for a list 4 In this dialog change different list parameters to create your own list style For instance if you specify list parameters in the following way 486 2011 DevExpress Inc Rich Text Editor Customie Numbered List Number format Number style Number position Ahned at Text position Indentat 0 5 pe OK aj j Cancel ng you will get the list style as illustrated below I Sociability II Cohabitation Ill Fighting IV Play 2011 DevExpress Inc 487 487 Rich Text Editor Bulleted Lists 488 Create a Bulleted List as You Type 1 Point to the position in a document from where you want to begin your list a 2 Click the Bullets button on the Paragraph toolbar Start a bulleted list 3 Type the text 4 Press ENTER to create the next item of the list 5 To finish the list press ENTER twice Make a Bulleted List from the Selected
188. ayed a ais gues Vati ie ke Data Source Mame Data Source Type C Access ODBC C Cleverd Browse For Access File User Name iF req d Password iF req d Table Query View Test Select Field Value The Field value is only here to best the data source Ik is not stored as part of the data source View Data ee ee ee es ee You should first enter a Data Source Name This name needs to be unique among all other data sources Then choose the type of data source Access ODBC CleverQ or PDC Access When creating an Access data source you will need to enter the Microsoft Access file that contains the data The Access File text box will be enabled as well as the Browse for Access File button Click on this button and point to the MDB file containing the data You may need to enter a User Name and or Password to access this file Once the file is selected and optionally user name and or password entered you will need to select a Table or Query from that MDB file to use as the data source There Page 11 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual can be only one table or query per data source so if there are more than one you need you will need to create more than one data source Once the table or query is selected you can test the connection by using the Test Select Field Value dropdown that will give you a list of the fields or columns in that table or query HE Data Source Detail Dat
189. be printed when a data source is defined for the Subreport and it is not empty e Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Specifies how many times the Detail band should be printed when no data source is defined for the Subreport Structure e Bands Allows you to invoke the Report Editor intended to manage and customize the report s bands 2011 DevExpress Inc n Report Designer a3 Report Settings This document details settings that affect the entire report the following image as it looks in the Designer Tab A Report is the main object in the Report Designer as it s the document being edited A typical report is shown in ReportHeader one band per report Products by Categories aroupHeader 1 Category CategoryID Y E Detail ProductName E e Y a aroupt L mmt E AP ka r Unit Price UnitPrice so0g P Units in Stock UnitsinStock Total Units in Stock Sum UnitsIn Stock Appearance e Background Color e Font available in the Property Grid where all the report s properties are divided into the following groups Specify border settings for report elements While the main report s properties can be accessed via the report s Smart Tag the complete settings list is E e Borders Border Color and Border Width Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the background color of report elements This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar
190. bel Label fal 24 Ap pea ramce aE EE Color Border Width Borders E Font Turquoise Background Color HS DarkSlateGray C PaleTurguoise When it is required to reset a value assigned to a control s appearance property you can right click this property in the Property Grid and in the invoked menu click Reset So the control will be restored to the appearance of its parent Oo HI gt a T i _ label Label A Bel 24 Appea ra nce Borders Font Background Color Styles Priority and Inheritance To differentiate appearance settings in your report you can create comprehensive styles which are stored in the report s style sheet and then can be assigned to individual elements There are two ways to store a report s Styles e to save them to external files with REPSS extension and then load them to a report via its Style Sheet Path property this is described at Store and Restore Style Sheets e to store the styles within the report so that they can be easily accessed via its Style Sheet property Note that if styles contained in a style sheet loaded via the Style Sheet Path property have the same names as styles already contained in a report the latter ones are overridden When both styles and individual appearance settings are assigned to an element you can control the priority of their differing options via an element s Style Priority property By default
191. both operands have Quantity 10 the same value otherwise it returns false Returns true if the operands do not Country France have the same value otherwise it returns false yy ii Less than operator Used to UnitPrice lt 20 compare expressions lt Less than or equal to operator UnitPrice lt 20 Used to compare expressions gt Greater than or equal to operator UnitPrice gt 30 Used to compare expressions gt Greater than operator Used to UnitPrice gt 30 compare expressions Tests for the existence ofa Country In USA UK Italy 2011 DevExpress Inc 51 Expression Editor property in an object Cd Like Compares a string against a Name Like An pattern If the value of the string matches the pattern result is true If the string does not match the pattern result is false If both string and pattern are empty strings the result is true Between Specifies a range to test Returns Quantity Between 10 20 true if a value is greater than or equal to the first operand and less than or equal to the second operand And Performs a logical conjunction on InStock And ExtendedPrice gt two expressions 100 Or Performs a logical disjunction on Country USA Or Country two Boolean expressions ZUK Not Performs logical negation on an Not InStock expression Functions Date time Functions AddDays DateTime DaysCount Returns
192. cal structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks a Check Box The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 345 Report Designer 34s Rich Text The Rich Text control allows you to display formatted text in your report It can represent static or dynamic text or both You can load content to the Rich Text from an external TXT or RTF file which can also contain images and then
193. ccessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Text Allows you to define a string to be encoded as a barcode You can define whether to display this value within the control using the Show Text property Note that when the control is selected in the designer you may simply start typing the text and it will be automatically entered into the in place editor E L gt a 0123456789 E E E If the content does not conform to the rules of a certain symbology determined by the Symbology property the control may display a warning as in the picture below or automatically correct the input string by padding it with zeroes or only allowing an acceptable number of characters to be displayed E L a a There are mvahld character mthe text E EE E If the current report has a data source the Text property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Text Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Location Specifies
194. ce Sheet Balance Sheet Indicators Indicators by Category system m Indicators Profitability Analysis Profitability Analysis Indicators Indicators by Category system a Parameter List Parameters system a Standard Scorecard Standard Scorecard system Definition 2 of 12 HH H 4 He PH wt x On this list you can sort filter and group by any of the columns You can edit the definition name and titles The Navigation bar on the bottom of the list allows you to move through the definitions as well as add or delete definitions Other buttons on the bottom of the form provide the ability to refresh the list copy an existing definition edit view the definition or preview the report Select the report definition first before copying editing or previewing the report Report definitions are associated with the user id that created the definition The Report Manager comes with some preloaded definitions with the user id system You cannot edit these but you can copy them and rename them and modify them if you want They are also a good training aid to see samples and how they are designed You will see on this list your report definitions as well as any other users definitions if they choose not to make private When you select to Edit View a report definition you will see the following form Page 23 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual ad Henurt Ueiiuitiun Damji Report Def Mame Banking Das
195. ce of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the controls contained within the bands e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the controls contained within the bands as well as to assign an existing style to them or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the bands This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior 2011 DevExpress Inc 404 Report Designer aos e Keep Together When this option is on the report tries to fit the band contents entirely on one page not allowing it to Split across several pages In general if the contents are too large to fit on a single page then the band is started on a new page and continues on the following page e Page Break Use this property if the current report design requires that the band s section should be separated from previous sections or follow ups Specify the Before the Band or After the Band values to insert a page break before or after the
196. cel 2011 DevExpress Inc 219 Report Designer 220 As you can see it is possible to use both textual and image watermarks simultaneously The report with watermark is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result Tarte au suge Queso Cables Gorgonzola Tino See Also Add Page Numbers and System Information to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 220 Report Designer 221 Create Reports With the help of the Report Designer you can edit existing reports as well as create your own reports from scratch The following sections contain tutorials providing step by step instructions on both basic and advanced report customization e Basic Operations The topics in this section cover the basics of working with reports in the Report Designer e Report Types The tutorials in this section provide you detailed instructions on how to create reports of different types with the Report Designer e Styles and Conditional Formatting in Reports The topics of this section cover appearance related information about the Report Designer e Report Navigation The tutorials of this section cover the navigation related features of the Report Designer e Miscellaneous Report Management Capabilities The topics of this section cover the Report Designer features that don t fall into other categories 2011 DevExpress Inc 221 Report Designer 222 Basic Operations The topics in this secti
197. cellaneous Customize Printing Settings of Charts If allowed by your application vendor you can customize additional print settings of a document For example if you are about to print out a chart you may be able to customize the chart s printing options To do this click the Customize L button on the toolbar The Print Options dialog will be invoked Print Options Choose how a chart should be resized when being printed apes None ep chart is printed with the size identical to that shown the form O Stretch a chartis stretched or shrunk to fit the page on which itis printed ol zoom a chart is resized proportionally without clipping so that it best fits the page on which it is printed e None A chart is printed in the identical size shown on the form e Stretch A chart is stretched or shrunk to fit the page on which it is printed e Zoom A chart is resized proportionally without clipping so that it best fits the page on which it is printed 2011 DevExpress Inc Print Preview 178 Customize Printing Settings of Grids If allowed by your application vendor you can customize additional print settings of a document For example if you are about to print out a grid you may be able to customize grid printing options To do this click the Customize L button on the toolbar The Print Options dialog will be invoked M F Print Options K Preview Print Pr
198. cific Export Options e XLSX Specific Export Options e CSV Specific Export Options e 1XT Specific Export Options e Image Specific Export Options Passing Parameters e Passing Parameters in Print Preview Miscellaneous e Customize Printing Settings of Charts e Customize Printing Settings of Grids e Customize Printing Settings of Pivot Tables e Customize Printing Settings of Tree Views 2011 DevExpress Inc 135 135 Print Preview Warnings and Error Messages e Warnings and Error Messages in Print Preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 136 136 Print Preview 137 File Management Save a Print Preview to a File If you ve modified your document and there s a chance you ll need to print out this document version more than once you can save the document to a file on disk After that you can simply load your document and print it out without having to apply the same changes again To save a document to the file click the Save lm button on the toolbar or press CTRL S On the invoked Save As dialog locate a folder where you want to store your file enter the document s name and click Save LS Save As E Savein Public Documents Ba EF E _ Date modif Type Size Tags YP gq E This folder is empty Desktop Documents a Computer File name Document Save as type Native Format pmu Your document will be saved with the prnx file extension Note that this extension will be added to the file
199. ck over the Parameters section and in the invoked menu click Add Parameter GHO myDataSet SS orders Edit Parameters Remove All Parameters Repeat this action to create the second parameter 2 In the Field List select the first parameter and in the Property Grid set its Name and Description And make sure to set its Type to an appropriate value Then repeat this step for the second parameter Hal myDataset ToDate Parameter EHE orders etna Parameters Description Type Value Visible Type Now every time your report is previewed you will be asked to specify two dates Note In Print Preview if a report s Request Parameters option is set to Yes its document is not generated until you have submitted values of all visible parameters via the Parameters UI The following instructions explain how to use parameters to filter your report s data 3 Click your report s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Filter String entry Then in the invoked Filter String Editor construct an expression where a data field is compared with the created parameters To access parameters click the icon on the right until it turns into a question mark 2011 DevExpress Inc 254 Report Designer 255 The complete filtering expression will then look like this FilterString Editor Visual And Order Date Is greater than or equal to FromDate Order
200. colade 70 Maxilaku 60 Scottish Longbreads 10 Total Packs 12 See Also Show the Current Row Index Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Add Page Numbers for Groups Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records Limit the Number of Records per Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 299 Report Designer 300 Show the Current Row Index This document describes how to accompany every record in a data bound report with its current row index To show the current row index in a report use a Label control bound to a data field and specify its Summary options in the following way E Detail i aRecordNumberi Pro ductName s Format String Ignore Null Values The result is shown in the following image Chai Chang Aniseed Syrup Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix Grandma s Boysenberry Spread Uncle Bob s Organic Dred Pears Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Mishi Kobe Niku Ikura 1 2 3 4 5 6 T ta 9 O Queso Cabrales Mi Queso Manchego La Pastora See Also Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Limit the Number of Records per Page Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records 2011 DevExpress Inc 300 Report Designer E Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group This tutorial describes how to count the number of records in a report or a group To demonstrate this feature we ll use a rep
201. commas For example 1 3 5 12 O xN Input the required text or choose one from the provided options If required define other text properties such as direction color font size transparency etc Add an Image Watermark To add a picture watermark open the Picture Watermark tab 2011 DevExpress Inc 160 Print Preview tet Watermark x Text Watermark Picture Watermark te E TEER OEE RCOPEOOOO OOOO OOOO OO OeOOerereeerererererrrrer rrr rer rerrerererererrerrrrri rier ire Al CD Pages Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Jl eme Load the image and customize its properties such as size mode horizontal and vertical alignment tiling transparency etc Specify the Pages Where you will Display Your Watermark Specify the required pages to apply a watermark in the Page Range section of the dialog Page Range Oat Pages 1357 9 I Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Separate page numbers with commas or specify page ranges using a dash Add a Background Color to a Document To add a background color to a document click the Background Color Yi button on the toolba r or click Color on the Background menu The Background Color dialog will be invoked 2011 DevExpress Inc 161 Print Preview 162 Then choose a color fro
202. company 5 Continue to select the document regions and give users permission to edit them 6 After specifying all required unrestricted parts of a document add protection Remove Protection from a Document You can unprotect a document if you know the password for removing document protection 1 Click the Unprotect Document button on the Protect toolbar L E protect Document Eases Unprotect Document 2 In the invoked Unprotect Document dialog type the password Unprotect Document ee a i imll Password 2011 DevExpress Inc 523 Rich Text Editor s2 Edit a Protected Document When a document is protected it is read only except for specific unrestricted parts You can modify a document part if you have been given permission to make changes to this part Editable document regions can be easily recognized they are highlighted and enclosed in brackets Oot or Qn a o vot on FP a aa aa a BR a we a yf aa A oY Purpose of the Team Operating Agreement TOA This TOA serves as the guidelines and ground rules to help the project team work most productively together over the course of the project The TOA is a living document and may be updated as the need arises throughout the project Any updates will be discussed with and ratified by the project team members Team Communications The project s site will house the most up to date version of project documents All team members will be given access M
203. compare a column with one or two values Custom AutoFilter Show rows where Unit Price is greater than a0 4nd O or is less than 100 Cancel Use Advanced Filter Editor Dialog To invoke an advanced Filter Editor dialog do one of the following e Right click any column s header and select Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc FE Form 10248 Queso C all Sort Ascending 10246 Singapa 10248 Mozzare 10249 Tofu 14 00 Sort Descending Clear Sorting Group By This Column Group By Box EA Column Chooser A Best Fit 7 Clear Filker Filter Editor Best Fit all columns e If the filter panel at the bottom of the grid control is visible click the Edit Filter button Ee Formi 10294 chal 10317 Chai 10348 Chai The Filter Editor is also invoked when choosing the Custom item in a column s filter dropdown list if the current filter criteria applied to the column consists of three or more simple filter conditions or if the filter criteria contain advanced comparison operators such as Is between and Is any of HE Formi Order ID ts Froduct Mame E Licik Teic E e i i Custom 10246 Queso Cabrales Blanks 10248 Singaporean Hokkien Frie Non blanks m 10248 Mozzarella di Giovanni Alice Mutton 4niseed Syrup 10249 Tofu Boston Crab Meat Camembert Pierrot Carnarvon Tigers
204. containing available filter values By default if filtering is applied the filter dropdown will only display the values which match the current filter criteria If the SHIFT key is pressed while opening the filter dropdown all values will be listed not only those that match the current filter criteria 2 Select the required filter value in the filter dropdown list 2011 DevExpress Inc Product iN stom Alice Mutton m gt Blanks R ssle Sauerkraut Hon blanks Ipoh Coffee Slice Mutton 4niseed Syrup Boston Crab Meat Camembert Pierrot Boston Crab Meat Carnarvon Tigers Chai Chang The filter dropdown list will be immediately closed and the control will display the records which contain the specified value in the specified column card field If the filter dropdown list provides check boxes to the left of filter values multiple values can be selected checked simultaneously New Fixed Postponed Postponed Fixed iw Fixed Rejected OK II Cancel In this mode click OK to close the filter dropdown list and apply the filter You can sequentially filter data against multiple columns using the method described above Use Microsoft Excel Style Custom Filter Dialog To construct filter criteria involving up to two conditions do the following e Invoke the filter dropdown list see above and click Custom This will invoke the Custom Filter Dialog allowing you to
205. ct from the predefined paper sizes Paper Kind property choose Custom and create your own paper size or select one which is already defined for this printer Paper Name property These settings affect the layout of the report s design surface After their modification you may notice red warning marks indicating that the controls go beyond the page width These warnings can be switched off by setting the Show Printing Warnings property of the report to No Printing warning The following controls are To the right page margin and this will cause extra pages to be printed label labeli e Modify the settings in Preview Tab The report s Preview Tab toolbar has a corresponding button that enables you to modify the page settings Clicking this button invokes the Page Setup dialog which allows you to adjust the page layout before printing or exporting and select the printer 2011 DevExpress Inc 234 Report Designer 235 Page Setup Page Setup Paper Portrait Landscape Top 1 Bottom 1 The margins can also be set visually by dragging the dashed lines in the Preview Tab as needed To change the measurement units shown in the margins tooltips customize the report s Measure Units property Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch Top Margin 0 35 Chang Aniseed Syrup Queso Cabrales Si Rodney s Scones Gorgonzola Telno Mascarpone Fabiol Measure Units Tenths of a Millimet
206. current band In many cases this property may be used instead of the Page Break control e Print at Bottom This property is available for the Report Footer band only and determines whether this band should be printed at the bottom of the last page or immediately after the last report s details The Report Footer has priority over the Group Footer s Print at Bottom property so the Group Footer can never be placed after the Report Footer e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the band should be visible in print preview Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Height Specifies the band s height in report units e Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in report measurement units which is to be preserved within the band when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines 2011 DevExpress Inc 405 Report Designer 406 Page Header and Footer The Page Header and Page Footer bands are located at the top and bottom of every page in a report f PageHeader one band per page ID Name Unit Price T el Detail ProductID
207. d Display Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields Hide Columns Bands in Grid Views Do one of the following e Click a column header band header and drag it onto the grid control s cell area until the cursor changes its image to a big X Then drop the header Drag a column header here bo group by khak column Supplier i ca Unit Price Mayumi Ohno 2525 Mayumt ENIS p 15 50 Tan Devling E 17 45 Ian Devling Supplier 39 00 Ian Devling i 62 50 Peter Wilson Supplier x 49 20 Peter Wilson _ 51 00 e Drag and drop a column band header onto the Customization Form if it s open ey Drag a column header here bo group by that column Supplier m Unit Price Antonio de zal Saavedra 21 00 Supplier z Antonio det alle Saaverita Pa Mayumi Ohno Supplier k meme Mayumi Ohno T i Product Mame Mayumi Ohno Supplier Tan Devling Supplier Tan Devling Tan Devling Peter Wilson Peter Wilson 1 pool Display Hidden Columns Bands in Grid Views 1 Open the Customization Form by right clicking a column header and selecting Column Chooser 2011 DevExpress Inc as Drag a column header here to group by thak column Inik Price Supplier Antonio del valle Saave Sz Sort Ascending 21 00 Antonio del valle Saave 1 Sort Descending 35 00 Mayumi Ohno Clear Sorting 6 00 Mayumi Ohno Ss Group By This Column 23 25 Mayumi Ohno ET 15 50 E Column Chooser Best Fit C
208. d to C Documents and 5 Report saved to C Documents and 5 Report saved to C Documents and 5 Report saved to C Documents and 5 Report saved to C Documents and 5 Report saved to C Documents and 5 Record 1 of 7 ad aa Refresh Reset Form Purge Queue Calendar view Edit View Details You can do a variety of things on this list including sorting and filtering Drag a column to the top header and you can group by that column Rearrange columns and more To go back to the standard layout press the Reset Form button You can edit the details of any queue entry by selecting the entry and then pressing the Edit View Details button After making changes and returning to this form press the Refresh button You can delete a single entry by selecting the entry and pressing the button on the navigation toolbar on the bottom of the form If you want to permanently remove all Queue entries press the Purge Queue button You can go to the Calendar View by pressing the Calendar View button This will be covered in the next section Page 41 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual When you go to edit or view a Queue entry you will see the form in the following figure tials Pnn Erit Report Definition Name Income Dashboard Date and Time to Run Reportts BAe v Dee Oe Ea Eor et ea the calendar view Priority 1 H _ Date Time Stamp included in filename _
209. d up to fill the gap Note that if a control overlaps the shrinking Label by even one pixel it will not be pushed up by the shrinking Label e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of a Label can be horizontally split across pages In other words if a Label occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Label should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Label s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Label will be split irrespective of this property s value e Multiline When this property is set to Yes a Label processes newline characters found in the text to start a new line For example when editing a Label s text you can insert a new line by pressing ENTER and in this case the Multiline property will be automatically set to Yes e Process Duplicates Determines the control s behavior when its data source contains consecutive repeating records They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave Suppressed except for the first entry Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the repeated records Suppress and Shrink e Process Null Values Determines whether to process Null blank values if they appear in the control s data source They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave su
210. data 6 And specify the Value Data Members property indicating the data field s from which the points values are obtained 2011 DevExpress Inc 264 Report Designer 265 chartl Chart J E Series Template SeriesBase Argument Data Member Region Argument Scale Type Qualitative Data Filters Collection Label SideBySideBarSeriesLabel Legend Point Options PointOptions J Legend Text Point Options FointOptions series Points Sorting None series Points Sorting Key Argument Show in a Legend Yes Summary Function Top N Options TopNOptions Value Data Members Collection ce l kaien AA OEE i a Value Scale Type E F myDataSet GE 69 E Value tates f oe f ID n E Year i None As with the argument make sure to appropriately specify the Value Scale Type 7 At this point the chart s data options are completely defined so in this step some additional customization capabilities are described Adjust the Series Name Template By default the name for every auto created series is obtained directly from an appropriate data field in the bound data source However you can add some text to the beginning or to the end of every series name via the Series Name Template property For instance here we set the Begin Text property to GSP in Customize Series Labels To hide labels for all series points and prevent a chart from being crowded with numerous overlapping labels set
211. do the following 1 In the Main Menu select File and click New with Wizard or press CTRL W 2 Next the Wizard will guide you through the process of creating a label report For detailed instructions on the wizard s steps refer to Label Report Wizard 3 Bind the report to a data source containing information about employees 4 Finally drop the required fields from the Field List onto the available Detail band s area and customize their layout Detail FirstName LastName U Title J Space for repeating column Lr a ee Note that you can employ the mail merge to combine multiple data fields within the same control The label report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 243 Report Designer 2m Nancy Davolio Andrew Fuller Janet Leverling Sales Representative Vice President Sales Sales Reoresentative Margaret Peacock Steven Buchanan Michael Suyama Sales Reoresentative Sales Manager sales Representative Robert King Laura Callahan Anne Dodsworth Sales Representative Inside Sales Coordinator Sales Representative See Also Static Report Table Report Multi Column Report 2011 DevExpress Inc za Report Designer 245 Master Detail Report Detail Report Bands This tutorial describes the steps to create a master detail report or invoice report with hierarchically linked data using the Detail Report band To create a master detail report
212. drew Fuller Total 257 J27 1226 p To select a continuous range of cells do one of the following e Use ARROW PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys while holding the SHIFT key down e Press the mouse button over the starting cell and drag the mouse cursor towards the ending cell Then release the mouse button Quantity Year 4 Quarter Sales Person ak Category Mame E Andrew Fuller a Grains Cereals 420 2011 DevExpress Inc 32 Pivot Table 133 e Click the starting cell Then click the ending cell while holding the SHIFT key down To select a continuous range of columns or rows do one of the following e Press the mouse button over the starting column row header and drag the mouse cursor towards to the ending column or row header Then release the mouse button Quantity E Year H Quarter 4t 1994 Total amp 1995 1103 2053 e Click the starting column or row header Then click the ending column row header while holding the SHIFT key down To select all the cells press CTRL A Select Cells While Preserving the Current Selection Hold the CTRL key down while selecting cells Copy Selected Cells to the Clipboard Press CTRL C or SHIFT INS 2011 DevExpress Inc 33 Print Preview 134 Print Preview This section describes the capabilities provided by the Print Preview form f Preview File View Becton baa eeaneeaae L im 1m EE im im
213. ds For This Year Dashboards All Dashboards For This Year Balance Sheet Parameters This Year Banking 4 simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data source Balance Sheet Parameters Balance Sheet Parameters This Year Parameters 4 simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data source Balance Sheet Parameters Banking Dashboard Banking Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard Dashboards Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboards Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboard Definition Dashboards Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Gauges Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Indicators Dashboard Definition Gauges Gauges Gauges Income Scorecard Income Income Scorecard Income Scorecard Scorecard Income Scorecard Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Indicators Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Indicators Balance Sheet Indicators Balance Sheet Indicators Indicators Profitability Analysis Indicators Profitability Analysis Indicators Parameter List Parameters 4 44 4 Record 1 of 20 gt p pri 36 To run a report select a report by clicking on a row and press the Preview button The preview window will appear and it may take a minute or two for the report to be processed Be patient Page 37 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual LD Bysyjayy Ge Kex Euh HJ Scale i i M
214. dwedenaantcs couse gvesseceedasuskvanenmetdcussedelestocas veeutcosesduanatnaucasssudsenes 164 PDF S06 GITIC EXOOIl ODTIONS cigs cee decease cee A E A EE E E A E 166 HTML Specific Export OD TIONS ivesccstcsccc toe cesceccee eee cece latscenccecducticinnec caves vex ccesscssdsianedncsadessactennteudenycucecedeusencenctdenVeuseeuusstasuecdons 168 MPT SDECING BHO ORION S a e a Aaa vex A a A E a a Ea aaa Ea E EA Aa aa Aaa Ea AAE AENA AARAA AA ENEE 169 RTF Specific Export Options cess fececosecsc dt ecascccsssssnectecuscuass aaa ai naaa natentcaaaveen covocucssasteeedenpdhvancneacacuass des ue ai anaa ainahan painaa araa 170 XLS Specific Export OptionS ssssssssnersrnnnunnernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunennnnnnunnennnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnn mnene 171 XLSX Specific Export OptiOnS sssassssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnn nnnm nnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn ennn nmen 172 CSV Specific EMoOrt ODON S r a e a aa a EE sees Aaa a E E aa a AE aaa aa SEAE EA a EA Ea 173 TXT Specific Export Op tlO INS ccs tc cadeeedececcscvecaccnateseceudacdanus a Aaa aah Aaaa aaa aia Ean aeaa a a aa iai aaa ai Aana ehna A an Aa Naaraan aaisa 174 image Spe cific EXpoOrt Options icii aaao aaa a EEan AAE AAA E vavehssnveeebendcastuenecctcaaunietactanretedueseecaupiasceceomaxis 175 PASSING Parameter S oroia a A a 176 Miscellaneous saia a a 177 Customize Printing Settings Of ChartsS ssssssnnu
215. e Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind the control s Tag property e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it 2011 DevExpress Inc 365 Report Designer 366 Shape The Shape control allows you to embed simple graphic objects into your report You can choose one of multiple predefined shapes e g rectangles ellipses arrows polygons crosses and brackets of various kinds In the Property Grid the Shape s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Fill Color Specifies the color to fill the con
216. e corm Annotations list Image Annotation 1 Germany Add Remove ire tm J E Name Image Annotation 1 4 Z order Ja a o TW f JT D Layout Width Ea Height 48 E g Angle Ob 3 z oO J gt g Create and customize annotations anchored to a chart pane or series point Note that you may select an annotation by clicking it in the chart preview Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout 2011 DevExpress Inc asueJeaddy Japiog MOPELS Options tabs Charting Annotation selector Specifies an annotation to be created and or customized Note that you can select an annotation directly on the chart preview area Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page 2011 DevExpress Inc General Specify an annotation s name adjust its visibility z order and layout Anchor Point Choose an element to anchor to chart pane or series point and adjust the corresponding options Shape Position Choose an annotation s shape position type free or relative and adjust the corresponding options Content Depending on an annotation s type text or image specify its content Padding Specify an annotation s inner indents Appearance Adjust an annotation s background color fill style shape and connector options Border Specify visibility color and thickness of an annotation s borders Shadow Specifies visibility color and size of an annot
217. e LOE SOe hat Nature Colors TT man Style Editor Specifies the style determining the chart s appearance depending on the selected palette In A Fog All Colors 2011 DevExpress Inc 14 Charting 15 Series Page Tasks e Create or remove a series of points e Define the series name visibility and view type e Customize additional series options point and legend point options e Enable and customize the Top N Values feature Page Elements Series list Main series properties A visible nel Series name series 2 s series view type ill Area Argument scale type Qualitative Value scale type Numerical SUOdS sanas Point sort order None Sort paints by Show in a legend Legend text suoqdeS py doy SO Jud La E Em m EL ET o TT D pF a i wi Add Copy Remove Create required series of points to be displayed inthe chart and customize their primary properties Series management buttons Options tabs Series list This list displays all available series You can click list entries to access properties of the corresponding series To switch between series use the O and LJ buttons Series management buttons Use the Add Copy and Remove buttons to manage the series collection 2011 DevExpress Inc Main series properties Choose
218. e Report Queue List or the Report Calendar NOTE When a report definition contains parameters that require the use choose a value when the report is added to the Queue the report definition is copied and assigned a user name temp When the report definition is no longer needed the report definition is deleted unless the report is in the Queue as a recurring report Report Queue List By Pressing the top icon on the Report Queue box on the Navigator or using the pull down menu item View Report Queue List you can see a list of items in the Queue as shown in the next figure So Report onenei Drag a column header here to group by that column 7 10 2010 7 11 2010 7 11 2010 7 11 2010 7 11 2010 7 11 2010 _ 7 12010 1 Income Dashboard 1 Banking Dashboard 1 Income Dashboard 1 Banking Dashboard 1 Income Dashboard 1 Banking Dashboard 1 Banking Dashboard PDF HTML PDF HTML HTML PDF C Documents and 5 C Documents and 5 C Documents and 5 C Documents and 5 C Documents and 5 C Documents and 5 7 11 2010 5 42 AM 7 11 2010 5 43 AM 7 11 2010 6 06 AM 7 11 2010 6 58 AM 7 11 2010 6 58 AM 7 11 2010 7 16 AM 7 10 2010 6 45 7 11 2010 5 49 7 11 2010 5 49 7 11 2010 6 12 7 11 2010 7 04 7 11 2010 7 04 Date to CIMC Destination Folder ACTE Date Time Added Date Time Pr Added By Status Message C Documents and 5 Report save
219. e a calculated field in the Field List right click any item inside the created dataset and on the invoked menu choose Add Calculated Field GHA myDataset ora Discontinued fab EANL3 Edit Calculated Fields fas ProductID Sen Productame fer QuantityPerUnit Br ReorderLevel SupplierID fia UnitPrice fa UnitsInStock F UnitsOnOrder arameters Remove All Calculated Fields 3 Select the calculated field and in the Property Grid set its Field Type to String Then click the ellipsis button for its Expression property And in the invoked Expression Editor define the required logical condition for the calculated field e g Iif UnitsOnOrder O None UnitsOnOrder which means that if the UnitsOnOrder data field s value is equal to O the control s text will be replaced with None 2011 DevExpress Inc 285 Report Designer 286 lif Expression TruePart FalsePart Returns either TruePart or To save the changes and close the dialog click OK 4 Finally drop the required data fields and the created calculated field as well from the Field List onto the report s Detail band v E Detail z ProductName 9 calculatedFieldt 9 The report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 286 Report Designer See Also Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Chai Chang Aniseed syrup Chef Anton
220. e current occurrence of the word e Ignore all occurrences of the word e Add the word to the dictionary in the Spell Checker To perform spell check word by word select the Check Spelling item from the context menu or click the Spelling button on the Check Spelling toolbar ma Speling F7 3 Check the spelling of text in the document or press F7 2011 DevExpress Inc 476 Rich Text Editor 477 The Spelling dialog will be invoked Not in Dictionary cdonceded Change to Suggestions torore a pareve aly lbp Change jpChange Al In this dialog select what to do with the misspelled word click corresponding button and you will jump to the next misspelled word 2011 DevExpress Inc 477 Rich Text Editor 478 Undo and Redo Last Operations The Rich Editor allows you to undo and redo the last operation using special buttons Undo and Redo in the Common toolbar The Undo command reverses the most recent action you have performed To undo an action click the Undo button on the Common toolbar or press CTRL Z or press ALT BACKSPACE a erect Sub SI cnn TF E a Undo Ctrl 7Z Undo You can execute multiple Undo operations To return the document to its previous state just keep performing Undo The Redo command enables you to take back the last action you ve undone To redo an action click the Redo button or press CTRL Y or press ALT SHIFT BACKSPACE i eet AS ak
221. e following dialog Text Export Options Encoding Cyrillic Windows Text export mode Text Text separator TAB _ Quote strings with separators e Encoding Define the encoding used in the exported document e Text export mode Choose whether to use the formatting of the data fields in the bound dataset for the cells in the exported document Note that if this property is set to Text all data fields are exported to the Text file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into those strings e Text separator Define a text separator TAB by default e You can also specify whether to quote strings with separators 2011 DevExpress Inc 174 Print Preview 175 Image Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define image specific exporting options using the following dialog Image Export Options Image format Resolution dpi 96 Export mode Single file Page range Loo f Page border color HBB Black Page border width 1 e Image format Choose one from the available image formats to export a document BMP EMF W MF GIF JPEG PNG or TIFF e Resolution dpi Define the required image resolution e Export mode Choose one from the available modes to export a document e The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing the output into pages e The Single file page by page mode allows export of a document to a single file divided into
222. e node and press MULTIPLY on the keyboard 2011 DevExpress Inc 577 Tree List 578 Hide and Display Tree List Columns Hide Columns Do one of the following e Click a column header and drag it outside the header panel until the cursor changes its image to the big X Then drop the header Department Budget Location Corporate Headquarters 1 000 000 Monterey ni Sales and Marketing JO San Francisco Finance miei Monterey g Engineering ro0 000 Monterey Department Budget t E Corporate Headquarters en m E Sales and Marketing 22 004 Sar E Engineering 41 100 000 Mo Display Hidden Columns 1 Open the Customization Form by right clicking a column header and selecting Column Chooser Department Bidaa Location Corporate Hea Sort Ascending Sort Descending at A Column Chooser Engineering a Best Fit Ti Best Fit all columns The Customization Form will be displayed listing hidden columns if any Department Location m E Corporate Headquarters Monterey m pi Sales and Marketing San Francisco oi Finance Customization m E Engineering LasbOrder 2011 DevExpress Inc 578 Tree List 579 2 Drag the required column from the Customization Form onto the column header panel and drop it at the required position m E Sales and Marke Budget E m Engineering 2011 DevExpress Inc 579 Reorder Tr
223. e time is marked as Busy If an all day area is selected then an all day appointment is created with the time marked as Free When the scheduler display mode is Week View the appointment is created with the start time set to 12 AM of the first selected day and the end time is set to 12 AM of the day following the last selected day Double click Double clicking within a scheduler view s time cell that 2011 DevExpress Inc 537 Scheduler s38 doesn t contain any appointments invokes the Edit Appointment dialog described above CTRL N This keyboard shortcut invokes the Edit Appointment dialog Then this dialog can be used to create a new appointment Dragging an appointment while holding CTRL This action creates a copy of the selected appointment and moves it leaving the original appointment intact 2011 DevExpress Inc s38 Scheduler s39 Edit an Appointment Using Context Menu After an appointment has been clicked with the right mouse button the following context menu is invoked Open Edit Series Show Time 4s Label As gt Delete The Show Time As and Label As items are used to alter the appointment They allow changing the basic visual characteristics Label and Status Open Show Time 45 Mone gt Delete Important Business Personal Vacation Must Attend Travel Required Weeds Preparation Birthday Anniversary Phone Call Free Label As Tentative 2 Dele
224. e types no changes are ever made to the data source of the report design This list can be sorted and filtered if you want You can use the navigation bar on the bottom to scroll through the records as well as delete a design by pressing the button Page 16 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Other buttons on the bottom of the form allow you to refresh the list create a new report definition preview the report design using default parameters copy a design and edit view the selected report design To select a report design just click on the row You can also edit the design name and whether a report design is private directly on this form If you want to hide a system report just make it private You can also rename System reports NOTE The system report Standard Scorecard has a special name that CleverQ uses when a scorecard is requested from a dashboard Renaming this design and it s associated report definition will cause that functionality to stop working resulting in an error Creating a New Report Design To create a new report design use the New button from the Report Design List or the pull down menu item File New Report Design You will be prompted to select a data source for the report Enter the number for the source of data for this report 1 Predefined Data Sources 2 Report Wizard Create source using wizard 3 Blank Create source from design intertace Choose 1 for
225. e web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 352 Report Designer 353 Panel The Panel control is a container that frames separate report controls to allow them to be easily moved copied and pasted and visually unite them in the report s preview with borders ora uniform color background Currently there are several limitations on Panel usage One of them is that Panel cannot shrink and therefore cannot suppress the white space that appears when the controls inside are shrunk or collapsed Also the Panel cannot cross bands as Cross band Line and Cross band Box can do In the Property Grid the Panel s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border setting
226. e2 Filter Editor 63 6 Save changes Click OK or Apply to filter data using the created filter condition The grid will show the filter panel displaying the current filter criteria 10250 Louisiana Fiery Hot Pe 15 10251 Guskaf s En ckebr d 5 Eg Le Discount gt 5 Edit Filter x The filter panel will contain the Edit Filter button which also allows you to invoke the Filter Editor How to Construct Filter Criteria with Multiple Conditions Joined by One Logical Operator Filter criteria typically consist of two or more simple filter conditions combined by logical operators AND OR NOT AND NOT OR The following example shows how to construct filter criteria in the Filter Editor that consist of multiple conditions combined by one logical operator The ProductName Tofu AND Discount gt 0 1 AND Quantity gt 99 filter expression contains three simple filter conditions combined by the AND operator To construct it do the following 1 Invoke the Filter Editor When the Filter Editor is invoked for a grid control the Filter Editor may display an unfinished new filter condition Filter Builder is Product Name Begins with enter a value gt OK Cancel Apply 2 Set the condition s operator to Equals and operand value to Tofu as described in the previous aA 3 To add one more condition press the button next to the group s AND operator
227. eases the font size of the selection to the closest larger predefined value CTRL SHIFT COMMA Decreases the font size of the selection to the closest Smaller predefined value CTRL SHIFT D Toggles the double underline style on the selection CTRL SHIFT PLUS Toggles the superscript style on the selection CTRL SHIFT H Toggles between the normal and hidden text mode for the selection To view the hidden text press CTRL SHIFT 8 CTRL SPACE Clears formatting of selected text resets it to default See Also Apply Styles 2011 DevExpress Inc 480 Rich Text Editor ast Format Paragraphs To format a paragraph first click anywhere within it or select the paragraph and then use the Paragraph toolbar to change line spacing indentation alignment and styles Also you can use the Paragraph dialog to format the paragraph To invoke this dialog right click the paragraph and select the Paragraph item from the context menu 1 4 At last he could go Paste Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font 2 Numbering List E Bookmark Hyperlink The Paragraph dialog appears as illustrated below Paragraph Indents and Spacing General Alignment Justified Indentation In this dialog you can change different parameters for the paragraph The Rich Editor provides a list of the default keyboard shortcuts to format paragraphs 2011 DevExpress Inc ast Rich Text Editor asz CTRL 1 Formats a cur
228. eassaaeseseeeeessaeeeseeeaasseesessanes 208 Adad Totals 10 AIRE DONG cicsie aces seater esa oee r ocisag tect snags eewenai een EEE E A A A aa a AE E Ai 211 Add Page Numbers and System Information to a RE Port eececcceesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeaessneeesseenensneeees 214 Create or Modify Watermarks Of a REPoOrt cccccecsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeesaaaeeeeseeassaaeseseeeesssaeseseeeasssaeeesseeaansneeessanes 218 CS eS OES recat ace recaree aeetee aE a eect voneceesmemnce sauasuaeauendecumusaruencanenaca EE 221 Basie CS Atl NS acces we a se en ct sus Sa eceee stan Denacctecnse une eainncnneuartcee EE E E 222 create a NEW RO caress occa ag eects a a a aea e OEE 223 Bind a Report CO Dalasi E r E 224 CONOIS POSIONINO icn e a a aaa a a Oaa AEA AAEE 229 Change Measurement Units for a RepoOrt ssssssnssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennum nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 232 Change Page Settings for a Repofrt ssssssssnnnnssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnmnnn nnmnnn 233 PRO PONG VOCS Era A E 237 IE PEDON aaraa a E E A a eena ses wcevuncmneusasssuarause 238 WANG REDOT mn a s eaae E E E A 240 LIDERE DON a E a rset acuessuseedeeaeusetenteantecesstereeseane 243 Master Detail Report Detail Report Bands ccccccssessseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeesnseeeeseeeeesaaeeeseeeeenseeesseeaesaeeessoeaesseeeesseonanaes 245 MiUilt
229. eatures P E Today 14 items p Currency Mask The current currency mask in com Paul Bailey 1 23 2009 5 31 PM m ed W Data Import What database types will we support Jimmy Lewis 1 23 2009 5 31 PM Y m 3 W Drag amp Drop operations are not available in the scheduler Jimmy Lewis Lf23 2009 5 30 PM Y Fa UW Email Attachments Is it possible to add multiple attachme Ray Shipman 1 23 2009 12 54 PM Data Editing e Edit Grid Cells e Add and Delete Grid Records Data Presentation e Sort Grid Rows e Group Grid Rows e Filter Grid Data e Show Summaries Totals in Grids Layout Customization e Expand and Collapse Rows and Cards in Grids e Hide and Display Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields e Rearrange Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields e Resize Cards in Grids e Resize Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields Selection and Navigation e Locate Grid Records e Navigate Through Grid Records e Select Grid Rows and Cards 2011 DevExpress Inc e Data Editing Add and Delete Grid Records Add Records Click the Append button within the Navigator control I Recodsorziss AAEE Append Delete Records Click the Delete button within the Navigator control Delete 2011 DevExpress Inc e Grid Edit Grid Cells Activate Cell Editor Do one of the following e Click a cell e Focus a cell for instance via the keyboard and press ENTER or F2 Focus a cell and press any alpha numeric key The edito
230. ecencunstecuvalacdaesasutseoubssnenncnasuceuceuasudedystevece se A E Ea E aaa EEE ASARO 289 Create FAV OC UI Sa E E ar EE A E ines 291 Add CO SS Re S NG Cerca ce sae sree eects cas teceec etre cecc en ceucatecucs cca aaea aaa Eina aaan aaaea aE raaa EAA aa Ai aana anadan taaeeenceecumsenrueccess 292 Mis celine OMS 2h a0 slurcacccsevasccsancceceusencwnc state E E gunustuceavedeatuaantensemmmneeece 294 Handle Events via SCMIOUS cc 2acs ca tteeds ectscccaeccacccanecactusedasantscccwesScavetcamevceucaxuencucbendvansunevecaasia ta cusadasdesaudeaeGeusvetneteunctaendeeecacraess 295 Show th Current ROW INC CX ciane aaa E a e EA Ea eN Ai aA AAE ivastaeneccueaaynewsacsunaetedneseesaupiastoceemnevins 300 Count the Number of Records in a Report or a GroOUp ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 301 Add Page Numbers for GroUpS sssssssssnssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn nnnnnn nnn nnnnn Gen snasceeceecuusveusentese 304 Sort Groups by a Summary Function Res ult asanussnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennu nnmnnn nnmnnn 306 Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any ReCOMrdS cccccceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeessaeeeseeeeaseeeeeeseeeeneneeees 308 Limit the Number of Records per Page snnnssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnmnnn nnmnnn 309 Repor
231. eceseternecens 404 PAGO Feader and FOOIE ooo A R a a A E EEE 406 Page Margin Band Sassin neras aeea a a OE AE a A EE A AOE AE Aaaa 408 Detail Report Band for Master Detail Reports ccccescceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeessaeeesseeeassaeeesseeaaseneeessoeannaas 410 PRE OC SG GUNN S coran es ee cecunecaaenreceenosuansecc usec fate es caccucaavusecsetenuarscccosessicesaneccusssesancrmacseasuencbee a acusanctecsaceveanencusecaswesena 413 PRO OV IZ IT Oh rca cea re ceca a Sui tagetet taxauter cus sve menage neh cauatine saad tues ced a vouaaranatenangetee autntecelaeieentuage ensaummneusde 418 Standar d RE DOR WIZ Al OC a ara a a a aE ra a a a ea a aa aaa a A ra a aaa aa Aae a Aa aa a EENE AoE EHETE 419 Step 1 Enter a Dataset Name scrinia rn araa a AA Ea aa BA aAA ten tvantaensccusaaynawsactunaededneseesauptasteceemnexines 421 Step 2 Choose a Data Connection sssssnsnsssnrnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnn nennen nnmnnn nnana nennen 422 Step 3 Choose the Table or VieW sssssssssssnnnnnnsnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nanen nnana 423 Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your RepOfrt sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 424 Step 5 Add Grouping CVSS eee caesar salt esc ss asec s ee aentedewteusencteep eosunaievenbontdvesnsanecctdaacnacdeaseaneatanesecsannedseasec
232. ect specifies the full paths including the file names to the assemblies that are referenced in the scripts used in a report These paths should be specified for all the assemblies that are included in scripts via the using C Imports Visual Basic or import J directives 2011 DevExpress Inc 296 Report Designer 297 iNote Usually you don t need include any assembles because most standard assemblies that you may require in scripts are already referenced by the Report Designer Example Custom Summary In this example we will display the total number of product unit packs in a group To perform this execute steps similar to the ones described in Add Totals to a Report except that for the Summary field you should set the Function property to Custom GroupHeader1 Category Catego rylD a Detail ProductName D UnitsOnOrderP gt GrgupFooterl gt Function Custom UnitsOnOrder Sfp Format tn r 5 s Ignore Null Values No Functi Then the additional events are added to the label s Scripts property Summary Calculated Summary Get Result summary Reset Summary Row Changed Declare a summary and a pack double totalUnits 0 double pack 15 private void OnSummaryReset object sender System EventArgs e Reset the result each time a group is printed totalUnits 0 private void OnSummaryRowChanged object sender System Even
233. ed For more information about this refer to Change Value Formatting of Report Elements e Page Information You can select the type of information displayed in the control 2011 DevExpress Inc 385 Report Designer a Page Number The string specified by the Format property is Current of Total Page Numbers displayed The 0 combination in the string is replaced with the current page number The string specified by the Format property is displayed The 0 combination in the string is replaced with the current page number the 1 combination with a total number of pages in the report To display the typical Page 1 of 11 text use the format string Page 0 of 1 Page Number Roman Lowercase The current page number is displayed using Roman numerals in lowercase Page Number Roman Uppercase The current page number is displayed using Roman numerals in uppercase Current Date and Time The string specified by the Format property is displayed The O format combination is replaced with the current system date and time formatted according to the format string Use the Format String Editor of the Format property see below to Data select or construct the proper string The name of the current user which was used to log into the operating system is displayed e Running Band Specifies the name of the band from which the Page Info gathers information This allows you to implement pa
234. ed Char up to a specified total length PadRight String Length Right aligns characters in the PadRight Name 30 2011 DevExpress Inc 55 Expression Editor se defined string padding its left side with white space characters up to a specified total length PadRight String Length Char Right aligns characters in the PadRight Name 30 gt defined string padding its left side with the specified Char up to a Specified total length Remove String StartPosition Deletes a specified number of Remove Name 0 3 Length characters from this instance beginning at a specified position Replace String SubString2 Returns a copy of String1 in which Replace Name The String3 SubString2 has been replaced with String3 Reverse String Reverses the order of elements Reverse Name within String Substring String StartPosition Retrieves a substring from String Substring Description 2 3 Length The substring starts at StartPosition and has the specified Length Substring String StartPosition Retrieves a substring from String Substring Description 2 The substring starts at StartPosition ToStr Value Returns a string representation of ToStr ID an object Trim String Removes all leading and trailing Trim ProductName SPACE characters from String Upper String Returns String in uppercase Upper ProductName Constants String constants String constants
235. ed within the bar will be displayed H Bold Ctrl B Customize vw Italic Ctrl I s O Underline Ctrl U wf Align Left Ctrl L Center Ctrl E w Align Bight Ctrl F w Bullets Reset Toolbar 3 To hide specific commands uncheck corresponding items via mouse click To display hidden commands check the corresponding items If a specific command is not available in a bar s command list you can still access this command in customization mode and add this command to the bar See below to learn more Hide and Display Bar Commands in Customization Mode First open the Customization window To add a specific bar command to a bar do the following 1 Switch to the Commands tab page and locate the required command in the Commands list Typically commands are grouped into categories so you can first select a category to quickly locate the command 2011 DevExpress Inc s64 Toolbars and Menus ses Customization Categories Commands Protected Help Ctrl I Popup Status Ctrl U Built in Menus Ctrl L Toolbars Description Makes selected text and numbers bold IF the selection is already bold clicking button removes bold Formatting 2 Drag the bar command from the Commands list onto a bar or menu Note that you can put bar commands into nested menus Menus will automatically open when you drag a bar command over thei
236. ee List Columns To reorder columns drag and drop a column header to a new position Budget Department Buda i Location g a E Corporate Headquarters 1 060 000 Monterey pi Sales and Marketing t22 000 San Francisco Finance 40 000 Monterey 1 100 000 Monterey 2011 DevExpress Inc sso Resize Tree List Columns To resize columns drag the right edge of the target column header i Location m Corporate Headquarters 1 000 000 Monterey m ni Sales and Marketing 27 000 San Francisco 40 000 Monterey Engineering 1 100 000 Monterey To change a column s width so that it displays its contents compactly in their entirety do one of the following e Double click the right edge of the column header e Right click the column s header and select Best Fit Location E daak Sort Ascending Department Corporate Hea Sort Descending Be ee ha H Coluran Chooser a hey Best Fit Best Fit all columns To change the widths of all columns so that they display their contents in the best possible way right click the header of any column and select Best Fit all columns 2011 DevExpress Inc set Selection and Navigation Navigation in a Tree List Clicking a data cell Moves focus to the clicked cell ARROW keys Moves focus to the next cell in the corresponding direction HOME Moves focus to the first last cell within the focused END node
237. eeceeta athevenceten ueesmmecetubanenteecaeh atta asnceoectuatnsceteumartsads 366 BoA OS scent actctca es causaciccca E a 369 PUG OC iis cece acess te ivateeseceens euicne seecvaed om ea T ec cannceeasssuecaunteccosanswncyive 375 CHIE cece canteens ese scate neces E cuctasaareucsuouseanenk ster ycueecs a 377 2011 DevExpress Inc Contents PIVOT Or IOa a cease setae een See E a a Gokmeneeyod Guie 382 Pad CANTO oar tecec cece sexe tocasee uesaseecncceesavecduspesnesseeteucses tavucinacecus ven codtsseateunnecsseshear cat eoeessueceagaeeae eneeneuceauueresenecuedces 385 Page TEC Ai eee soi ccet see co sec nehecteaseus sateen sua cevweanrantcasuaees otasarine sux ean eausugu ten sauenneuseatantesonmiuceacteuacussaxns etaueniun sc wemveseeaseneeesmeere sete 388 CV OS SA NING Sireen aca tac wor tance stccusacaceur anece Gucnven nmctaa vaca diencoacaasn deauanearvancnmetacuneddcanesnme due wiacesucsueasunedsnussueceses 389 COS Hy AIO Maries siete cece ace E E E E a E EA 391 DEDO Gs A E dec oacevoavencuseuasusscses 393 PRE POR BINOS e E E ce vaveataarteuseumereeeers 395 DELIN BAN a eles Scpvancrmacsae Caearaguseeadvameindecnasnetacesadaetureedeaeiews ten wencunamacatieecaccassc 397 Grouping Bands reye Cn a as dtc E R semua nie teeevartaune qnunaa nace acsunset edna seis Gupeasteceennevenes 400 Report Header and POON wsissiccccessetcsesscvectteccecusavssnecchseadebdenneccucenetecuseeetcecdssentcsswscnveteearsteucsuesueecbsuateednustiesbaant
238. eeeeneeeneeeseeeeeeesseeeseasaeeseeasseeseeasseseeeesseeseeasaeeseeanseesenneeenenes 145 Insert the User Name into Printed Documents ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeaaeeeseeasaeeseeesseeseeasseeeenasseesonagaeesenneeesenes 146 Insert a Logo Into Printed DOCUIN GE NES vim sisi idesvasccecersenedectaundcecuaay vdemuain a a tas aa EE eaaa aAa AAE aE a aE 147 SCING dermena E A a a E camoaccasarurauauessdananetwones 148 Scale Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor s sssnsnssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mennaan nennen 148 Scale Print Preview by Specifying Width in Pages ccccsssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesseeeeeeeeeassaaeeeeseeessseeeessoeeessaesessenaanseeeessanes 149 ZOON HIO crkao ea aae c wen A aucun AAA aA E tana va a a a ceca auwedaa aa Ea aAa EEEE a a EKANA 150 Z 0M Print Pre Vie W IN OF OUt se e a aa Ea eaaa 150 Zoom Print Preview by Entering a Zoom FactoOl ccccssceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeseeeseaeseeessaeseeeseaeseeeseeaseeeseaseeeseeseeeess 151 Zoom Print Preview to Show Whole Pages or Fit Content sssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne 152 Show Two or More Pages in Print PrevieW sssasssssssnunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna nnmnnn nnna 153 VIEW Mg a d Navigating srs aaa aaa E aaa aa aa A a aE a Eaa a 154 Navigate Between Pages IN Print Prev
239. eesseeaeneneeees 577 Hide and Display Tree List ColUMnS aid cicekvccnkeue scence tb eetccba ede vdeo cawedaeisceussesrins teed Gon aavevenwoncducansivedsasheveucsnbeseatestesaetecsssexints 578 Reorder Tree EIS C CONAN S csi a tanwedcnaavece couse e a ORE 580 RESIZE Tree LIS UC ONIN a ti aooaa a E a A E E a E EEG 581 Selection aNd INAV IC ALLO aaa a A aa a aa aaa aa cctv Aaaa aa aE a aa aAA O EAEE A aa a EAAS aeaa Aa Ea Daa AER S Eiaeia 582 Navigation ina MEO E E aE E E aE E cou EEE 582 MEI CU Iree LIST NOGCS resccsetscsectccencnaeceetcect ccwarsaneuactasescuicctas lt oancevuracanmacaacwecusauacs dcaetsncoaers dec enatasnncuncvacsoatus eee detesansacnacuaadantncnectate 583 MEG al GNO ea a sacraccnc sac etecss sraosesoccce scence aseecsecelessaceassccsccencicauessencaceeiecnsveas 584 Data EC ING cidni ia mean tends a aaa haber tened wall anus O Aa a aa ver a evan va ncebeaaninad uni aA EUA A aE 585 Layout CUS TOMMZALION sannin aus n a aa V E e E E eia 587 Expand and Collapse Rows in Vertical GridS ccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesneeeeeeeeeesaaeeseesneaasaaeeeseeeeesaaeeesseeeaseneeesseeanseneeees 587 Resize Rows and Columns in Vertical GridS cccccssesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeseeessaeeeeeseeaesseesesseeaassaeeesseeeaseeeeesseenannnenees 588 NAVI ALL OIA edane aa aa Ea Aaaa Waaa eaaa E A E AAO A Ea e a a ar A a ARE aa 589 2011 DevExpress Inc Interface Elements for Windows This documentaion provides information
240. eeting agendas will be e mailed to project team members at least 24 hours prior to meetings 2011 DevExpress Inc s24 Rich Text Editor 525 Miscellaneous Insert a Bookmark A Bookmark exposes a document range with a name The range can have a zero length The name should start with a letter and does not have to be unique in the collection of bookmarks in the current document To create a new bookmark place the caret at the chosen location or select the text to mark and click the Bookmark button on the Links toolbar ae ee Bookmark Create a bookmark to assign a name to a specific point in a document You can make hyperlinks that jump directly to a bookmarked location or choose the Bookmark item from the context menu Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering The Bookmark dialog will appear 2011 DevExpress Inc 525 Rich Text Editor s26 Bookmark Bookmark Name SortBy 6 Name Location le Add i p Delete fp GoTo After that you can insert a hyperlink to make a cross reference to this bookmark 2011 DevExpress Inc s26 Rich Text Editor Insert a Hyperlink The Hyperlink marks the document range as a hot spot in the document It can be activated by clicking or pressing ENTER to navigate the specified external URL file or bookmark within the same document To create a new hyperlink select a ran
241. eground Color Specifies the color of the control s line This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Line Style You can select a solid by default dashed dotted or mixed style for the line Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it then can be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e End Band Determines a band in which the control finishes drawing 2011 DevExpress Inc 389 Report Designer 390 e End Point Determines the end point from a band s upper left corner where the control finishes drawing e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when
242. elements that will show information from these fields e Allows you to create calculated fields by building expressions based on the values of data fields report parameter values etc e Shows existing report parameters and allows you to add parameters to your report i roas O O G2 Products F calculatedField 1 T CategoryID Discontinued E EANI3 Ss ProductID ProductNiame fab QuantityPerUnit Ee ReorderLevel Em Supplier ID faa UnitPrice J UnitsInStock lay UnitsOnOrder HA Parameters if SB parameter 1 If the Field List is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Windows Field List See Also Group and Sort Panel Property Grid Report Explorer Scripts Errors Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 320 Report Designer 321 Formatting Toolbar The Formatting Toolbar allows you to easily customize an element s font color and alignment settings Wz Vile zy uja 2 If the Formatting Toolbar is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Toolbars Formatting Toolbar See Also Layout Toolbar Main Toolbar Zoom Toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 321 Report Designer 322 Group and Sort Panel The Group and Sort Panel allows you to quickly apply grouping and sorting to your report data Feld Name Sort Order Show Header Show Footer CategoryID Ascending Supplier ID To create a new grouping or sorting criterion simply click Add a Group
243. ell Row or Column Insert a Cell 1 Click a cell located directly to the right or below where you want to insert a cell and then click the Insert Cells button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar Insert Cells Insert Cells or Right click a cell relative to which you want to add a new cell select the Insert item from the context menu and click Insert Cells Insert Columns to the Left Delete Cells Split Cells Insert Columns to the Right Insert Rows Above Cell Alignment Insert Rows Below Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark Hyperlink 2 In the invoked Insert Cells dialog choose one of the available options Descr iption Insert a new cell just to the left of the select ed cell and move 2011 DevExpress Inc s04 Rich Text Editor 505 Insert entire row Insert entre column Shift cells down Insert anew cell in Insert entire row Insert entire column fe ox pp Cancel nd existi Ng cell Remai ning cells in this new row 2011 DevExpress Inc sos Rich Text Editor soe Insert a new row just above the row contai ning Insert entire column Ok pee Cancel g Insert entire column Insert a new colum n just FP chi ae to the j Shift cells right loft of Shift cells down the colum n contai ning
244. enables you to use the text retrieved from a data source for filling in the fields in a document template This feature is useful for letters catalogs mailing labels and for personalizing any kind of document amp tNote If the data source provides formatted text to insert in the merge field its formatting won t be recognized and properly processed To merge data fields in a Rich Text Editor s document perform the following steps e Prepare a Data Source To perform a mail merge you need a template and a data source The template is a document containing fields placeholders for the information that will be merged The data source contains the data that will be merged into the fields in the main document to create the merged documents e Insert Fields Eile BB DH Insert Merge Field Add a field from a list of recipients or from a data table to the document Then when an application runs with the mail merge data source attached to the Rich Text Editor you can select the field to insert by clicking the Insert Merge Field button on the Mail Merge toolbar The drop down list or a dialog window containing field names is shown S Insert Merge Field Customers PostalCode Customers Region Choose the required field and click Insert Then the field is inserted at the cursor position e Preview Field Values The Show All Field Codes button on the Mail Merge toolbar displays field codes for all fields in the 201
245. eneame vauueiweueuens 72 Group GIG ROW Sariaren R e a a 75 Fiter Grid Dataa a a E E a E ET 78 Show Summaries Totals yin Grids ssri e e aisivcscavandeteuessdedainedsectavasacenicevebbadsadvactehedwersecedeucente 82 FAV OUT Custonmizati n oa EE E E a usauavnteceavauenees 83 Expand and Collapse Rows and Cards in GridS ccccsceceeeeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasssaeeeeseeanesaeesseeseaesaeesseeeeassaeesseeeeessaeneseenaes 83 Hide and Display Grid Columns Bands and Card Fie IdS ccccecesseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaneseeeseeeeesssaeeseeeeaessaeesseeeaesseeesseenoes 85 Rearrange Grid Columns Bands and Card Fie lds ccccccssseesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesssseeesseeaaesseeeeeeeaseseeesseeeaaasaeeeseeeeassaeessaenans 89 Resize Cards ty Grid Sonore EAE EEEREN REEE EE AEA E A EEEE E EEEE E aa 91 Resize Grid Columns Bands and Card Fie IdS cccssccsessesseeeeeenseeeeeeeuseeeeeeeuseeeueeenseeeneeesaseeueeenuseseueseneseuseeseseeneeenaseess 93 Se lechon aha Navigati n a E E E a A T 95 Locate Grid REGO OS aucuna enai RE E a EEA aa i 95 Navigate Through Grid RECON CS ocorria i e NEEE EE A EAE EEE EEA AE 96 Select Grid ROW S ANG Cards sisii ia aena a a iea i a aaa aa aa iei G 97 2011 DevExpress Inc Contents Layout Manager sosea N a ae e a a a Ea a EEEa 98 Layout Customization ssie E E cence sel asbuecuccueaestus sucenonews sUesucsusatnces 99 Start Layout Custom izatio Mre aaa a e Eea read oct oc AE
246. ent Row Index Limit the Number of Records per Page Cancel Printing If a Report Does Not Contain Any Records Add Page Numbers for Groups 2011 DevExpress Inc s03 Report Designer 304 Add Page Numbers for Groups This tutorial demonstrates how to display page numbers individually for each group in your report To demonstrate this feature we ll use a report similar to the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To add page numbers for groups do the following 1 From the Toolbox drop the Page Info control onto the Group Footer GroupFootert F 13 S U0 tt 2 2 Then select the control and set its Running Band to GroupHeader1 Format Page 0 of 1 Fage Informaton Current of Total Page Numbers Running Band GroupHeader1 none Running Band If required you also can specify its Format property e g Page 0 of 1 3 Now you should force each new group to start on a separate page Otherwise group page numbers will be calculated incorrectly To do this select the Group Footer and set its Page Break to After the Band GroupFooterl Group Footer Level o ETN O Print at Bottom None Before the Band Page Break After the Band 4 Finally select the Group Footer and click its Smart Tag In its actions list check the Repeat Every Page option 2011 DevExpress Inc 304 Report Designer 30
247. eport The first page is intended to set the dataset name which will be used in the report e g in the Field List Report Wizard Create a new dataset The dataset contains the tables and columns you need for your report In order to create a new dataset first give tt a name myDataSet Note When specifying the dataset name you need to avoid special characters such as whitespace 5 amp P T le etc Then click Next to proceed to Step 2 to select a data connection 2011 DevExpress Inc an Report Designer az Step 2 Choose a Data Connection Note This wizard step appears only if you re creating a new report from scratch In this instance familiarity with database connections is required so we recommend that you contact your application administrator or vendor for assistance If you re modifying an existing report you will skip this step and start with Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report Purpose Connect to a database whose data will be shown in your report Page Interface On this page you can either select one of the data connections currently available in the drop down list or create a new one To create a new connection click the New Connection button It invokes a Data Link Properties dialog allowing you to set up a new database connection Choose a data connechon From this information youll be able to choose the tables and columns
248. eport Designer aot Denmark Arhus 10367 12 25 1954 Vaffeljernet 13 55 10399 01 31 1995 Waffeljernet 77 36 10465 04 05 1995 Vaffaljernet 145 04 10591 08 07 1995 Waffeljernet 55 92 10602 08 17 1995 Vaffeljernet 2 52 10688 11 01 1955 Vaffeljernet 759 05 10744 12 18 1995 Waffeljernet 69 19 10769 01 08 1995 Vaffeliernet 65 06 10921 04 02 1995 Vaffeljernet 176 48 10546 04 11 1956 Vaffeliernet 27 20 10654 05 02 1996 Vaffaljernet 65 53 Denmark Keabenhavn 10341 11 25 1954 Simons bistro 26 78 10417 02 16 1995 Simons bistro 70 29 10556 07 04 1995 Simons bistro 3 80 10642 09 22 1995 Simons bistro 41 89 10665 10 16 1955 Simons bistro 2435 10802 01 29 1996 Simons bistro 257 25 11074 06 05 1996 Simons bistro 18 44 Finland Helsinki 10615 08 30 1995 Wilman Kala 75 10673 10 19 1995 Wilman Kala 72 76 10695 11 07 1995 Wilman Kala 16 72 The Group Footer band is unnecessary without the corresponding Group Header band to which its properties are similar The Group Footer can be used to display group totals or group page numbers In the Property Grid the properties of both these bands are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band e Font Specifies the font settings for the controls
249. eport s style specifies the appearance of your report YA 7 Bold im XXXXXX oy YW Compact x ohn Y XXXXINEKK KKNK El elil amen ane Formal If you want to customize your report further click Next to proceed to Step 9 Enter a Report Title Otherwise click Finish to complete report customization 2011 DevExpress Inc a2 Report Designer 433 Step 9 Enter a Report Title Purpose Specifies the report title Page Interface Enter a title string into the editor and click Finish to complete report creation What title do you want for your report That s all the information the wizard needs to create your report 2011 DevExpress Inc oa Report Designer oaa Label Report Wizard The Report Wizard allows you to create reports of two kinds standard reports and label reports To create a label report invoke the Report Wizard dialog and choose the Label Report option on the Welcome page Report Wizard Welcome to the Report Wizard This wizard helps you automatically create a report according to the selected wizard options Choose a report type and click Next Report Type After completing the Label Report wizard you will get a blank report that generates labels of a particular size Since the report designer will clearly indicate the label area you can then populate this area with the required content and print out your labels Use the links below to learn more abou
250. er 2011 DevExpress Inc 235 Report Designer 236 Top Margin 14 mm Chang 19 00 Aniseed Syrup 10 00 Queso Cabrales 21 00 Sir Rodney s Scones 10 00 Gorgonzola Telino 12 50 Mascarpone Fabiol 32 00 To learn about other options available for a report refer to Report Settings See Also Controls Positioning Change Measurement Units for a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 236 Report Designer 237 Report Types The tutorials in this section provide you detailed instructions on how to create reports of different types with the Report Designer Choose a report type from the following table Master Detail Report Detail Bands Parameterized Report Chart with Static Series Chart with Dynamic Series 2011 DevExpress Inc 237 Report Designer 238 Static Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a static report which means that the report will not be bound to a data source In this example we will create a simple one page announcement to be repeated 20 times in a report To create a static report do the following 1 Create a new report 2 From the Control Toolbox drop the Rich Text control onto the Detail band tail E oO E anchTexti 3 Select the created control and click its Smart Tag In the invoked actions list click the Load File context link Rich TextTasks Edit Text Clear Load File Data Binding None Anchor Vertically None Formatt
251. es a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it e Width Specifies the Cell s width in report measurement units Navigation e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks a Cell The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to
252. essible via scripts Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Height Specifies the Row s height in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it 2011 DevExpress Inc 360 Report Designer set Table Cell The Table Cell control represents an individual cell within a Table gt ableCell1 atableCell In general the Table Cell control s properties are similar to the properties of the Label control ableCells In the Property Grid the Table Cell s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied r
253. etail Report Bands e Data Member Determines a name of the data relationship established within the bound data source To learn more refer to Master Detail Report Detail Report Bands e Data Source Determines the data source that provides the detail data for the report If this property isn t defined the detail report gets data fromthe master report s data source To learn more refer to Master Detail Report Detail Report Bands e Filter String Allows you to invoke the Filter String Editor which is intended to easily define a filtering condition fora detail report s data For more information refer to Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts e XML Data Path Allows you to define a path to the data contained in an XML file The data contained in the file will then be used as the Detail Report Band s data source In this case the Data Member property will specify the bound list in the XML data source Note Note that a detail report uses the XML Data Path property value only when the Data Source property is set to None The XML Data Path property has a lower priority than the Data Source property Design e Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts e Detail Print Count Specifies how many times the Detail band should
254. eus toh dae toe Rete 35 R POE iee E A E 35 Report C rous eaaa ot seeeaueerucee sada lapanmeincne et ueeanneenceeeenaiens 39 REPON QUe UG renren maiti a e E E 39 Adding Reports to the Report Queue essessseeeeesssssssssserrssssssssecerssssssssserrrsssssssees 39 Repor oOucue AS eaa E A A 4 Kepo UCC Cale Naa eyo a E A 42 Repor Queue POC CS S12 erences aces Aa a ed eaaeeevaeeaiees 45 IREDOSIOLY oaoa E ius 45 R POD S Ei E 46 Usine the Report Desi SNe enen n ERA a fee 46 Special ToolBar Commands enan a E eae auaetia 48 DANO a a a 48 Ne Wera E E E eee eee 48 DRDO na E a E mee Dente Tee 48 S O O a T E ree ner ee ee ee eee 48 koad Paramete sereo E eee 48 Daa Connec Oese E a a 49 Add DISOU Oa nie encase ieee eae eee 49 SCAPOLI PDO aa sten etree a ance ca tam beaddaManeee tach 49 CVT Ml Ce zna a A T ce een 49 Special CIeveTO REPOTIS asrorin en E wens eas omance anon ewe Meenas 50 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Appendix A DevExpress End User Documentation 0 cc ccccccnsnseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 Copyright 2008 2012 CleverQ Patent Pending Designed for use with QuickBooks QuickBooks is a trade mark and service mark of Intuit Inc registered in the United States and other countries Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access are trademarks and service marks of Microsoft registered in the United States and other countries CleverQ is a trade mark and service mark of CleverQ and Better Days E
255. ew Tab is intended to check the print output of a report and customize its additional options To learn more about print preview capabilities refer to the Print Preview topic See Also Designer Tab HTML View Tab Scripts Tab 2011 DevExpress Inc 327 327 Report Designer 328 Property Grid The Property Grid allows you to change the settings of the currently selected report element Gets or sets the vertical anchoring style of a report s control To select an element and show its properties within the Property Grid do one of the following e Click the required element on the Report Designer surface e Select an element using the Report Explorer window e Select an element from the Property Grid s combo box To reset a property value right click this property and in the invoked menu click Reset Border Color Gets or sets the control s border color If the Property Grid is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Windows Property Grid See Also Field List Group and Sort Panel Report Explorer Scripts Errors Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 328 Report Designer 320 Report Explorer The Report Explorer shows a report s structure in a tree form providing easy access to report elements Once an element has been selected in the Report Explorer it s settings can be changed using the Property Grid gair myReport
256. ew appointment and 2011 DevExpress Inc s36 Scheduler 537 also invokes the Recurrence dialog which allows the recurrence pattern to be specified for the new appointment i Appointment Recurrence F4 Appointment time T o End 3 30 00 AM Duration 30 minutes Recurrence pattern Daily O Weekly C Monthly Every weekday Yearly Every i H day s Range of recurrence Start 1 15 2009 No end date CQ End after 10 occurrences Jendby 1 24 2009 ox Cancel Remove Recurrence 4 New Recurring Event Selecting this menu item invokes the Appointment editor dialog used to create a new all day appointment and also invokes the Recurrence dialog which allows the recurrence pattern to be specified for the new event Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Operations An alphanumeric key or ENTER This invokes an in place editor to create an appointment occupying the currently selected area Once you ve typed your appointment s caption you can either create and save the appointment by pressing ENTER or changing the focus or cancel the operation by pressing ESC This method does not work in the Month View mode of the scheduler The type of the created appointment depends on the selected time cell s When typing is done in Day View mode the appointment is created with the time interval starting with the earliest time of the selected cells and ending with the latest and th
257. ext Allows you to define a line of static text to be displayed Note that when a Check Box is selected in the designer you may simply start typing the text and it will be automatically entered into the in place editor E L gt a a type in night in place D E m If the current report has a data source the Text property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Text Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Xisx Format String Specifies the native XLSX format string for the control s content which is to be preserved when the report is being exported to XLSX This format string is independent from the general value formatting Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation 2011 DevExpress Inc 344 Report Designer EJ e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchi
258. ext color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Format This property allows you to specify the format string for the text displayed in the control When you click the ellipsis button you will see the Format String Editor window that will select the predefined format or customize it as need
259. eyboard or by selecting available Fields Functions operators and constants via the controls below f Expression editor Unit Price Quantity 1 Discount Arithmetic operators Parenthesis Comparison operators Logical operators t xX lt lt gt gt DOO Functions Discount Amount Field Information Operators t Caption Discount The type of this Field is n System Single Constants Product 4 s Quantity Unit Price OK Cancel Categories Available Functions operators Fields or constants Items description Select 4 category to access available Double click an item to insert it into the expression Functions operators Fields or constants In this editor you can type an expression manually or select functions operators and operands using the editor s controls An expression is a string that when parsed and processed evaluates some value Expressions consist of column field names constants operators and functions Column field names must be wrapped with brackets The following are examples of regular expressions Quantity UnitPrice 1 BonusAmount TFirstName LastName Boolean expressions Country USA OrderDate gt 8 16 1994 AND Quantity gt 20 The Expression Editor supports numerous standard functions allowing you to easily perform different string date time logical and math operations over data You can access the available
260. eyvera system Indicators by Category ClaverQ system Parameters Clever system Parameters by Source Cleyvera system Preferences POC larry Scorecard CleverQ system Standard Scorecard Clever system OOO SOOO O O O O Template Portrait Cleyvera system On this form you will see a list of report designs The list includes a report design name data source type the user id that created the design and a checkbox to indicate whether the design is private to only the user who created it The Report Manager comes with some preloaded designs with the user id system You cannot edit these but you can copy them and rename them and modify their design if you want They are also a good training aid to see samples and how they are designed You will see on this list your report designs as well as any other users designs 1f they choose not to make them private The Data Source Type can be one of the following CleverQ PDC Other This setting determines how data sources on reports are handled For CleverQ reports the report design is based on the default QBD file Ifthe QBD file is moved the report designs may be pointing to a QBD file in a different location This can be fixed for all CleverQ report designs by using the menu item Tools Fix CleverQ Report Data Source Ifa report is a PDC type then when the report is previewed or processed the data source 1s replaced by the connection string in the preference PDC For Other data sourc
261. fall in the specified range from the report To add parameters and filter your report based on their values follow the steps below 1 In the Field List window right click over the Parameters section and in the invoked menu click Add Parameter GHE myDataSet HER Orders Edit Parameters Remove All Parameters Repeat this action to create the second parameter 2 In the Field List select the first parameter and in the Property Grid set its Name and Description And make sure to set its Type to an appropriate value Then repeat this step for the second parameter GHO myDataSet ToDate Parameter HA Orders lea Parameters Now every time your report is previewed you will be asked to specify two dates Note In Print Preview if a report s Request Parameters option is set to Yes its document is not generated until you have submitted values of all visible parameters via the Parameters UI The following instructions explain how to use parameters to filter your report s data 3 Click your report s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Filter String entry Then in the invoked Filter String Editor construct an expression where a data field is compared with the created parameters To access parameters click the icon on the right until it turns into a question mark 2011 DevExpress Inc 200 Report Designer 201 The complete filtering expression will then
262. fied by the Series Data Member property For example this name is used to identify a series within the chart control s legend The names of all automatically generated series can be supplemented with the same prefix and postfix defined by the settings which are available via the Series Name Template property The template settings for the dynamically created series are defined by the specific properties which are available via the SeriesTemplate property of a Chart In particular the Argument Data Member and Value Data Members properties specify the data fields from which the arguments and data values of the series data points are obtained Note that if the Series Data Member property is not set for a Chart the Chart control can t automatically generate series even if the Argument Data Member and Value Data Members properties are defined Note Series Name Template Determines the settings used to name data bound series defining the prefix and postfix texts for the names of series which are dynamically created as a result of binding a Chart to data using the Data Source Series Data Member Argument Data Member and Value Data Members properties The series names to which these prefixes and postfixes are added are taken by each series from the data field defined by the Series Data Member property To learn more on this refer to Chart with Dynamic Series Note that the settings available via the Series Name Template property are not applied to
263. for instance via the keyboard and press ENTER or F2 e Focus a cell and press any alpha numeric key The editor will be invoked and its contents will be replaced with the pressed character Select and Deselect Cell Text Press F2 or CTRL A Close Cell Editor and Accept Changes Made Do one of the following e Press ENTER e Click any other grid cell e Focus any other control Discard Changes To discard changes made in a cell press ESC To discard changes made in all cells within a node press ESC twice Open Cell Editor s Dropdown Do one of the following e Activate a cell editor and press ALT DOWN ARROW or F4 e Click the editor s dropdown button Close Cell Editor s Dropdown For all editors providing a dropdown you can close the dropdown by pressing ALT DOWN ARROW If the calculator is displayed in the dropdown it can be closed via CTRL ENTER Dropdowns displaying lists of items can be closed by clicking an item with the mouse or by selecting an item with the keyboard and pressing ENTER Change Values Change Date Time Values You can edit these cell values without opening the dropdown calendar Position the caret at the portion of a date time value that needs to be changed To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Numeric Values To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Values of Cells That Prov
264. from the specieid DateTime GetDate DateTime Extracts a date from the defined GetDate OrderDateTime DateTime GetDay DateTime Extracts a day from the defined GetDay OrderDate DateTime GetDayOfW eek DateTime Extracts a day of the week from GetDayOfW eek OrderDate the defined DateTime GetDayOfYear DateTime Extracts a day of the year from the GetDayOfYear OrderDate defined DateTime GetHour DateTime Extracts an hour from the defined GetHour StartTime DateTime GetMillisecond DateTime Extracts milliseconds from the GetMillisecond StartTime defined DateTime GetMinute DateTime Extracts minutes from the defined GetMinute StartTime DateTime GetMonth DateTime Extracts a month from the defined GetMonth StartTime DateTime GetSecond DateTime Extracts seconds from the defined GetSecond StartTime DateTime GetTimeOfDay DateTime Extracts the time of the day from GetTimeOfDay StartTime the defined DateTime in ticks GetYear DateTime Extracts a year from the defined GetYear StartTime DateTime Now Returns the current system date AddDays Now 5 and time Today Returns the current date AddMonths Today 1 Regardless of the actual time this function returns midnight of the current date UtcNow Returns the current system date AddDays UtcNow 7 and time expressed as Coordinated Universal Time UTC Logical Functions lif Expression TruePart FalsePar
265. fter you have created your parameters for the report definition you will need to make your report design aware of these parameters Press the Design button from this form and then press the Load Parameters item on the menu bar Page 29 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual eS Haggi Uesivnoy Uasiouarls Cony foe BAR z Eile Edit view Format i la Save O amp a a Save To File Load Parameters Script To Clipboard Data Connection CleverQ Help z Times New Roman 9 75 GHG dg Press this button to 8555 Dashboards_and_Gauges load the parameters Seal Parameters into this report design 3E Application_Name eI Company _Address ae Company _Name i ab CustomFilter SEJ Dashboard SEJ Date_Range fp Title v B PageH eader one band per page AB Title2 Title2 View the list of parameters DashboardName here ina v E detaiBand Property Grid 5 a xtraReporti Report AE vA Appearance l Background Colo C Transparent Space for repeating columns d j Controls placed here will be printed incorrectly Pie OE EEE ControlText Border Width 1 Borders None Font Times New Roman Foreground Colo MM ControlText Formatting Rule Collection Formatting Rules Collection Padding 0 0 0 0 Page Color C white v izi RE one band per report Application _Name v amp GroupHeaderl AIR aji Ll a NT D uw y al ali BI
266. g box 40 100 g pkgs Unit Price 18 00 19 00 10 00 22 00 2135 25 00 30 00 40 00 97 00 31 00 21 00 38 00 6 00 23 25 272 272 Report Designer 273 Store and Restore Style Sheets This tutorial describes how you can save a report s style sheet into an external file and then load it back to the report You can store a report s style sheet containing all the report s styles in an external REPSS file This makes it possible to easily restore a report s appearance from this file For general information refer to Understand Styles Concepts To learn how to store and restore report style sheets do the following 1 Create a new report and bind it to a data source 2 Click the report s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Style Sheet property _Reporti E m oOo BM Design in Report Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source myDataSet Data Member Products Data Adapter ProductsTableAdapter Filter String Ill em HWW Print when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count Li k I Li Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch J Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection Watermark None 1 Pa 1 1 E E k k 3 In the invoked Styles Editor use the oP button to create new styles For them specify the desired options e g Background Color
267. gation Focus shifts to the next time appointment within the time span shown Pressing the key repeatedly iterates through the appointments in the following way appointments with a definite duration are followed by all day appointments 2011 DevExpress Inc 555 Scheduler s56 SHIFT TAB Switches to appointments navigation Focus shifts to the previous time appointment within the time span shown Pressing the key repeatedly iterates through the appointments in the following way appointments with a definite duration are followed by all day appointments A arts A Day View Work Week View Month View i Moves focus one week before or after Week View acts like the LEFT RIGHT ARROW keys ALT PAGE UP i Day View Week View Month View Moves focus ALT PAGE DO to the start or end of a current month ALT HOME Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the beginning of a current week ALT END Day View Work Week View Moves focus to the end of a current week Note When appointments are grouped only ARROW keys can move focus to another resource group 2011 DevExpress Inc s56 Scheduler 557 Scheduler Navigation Buttons The Navigation Buttons are used to scroll to the previous or next appointment This is helpful when there is a Significant time interval between scheduled appointments Saturday July 16 Previous Appointment Next Appointment Ill Navigation Buttons Navigatio
268. ge a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the controls contained within the bands e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the controls contained within the bands as well as to assign an existing style to them or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the bands This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 406 Report Designer 407 This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the band should be visible in print preview Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Height Specifies the band s height in report units e Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in repor
269. ge fonts and colors as well as paddings text alignment and other appearance properties of a report control or band select this element and do one of the following e Use the Formatting Toolbar Formatting Toolbar Times New Roman h4 e Use the Property Grid where all appearance related properties are located under the Appearance category E R Appearance Background Color C Transparent Border Color MS ControText Border Width 1 Borders None Times New Roman _ Formatting Rules E Padding 2 2 0 0 Style Priority Style Priority E Styles Collection Top Left Gets or sets the control s foreground color Note that the appearance settings of a band are applied to all controls contained within it When it s required to apply styles in bulk we recommend using common style templates which also can be stored in an external style sheet file and applied to multiple reports In addition this allows you specify separate odd even styles to improve your reports readability Another noteworthy option is the capability to conditionally change the appearance of report elements based on a certain logical expression e g if a control s value satisfies some rule For more information refer to Styles and Conditional Formatting in Reports 2011 DevExpress Inc 187 Report Designer 188 Delete Report Elements To delete a report element band or control select it in the Design Panel or Re
270. ge numbering independently for the report and its groups For a tutorial on this refer to Add Page Numbers for Groups By default this property is not set to any value meaning that the entire report is being taken into account Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Start Page Number Here you can set the start number for page numbering Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Word Wrap When this property is set to Yes text contained in the control is wrapped to the next line if it doesn t fit the line or comes across a newline character If the this property is set to No the text in this case will be displayed on the same line until a newline character is entered Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can be then accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do th
271. ge to mark and click the Hyperlink button on the Links toolbar E i me wo w e b T 3 t Ii riri rari reiri amp 1 ot oj aur 5 1I i Hyperlink Ctrl K Create a link to a Web page a picture an e mail address or a program or select the Hyperlink item from the context menu Cut Copy Paste Increase Indent Decrease Indent Font Paragraph Bullets and Numbering Bookmark or use the CTRL K keyboard shortcut The Edit hyperlink dialog will appear 2011 DevExpress Inc 527 527 Rich Text Editor s28 Text to display Screentlip Target frame Link to Address 2011 DevExpress Inc s28 Rich Text Editor s29 Insert a Page Break The Rich Text Editor allows you to insert a page break in your document anywhere you want To insert a page break 1 Point to the position within a document where you want to insert a page break 2 Click the Page Break button on the Pages toolbar Page Break Ctrl Return Start the next page at the current position f Or press CTRL ENTER You can use the following keyboard shortcuts to insert breaks of different types EEE Eee 2011 DevExpress Inc s29 Rich Text Editor s30 Insert a Picture To insert graphics into your document point to the required position and click the Picture button on the Illustrations too
272. ger a a AEAEE E ant a Aaa E aR 37 SCIES CNA EIE MENTS arcra ae aa a a E a EE AE aE E E Nacuuaes 39 ZOOM 7a CAN a O NIAE E A DE AIEE E E A E A E E EO A ET A E A A A T A E E veaweueawiais 41 SCONTO AT a a E E E E E a EE A AG 42 ROE a GHAT aean a Oea A aea a aE aa O na Aaa TEELE AEE DIEA E E a A A 43 EGITONS Assinar E O N aSa 44 Working with Dropdown Editors ccceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeseeesseeseeesseeeeeesseeseeesaesseeeseeeeeeasseesenegsessenesseeseneseeesonanas 45 Editing Values Selecting Text and Using the Clipboard ssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nennen 46 Editor Comet Mehna a A aa A A EEEa a DE A E aa A Na AEV 48 Expression ECMO sisiiscivcsssswencdide Eua a E Ea a R E aa a aaa 49 Expression Operators Functions and Constants siiiciccssciscecscccsascecuticw sets sndsacnceccnaaedsnctedencveeenact senduucienoeuatussendwcdsuuavsseantesentiansence 51 Fier EHON cise a eater uan Gnd unin tuliud amie cun ul cud Mima comets 57 Filter Data Via the Fiter Editor rerin a EE a 58 Examples of Using the Filter Editor eiia a aa a a aae a KeA A eaaa aAA aa a a a aa AKAA aiaa 61 OnO ne en E ee ee E T E A R 68 Data BANO aaa EEEE ELENE EE E A Aa EAA E E ascveuseovenctesnass 69 Add and D let e Grid Rectas acoum a aa a A a 69 EAIC GR CEI Si serinaaoa a E O E a 70 Data Presentatioi iuie aa a E a E a E aa 72 SOFC ONIO ROWS oian E E E A O ieCueutcinatiendesane m
273. gin so that the report contains unnecessary pages 2011 DevExpress Inc ats Report Designer ate Printing warning The following controls are outside the right page margin and this will cause extra pages to be printed label labeli Detail Print Count Specifies how many times the Detail band should be printed when a data source is defined for the report and it is not empty Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Specifies how many times the Detail band should be printed when no data source is defined for the report Draw the Grid Determines whether to draw the Snap Grid when a report is being designed Snap Grid Size Determines the size of the Snap Grid s cells Snap to Grid Specifies whether to snap controls to the Snap Grid when they are located or resized Snapping Mode Specifies the snapping mode for report elements when they are being aligned using the Snap Grid Navigation e Bookmark Allows you to define how a report is named in the document map when the report bookmarks are implemented By default it is synchronized with the report s Name property Page Settings Note e Landscape Determines whether the page orientation is Landscape when set to Yes or Portrait when set to No e Margins Determines the width of a report s margins measured in report units Note that the report s Margins Top and Margins Bottom properties are tied to the Height property of the Page Margin
274. gle mouse click within the appointment invokes the in place editor which is used to edit the appointment s Subject It is illustrated in the following picture Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Operations 2011 DevExpress Inc sat Scheduler saz ENTER or CTRL O Invokes the Edit Appointment dialog for the selected appointment Double click Double clicking an appointment invokes the Edit Appointment dialog This key starts in place editing Drag appointment edges Resizing the rectangle representing an appointment results in changing its start end times Drag an appointment Dragging with the left mouse button moves the appointment across time cells changing its Start time and End time properties 2011 DevExpress Inc s42 Scheduler osa Manage Reminders What is a Reminder Any appointment can have one or more reminders They are responsible for sending alerts at specified time periods before an appointment s start time If an appointment has a reminder the bell ur image is displayed Specifying Reminders A reminder can be created fora particular appointment with the help of the appointment s editing form demonstrated below Select the Reminder check box and enter the amount of time before the appointment when you want the reminder to occur You can select a predefined value in a drop down list or just type it in The duration editor recognizes digits as the number of minutes if an h p
275. gle of a Shape It indicates counterclockwise rotation 2011 DevExpress Inc 366 Report Designer 367 You can hold CTRL while pressing the left mouse button to rotate a Shape within the control s borders E EF Use Ctrl with the left mouse button to rotate the shape e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Shape Determines which of the various built in shapes to use within the control A certain shape has its own unique set of properties The following list is intended to give a brief overview of these special properties specific to a certain shape This property specifies how much a Arrows Polygons Stars and Cross Shape s corners are rounded It enables display of rounded boxes and triangles Number of Sides This property allows you to set the Polygons number of sides Count of Star Points This property allows you to set the Stars number of star points Defines the level of inward curve Stars for the lines connecting the Concavity vertices of a Star It may be an integer in the range of O 100 Tip s Length This property specifies the length Bracket and Brace of the Bracket s ends Tail s Length This property specifies the tail Brace length of a Brace e Stretch If the Shape is rotated to some degree that is its Angle property is not zero you may turn on the
276. gn an existing style to them or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Text Alignment Allows you to change the text alignment of the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior Data Design Layout Keep Together As stated above the detail band is printed repeatedly for every data entry When the Keep Together option is on the report engine tries to keep sequential detail band entries together This option makes sense only when data is grouped or you re working with a master detail report In this case the report engine tries to keep group contents on one page If a group doesn t fit and it starts somewhere in the middle of a page the report moves this group to a new page thus trying to reduce the number of page breaks in continuous data Multi Column Options This property allows you to arrange the printout of the band s content in several columns For more information refer to Multi Column Report Page Break Use this property if the current report design requires that the detail section should be separated from previous sections or follow ups Specify the Before the Band or After the Band values to insert a page break before or after the current band In many cases this property may be used instead of the Page Break control Scripts This property contains events which you can handle by the required
277. ground Color coor e Fill Style o Second color ajueJeaddy Hatch style m 3 T rr lt O T a J rr a im TT way PEyD e wg Customize the chart s properties Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e Appearance Specifies a chart s background color fill style and background image e Padding Specifies the diagram s inner indents e Empty Chart Text 2011 DevExpress Inc 21 Charting 22 Specifies the message displayed in the chart when there s no data to display e Small Chart Text Specifies the message displayed in the chart when the chart size is too small to fit the diagram 2011 DevExpress Inc 22 Charting 23 Diagram Page Tasks e Rotate a diagram e Define a diagram s padding e Add or remove secondary axes e Add or remove panes Define panes layout direction Enable or disable a diagram s scrolling and zooming Page Elements Chart preview area Diagram Series 1 faa Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 E sjua waj Right Top WOOF 025 Pane Layout Distance Direction Customize the diagram s properties Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a Chart s layout 2011 DevExpress Inc 23 Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e General
278. ground color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both The property setting is useful for data bound Check Boxes located between upper and lower controls which are allowed to resize depending on their contents e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of a Check Box can be horizontally split across pages In other words ifa Check Box occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Check Box should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Check Box s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Check Box will be split despite this property s value e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more info
279. h as Background Color Foreground Color Font etc for the Pivot Grid s elements Cell Field Value Filter Separator Header Group Line etc e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Styles Allows you to invoke the Styles Editor which is intended to manage and customize the control s styles which then can be assigned to the Pivot Grid s elements Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the Pivot Grid so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Pivot Grid Should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Pivot Grid s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Pivot Grid will be split despite this property s value e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle by the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events vi
280. h series is created and customized manually and has a separate Data Source This approach is described in Chart with Static Series You can customize a created chart using both the Property Grid and the Chart Wizard To invoke the Chart Wizard click a Chart s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the Run Wizard link 2011 DevExpress Inc 377 Report Designer 378 Data Source Data Member There are no visible series to represent in a chart Try to add new series or make sure that Data Adapter GSPTableAdapter at least one of them is visible Formatting Rules Collection Run Wizard KEES a Annotatons Palettes Save Load Then the Chart Wizard will guide you through the whole process of customizing the Chart from defining its view type to providing its data and customizing its appearance In the Property Grid the Chart s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance Appearance Name Allows you to choose one of the available appearances to be used to draw the Chart s elements Diagram Axes Legend etc Background Color Specifies the background color for a Chart Background Image Allows you to load a background image to a Chart or define its URL and also define whether it should be stretched to fit the entire Chart s area or not Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control Fill Style Determines the fill style of a C
281. hart s background Empty Solid Gradient or Hatch and define other fill options if required Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Image Type Determines whether a Chart should be internally rendered as a metafile in a report in this case the quality of the rendered image is always good but in particular cases some details of the control may be lost or as a bitmap in this case the quality of the rendered image is sometimes poor but it allows a control to be drawn more precisely Indicators Palette Name Specifies the palette that is used to paint all indicators that exist in a Chart Padding Specifies the internal space between the Chart s content the diagram and legend and its edge in pixels Palette Name Allows you to choose one from the built in palettes to be used to draw a Chart s series 2011 DevExpress Inc 378 Report Designer 379 Palette s Base Color Number Allows you to define an integer index determining the base color for the palette defined by the Chart s Palette Name property Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts
282. hboard For This Year copy Description User ID Larry 0 Private Report Design Dashboards l Title1 Banking Dashboard For This Year Titlez C Custom Filter HJH a E H t This form contains two sections on the top portion is the main part of the form contains the main elements of the definition This includes a name optional description user id private checkbox what report design is associated with this definition title and title2 The Custom Filter checkbox is for advanced users and we will ignore that for now When adding a new report definition you can choose your report design from a dropdown list of available designs If the report design is your design you can also go right into the report designer from here NOTE This is necessary in order to add report definition parameters to your report design Title 1 and Title 2 are optional report definition specific parameters that can be part of your report design so you can add specific titles to your report depending on the Page 24 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual definition that is being processed This makes it even more flexible when reusing report designs The bottom portion of the form contains multiple tabs and provides a way to associate the report definition with Report Categories and Batch Groups More about that later There is also a tab for Parameters and
283. he Main Menu select File Save or press CTRL S In this case the report will be saved in the application s current folder Edit View Format Window 1 New Ctrl N New with Wizard Ctrl W Open Ctrl 0 Close Ctrl Fa After your report is saved its path is displayed in the Report Designer s title bar Report Designer C Reports ProductsReport_1 repx i a e To load a previously saved report in the Main Menu click File Open or press CTRL O The standard Open File dialog will allow you to locate and open report files See Also Change Element Layout in Your Report Delete Report Elements 2011 DevExpress Inc 184 Report Designer 185 Manually Update Report Output Sometimes you may need to simply update a couple of values in your report before printing it In these cases the simplest way to correct your report is to export it to an editable file e g RTF then use an appropriate editor tool to edit values and print your report To export a report switch to the Preview Tab and click the arrow near the Export Document button Laie E oy a llaa k t PDF File HTML File MHT File ALS File ALSA File CSV File Text File Image File To learn more about report exporting see Exporting from Print Preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 185 Report Designer ase Change Element Layout in Your Report To select a control simply click it To select the
284. he SHIFT key down 2 Right click any of the selected layout items and select Group from the context menu Employee ID Title SS ee I Sa tas s Sy Hide Customization Form Birth Dake y Reset Layout T Hide Text E Text Position d Hide Item Group C Create EmptySpace Item EI Size Constraints d Note that only adjacent selected layout items can be combined into a group and only if the region occupied by them forms a rectangle Otherwise the Group command is not available when right clicking the selection As a result a new group is created Emplovee ID Birth Date Hire Date 3 Right click the group s caption and select Create Tabbed Group 2011 DevExpress Inc 108 Layout Manager 109 Employee ID Hide Customization Form h Reset Layout Birth Date 47 gt Rename T Hide Text EN Text Position d a Ungroup LJ Create Empty Space Item Create Tabbed Group This creates a tab control with one tab displaying the contents of the original group Erniployee ID Title o III He e item First Mame Last Name a l Birth Date Hire Date You can subsequently rename the created tab and customize the contents of tab pages using drag and drop and context menus if required Combine Groups into a Tab Control To transform a group into a tab control right click the group s caption and select Create Tabbed Group Employee ID Reset La
285. hef Anton s Gumbo 2135 J J Wix Grandma s Boysenbeny 925 04 120 J p m pead I Use the links below to learn more about every step of the Standard Report wizard Note Depending on the method you used to invoke the Wizard you may be creating an entirely new report or modifying an existing one Creating reports from scratch requires database connection knowledge In these cases it s better if you contact your application administrator or vendor for assistance with the first three steps of the wizard If you re modifying an existing report you ll skip these initial data binding steps and start with Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report e Step 1 Enter a Dataset Name e Step 2 Choose a Data Connection e Step 3 Choose the Table or View e Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report e Step 5 Add Grouping Levels e Step 6 Summary Options e Step 7 Choose Report Layout e Step 8 Choose Report Style e Step 9 Enter a Report Title 2011 DevExpress Inc az Report Designer aa Step 1 Enter a Dataset Name Note This wizard step appears only if you re creating a new report from scratch In this instance familiarity with database connections is required so we recommend that you contact your application administrator or vendor for assistance If you re modifying an existing report you will skip this step and start with Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your R
286. hown full size Otherwise the image is resized to fit into the Picture Box s dimensions Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Image Image URL Navigation URL and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values froma Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Image Specifies an image to display in the Picture Box control When you click the ellipsis button you will see the Open File dialog that enables you to specify the file to load Then this image is embedded into a report and saved within this report so it is always available Note that this increases the size of a saved report definition If you want to save only the image path and not the image itself use the Image URL property instead e Image URL Specifies the URL of the image to display in the Picture Box control It supports both absolute and relative paths Arelative path may be related to the Web site or to the current Web page In the second case the path to the image must start with the symbol Setting a relative path makes it easier to move the entire application to another directory on the server without having to update the code e Tag This property allows you to add some additional informati
287. i im TopMargin aiiz ReportHeader EH Detail edb labeli be label2 Hg GroupFooter 1 HH ReportFooter 3 imi BottomMargin If the Report Explorer is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Windows Report Explorer See Also Field List Group and Sort Panel Property Grid Scripts Errors Panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 320 Report Designer EJ Scripts Errors Panel The Scripts Errors Panel displays the result of scripts validation after it s forced in the Scripts Tab Then if errors are located they are listed in this panel To get to the corresponding line of code click the corresponding item in the panel s list Or if all scripts are valid the panel reports this g J All scripts are valid For more information refer to Handle Events via Scripts See Also Field List Group and Sort Panel Property Grid Report Explorer 2011 DevExpress Inc 330 Report Designer 331 Scripts Tab The Scripts Tab allows you to manage your report s scripts It provides centralized access to all the scripts being written for a report or any of its elements bands and controls a myReport1 labell Label After Print 1 2 private void Detail BeforePrint object sender 3 System Drawing Printing PrintEventArgs e 4 f Write your script here 5 i 6 T i B private void labell AfterPrint object sender 3 System EventArgs e 10 f f Write your script here
288. i C OIA RE P ON a E E E E A E EE E A E E T 248 Ci OS SU Al REPOT oea E a E EEEE AEA 250 Contents PAN ANY LCN IZG CIRC DON Cisixslee a5 aena a conauss tasted E aE Ea aaae aE 254 CHITWAN Statie SO IGS cece secre a a aa a A E 257 Chart with Dy ain te OET O O a a a ect nant E R a E O aa O aa EAEAN 262 Styles and Conditional Form atting cccccessesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeasaaeeseseeeasaaeeeeseeeasaaaesesseeasseeesesseneessaesesseneassnesessanes 267 Understand Styles Concepts vei essed ae Ae cco csaactccacaccsecnanneekonesunscotees centage veeucnduveneshedussusansaeuscasnis deapeeaensaxbsneecunessutcrecsueneees 268 Use Odd and Eve ire VSS a aa aa a a a a aaa aaa a a AE a OEA aA sane eacetou ts sucecenueneuteeacusscess 271 Store and Restore Style SheetsS snnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnmnnn ananena 273 Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance ssssssunsssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennum nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 276 Conditionally Mde Band S cnie E aAa E A a a E EDA E aE EA EEA EEEa 281 Conditionally Change a Label S Text ccccsesscceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeseeeeeseaeseseeeeesnaeeessneaesseesessoenansneeess 285 Navid aO Nae bcnnznancya vanemeceauseescucesceses tense cokusvcecentectassusenenigsnntys Gosweueateesaneeccuasenesers 288 Add BOOK IM ANK Svtccsciavsactpcuscesateriondievatacwu
289. ick OK or double click the symbol In addition some symbols can be inserted in the document using default keyboard shortcuts Se 2011 DevExpress Inc 533 Scheduler s3 Scheduler This section describes the capabilities provided by the Scheduler which is used for scheduling calendar activities in stb ue ity re BE Too uJ g DECC Mercedes HARA CLKSS AMG Cabriolet 11 PM Appointment Management e Create an Appointment e Edit an Appointment e Manage Reminders e Delete an Appointment e Restrictions for Operations with Appointments Layout Customization e Switch Scheduler Views e Scheduler Grouping e Zoom the Scheduling Area Selection and Navigation e Navigate Dates in the Scheduler 2011 DevExpress Inc 534 Scheduler e Navigate Scheduler Resources e Navigate Scheduler Time Cells e Scheduler Navigation Buttons e Scheduler More Buttons 2011 DevExpress Inc 535 535 Scheduler s36 Appointment Management Create an Appointment Using the Context Menu The following items are available in the context menu invoked when you right click any region of the Scheduler except for areas covered by appointments E New Appointment New All Day Event New Recurring Appointment New Recurring Eve
290. ick to select another column Criteria operator Operand value Click bo change the current operator Click to specify a value ok canei Apply Remarks A filter condition group is a set of conditions combined by the same logical operator The following filter expression contains two groups combined by the logical OR operator Product Chang And Quantity gt 20 Or Product In Tofu Konbu And Quantity lt 100 In the Filter Editor it s represented as follows E Filter Builder Groupi be Product Equals Chang Quantity Is greater than 20 Groupe g H Product Is any of Tofu Konbuj Quantity Is less than 100 l Cancel Apply For step by step examples of creating filter criteria see Examples of Using the Filter Editor Add Conditions To add a condition to a logical group do one of the following e Focus any condition within the group or the group s logical operator and then press INSERT or ADD on the keyboard e Click the button for the group e Click the group s logical operator and select Add Condition To add a condition or a group of conditions that have been copied to the clipboard press CTRL V or SHIFT INSERT The new condition will be added to the focused group 2011 DevExpress Inc se Filter Editor so Delete Conditions To delete a condition do one of the following e Focus the condition and press DELETE or SUBTRACT e Click the button To
291. ide Dropdown Items To select the previous value press CTRL UP ARROW To select the next value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Note this feature is not applicable to all editors Edit Images 2011 DevExpress Inc 573 Tree List 574 To copy cut paste load and save images in image editors right click the image and select the required command via the context menu Cut Copy Paste a Delete gt Load a Save 2011 DevExpress Inc 574 Tree List 575 Data Presentation Show Summaries Totals in a Tree List To change the type of summary for a specific column or apply a summary do the following 1 Right click a region within a group footer or grid footer under a specific column A context menu displaying a list of supported summary types will be displayed Department pi Sales and Marketing 22 000 Finance 40 000 E Engineering 1 100 000 Mone All Modes 2 Select the required option from the context menu To calculate summaries against all nodes ensure that the All Nodes menu check item is checked To calculate summaries against root nodes only uncheck the All Nodes check item 2011 DevExpress Inc 575 Tree List 576 Sort Tree List Nodes To sort nodes by a column s values and replace existing sort conditions that are applied to the current or other columns click the target column s header until an Up or Down Arrow icon is displayed within the header The Up and Down Arrows indicate a
292. ied to other views at 7 Explorer style Click Apply and close the editor 7 In the last step you can set your report s Vertical Content Splitting option to Smart This will split the grid s columns precisely by their borders in the Print Preview The cross tab report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 252 Report Designer 253 1 551 60 1 205 00 2 389 50 14 624 25 276 30 3 525 60 eer 38 744 00 36 540 00 833 12 29 5048 60 112 00 3 420 00 5856 00 i 3518 40 19 642 55 TT 0 450 20 740 00 l 180 00 3132 00 85 40 176 70 1 187 50 006 39 70 1 087 52 842 00 421 00 603 60 2 680 00 575 25 3 FHA 75 114 00 sol 1 368 00 2 386 20 395 10 10 125 54 JE alala ou See Also Master Detail Report Detail Report Bands 2011 DevExpress Inc 253 Report Designer 254 Parameterized Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a report with parameters In this example we ll create two date time parameters to filter out orders which don t fall in the specified range from the report First create a report and bind it to a data source To add parameters and filter your report based on their values follow the steps below 1 In the Field List window right cli
293. ies are used to organize the list of report definitions This list is displayed by clicking on the top icon on the Reports block of the navigator or using the pull down menu item View Reports List A single report definition can show up under any number of categories Page 32 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Cusi 5 Won Oban rr Banking gt Click hereto filter by F Balance Sheel Dashboards ar Category ars grouped by datas Balance Sheet Parameters system Category Mame Gauges Income Indicators Banking Dashl Parameters Banking Dashboard For This Year Larry Dashboards 2c0recard All Dashboard at All Dashboards For This Year system Banking Dashl Banking Dash Banking Dashboard system Banking Dashboard For This Year system Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard system Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year system Banking Dashboard For This Year copy Banking Dashboard For This Year Larry Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition system Gauges Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition system Gauges Gauges system Income Income Scorecard Income Scorecard system Indicators Dashboard Definition system apres Clickto expand Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis system Indicators Balance or collapse the Balance Sheet Indicators system Indicators Profitabili group Profitability Analysis Indicators system Mj 4 Record 1 of 20 h Batch Groups
294. iew iioii reinen aaae aaa des vedic aaa a EA AE Sa Aea aE O AAA E EAE AOA aAa OAR AAE KAKAA KAEKA 154 Use the Hand TOOL In Print PrEVICW darida E a aA a a a a a 155 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 Contents 2011 DevExpress Inc Navigate in Print Preview Using BOOK aFkS ccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseeeeeeesseesenesseeeeeasseeseeesseeseeesseeseeesessonesseeseneneeesenes 156 Search for a Specific Text in Print Pre Vie Wx viccensecdenccecccscnsencenssccavsnescceseusscucdcesendnsseecresseebuiendeneavsassseeveudenssdsevnbesecusanexcucaue 157 Switch Print Preview Dis play MOOG iiiccccccecsscccccsscssccsceteecetesceanceccnnnsansvacesscunseesenctnntasonsereccennssseceiensandsesconcennsxestssceecnsassetetecs 158 Watermark and Background iiccsecnicicnscrscecucecacvectenssncoccaedsccecussuvccenasseecdnstenbetacxtencebassewooudsveecensdusocueesteutedssuvetesavseecsuseeoetansnduscuarseueens 160 Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print PreVieW ccccccsessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeesseeaeseeeeesseeaeneneeessaees 160 Remove a Watermark in Print Pre Vie W cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeseeesaeeeenesseeeeeasseeeeeesaeeeeeasaeesoeasseesenanaeeseneneeesenes 163 EXPO EIN arrested rest a ra San eve ct oe eta va eacwnten A A cots vecamuputencsuensetaas even coda vouaaranateiangetee auisteccoueirestexss ten seuennete oe 164 Exporting from Print Pre VIC Wi seca scostenteecccccwuescaccnccecestudse nacececccwes ta
295. ifferent files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page e Page range Define the pages which will be included in the result Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens e Sheet name Define the sheet name e Text export mode Choose whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLS format string if it is possible or embedded into cell values as plain text e Show grid lines Check if it s required to show grid lines in the resulting XLS file e Export hyperlinks Check if it s required to export hyperlinks See Also XLSX Specific Export Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 171 Print Preview 172 XLSX Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define XLSX specific export options using the following dialog ALSA Export Options Export mode Single file page by page Page range Loos f Sheet name Sheet Name Text export mode Value _ Show grid lines Export hyperlinks Goap core e Export mode Choose one of the available modes to export a document The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages The Single file page by page mode allows export of a document to a single file with each shown ina Separate sheet The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page e Page range Define the pages which will
296. igned to the control s edges when the control is aligned using snap lines To learn how to manage the position of multiple controls at one time refer to Change Element Layout in Your Report See Also Change Measurement Units for a Report Change Page Settings for a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 231 Report Designer 232 Change Measurement Units for a Report For your report you can choose its global Measure Units which can be either Hundredths of an Inch or Tenths of a Millimeter This can be specified either using the report s Smart Tag a Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source Data Member Data Adapter Filter String Print when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty HLH Detail Print Count Measure Units Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch Hundredths of an Inch F Tenths of a Millimeter Gets or sets the unit of measurement for the report This defines the basic measurement unit for all the unit related options of a report and its bands and controls such as location size border width etc And this determines the measurement unit of the report s Snap Grid See Also Controls Positioning Change Page Settings for a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 232 Report Designer 233 Change Page Settings for a Report In the Report Designer page settings of a report can be specified in o
297. ilable in your application e While navigating dates via the Go To Date dialog you can specify a view type to display a new time interval The following picture illustrates selecting the View type i GoTo Date Eaj Date 2 3 2009 Show In Day Calendar Day Calendar Work Week Calendar Week Calendar Month Calendar Timeline Calendar e The Scheduler selects a view mode automatically according to the date range selected in the Calendar To learn more about this capability refer to the Selecting Dates topic Available View Types e Day View This view provides the most detailed view of appointments for a certain day s e Work Week View This view displays appointments for the working days in a particular week e Week View 2011 DevExpress Inc sas Scheduler sao This view displays appointments for any given weekly period e Month also called Multi Week View The month view is the least detailed of the views and is designed to allow browsing and long term plans analysis This view positions the days one after another horizontally so that they form weeks while weeks are placed one under another e Timeline View This view plots appointments as horizontal bars along the timescales and provides a clearer overview for scheduling purposes See Also Selecting Dates 2011 DevExpress Inc sa Scheduler sso Scheduler Grouping The data can be grouped either by resources or by dates
298. ing Rules Collection Can Grow _ Can Shrink In the invoked dialog define the path to an RIF or TXT file containing a text of the announcement and click Open amp tNote Note that you can perform additional text formatting using the Formatting Toolbar 4 To repeat the created report 20 times select the Detail band and in the Property Grid set its Repeat Count when Data Source is Empty property to 20 And to make the announcement print on separate pages set the band s Page Break property to After the Band 2011 DevExpress Inc 238 Report Designer 239 Gets or sets a value that determines where to make a page break in respect to the given band The static report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result mema tempor incededunt ut fsbare emmma tempor miii ut eire et dive magna aiga Ut aim ad etdalane magna aiga Ui aiim ad ee ee m cs ee le ces cee Curent P Total Pag Zoom Fac See Also Table Report Label Report Multi Column Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 23 Report Designer 240 Table Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a table report which means that the report s data is arranged into a table like layout This feature should not be confused with the master detail report or cross tab report To create a table report follow the steps below 1 Create a new report 2 Bind the
299. ing data sources by clicking on the Data Sources block on the Navigator or choosing the pull down menu item Edit Data Sources The list of Data Sources will be displayed as shown in the next figure Ci Data source List Data Source Mame os Table Query View Dashboard Details m Dashboards and Gauges Dashboards and Gauges a Filter 1 sel_Filter1 m Filter sel Filter Filter3 sel Filters Filter sel Filker4 Filters sel Filter5 m Filter m Filter Filter sel Filter sel Filter sel Filter m Gauge Definitions gauge _Definitions m Indicator Category Indicator Categories m Indicators Indicator Definitions m Parameters Parameter Definitions m test ProfikAndloss NetIncome_ByYear Page 10 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual With this list you can scroll though the list using the record selectors on the bottom of the form This navigation bar contains other buttons as well Just move your mouse over the buttons to see what function they perform You can also delete a data source here by selecting the data source and then clicking on the button The list can be refreshed with the Refresh button You would probably use this after you have edited a source using the Edit View Data Source button and then returned to this form You can copy an existing data source or create a new one using the buttons on the bottom of the form When you create a new data source the following form will be displ
300. ing is useful for data bound controls located between upper and lower controls which are allowed to resize depending on their contents e Keep Together e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Sizing Defines the sizing mode of a contained image To quickly adjust the image size and position within the control click its Smart Tag and choose Sizing system Drawing Bitmap Data Binding None aB Image URL Normal sizing Anchor Vertically Normal Stretch Image A Center Image Zoom Image Squeeze The image sizing settings are briefly described in the following table The image is placed in the upper left corner of the control The image is clipped if it is larger than the Picture Box which contains it Stretch Image The image within the control is stretched or shrunk to fit the size of a Picture Box The Picture Box size is adjusted to that of the image it contains The image is displayed in the center of the control If the image is larger than the Picture Box the outer edges are clipped 2011 DevExpress Inc 350 Report Designer 351 Zoom Image The image is sized proportionally without clipping for best fit into the control Squeeze If the dimensions of a Picture Box exceed that of the image it contains the image is centered and s
301. ing pages Construction group e Chart Type Page e Appearance Page e Series Page e Data Page Presentation group e Chart Page e Diagram Page e Panes Page e Axes Page e Series Views Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 10 Charting 1 e Point Labels Page e Chart Titles Page e Legend Page e Annotations Page To navigate through the Chart Wizard s pages use the navigation bar or lt lt Previous ang Next gt gt buttons Finish To complete the chart use the button and the Cancel button to cancel all changes 2011 DevExpress Inc Charting Chart Type Page Tasks e Choose a chart type Page Elements Chart type Filter Chart Type Radar and Polar Series All Chart Types Bar Series Point and Line Series Pie Series Funnel Series Area Series Radar and Polar Series Range Bar and Gantt Series Radar Point Radar Line Radar Area Polar Point Polar Line Polar Area Chart type selector Choose a chart type you want to use To filter chart types by their groups use the values inthe drop down box Chart type selector Contains icons representing chart types Click an icon to choose the appropriate chart type Chart type filter Filters chart types available in the Chart type selector The following chart filters are available e All Chart Types e Bar Series Bar Stacked Bar 100 Stacked Bar 3D Bar 3D Stacked Bar 3D 100 Stacked Bar and Manh
302. ion Pane To minimize the Navigation Pane click the Minimize button Minimize Button Mail lt 3 Inbox LA Outbox A Sent Items al Deleted Items GA Drafts SHARE Display the Contents of the Minimized Navigation Pane To display the contents of a minimized Navigation Pane you can restore it to its normal state or display its contents while it s in the minimized state To restore the minimized Navigation Pane to its normal size click the Maximize button 2011 DevExpress Inc ona Navigation Bars 115 Maximize Button A Inbox E Outbox A Sent Items al Deleted Items LA Drafts To display the contents of the group that is currently hidden do the following 1 Click the dropdown button at the bottom of the Navigation Pane Show More Buttons Show Fewer Buttons 4dd or Remove Buttons yj Mail Sal Calendar 243 Contacts ba Motes 2 Select the required group in the menu that opens 2011 DevExpress Inc Navigation Bars one Show More Buttons Show Fewer B Jttons 4dd or Remove Buttons 4 Mail s Calendar 33 Contacts ba Motes 2011 DevExpress Inc ne Navigation Bars Navigation Bar Expand Groups in the Navigation Bar That Can Display Multiple Groups at One Time Windows Explorer Bar style navigation bars can display multiple groups at one time as in the image below Expanded Group Inbox Outbox Sent Items Deleted
303. ired Grandma s Boysenberry Spread In the Property Grid the Detail Band s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band Font Specifies the font settings for the controls contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the band during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the controls contained within the band 2011 DevExpress Inc 397 Report Designer 398 Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the controls contained within the band as well as to assi
304. is expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 386 Report Designer 387 Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the
305. is simply a link whose target is located within the current document which allows you to establish easy navigation through a report In this example we place a link at the bottom of each group leading to the beginning of the report To demonstrate this feature we ll use a report with grouping similar the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To create a report with cross references do the following 1 Drop a label onto the created ReportHeader band which will serve as the report s headline Click the label to type the desired contents into it Then in the Property Grid set its Name property to reportTop T a ReportHeader one band per report 2 TO accompany the existing Group Header with the corresponding Footer in the Group and Sort Panel check the Show Footer option Then drop a label onto it As it will be the link change its Text to Top of Report and apply the desired formatting to it e g the blue color and underlined text Set its Navigation Target property to _self Then if you click the drop down list of the Navigation URL property you can see the controls available in your report Choose the one named reportTop GroupFooter1 E E Gls label3 Label re ae ot m Bai E Navigation Bookmark Navigation Target Navigation URL Parent Bookmark Navigation URL label 1 be label 4 The report with cross references is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab
306. ist of dashboards and select one The Text Numeric and Date parameter tabs are for report definition specific parameters You enter a parameter name and value There are no pull down lists for either parameter name or value for Text or Numeric types since these are created here and again are specific to the report definition The operator is always When you use custom filters you can use an operator other than Page 25 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual The Date parameter tab allows you to enter a parameter that can be a specific date or a dynamic date or date range A specific date is exactly that a date that will not change If you enter 12 31 2010 it will always be that date whenever the report is run If you need to create a specific date range you will need to create two date parameters like Start_Date and End_Date and set your report design filter accordingly Categories Batch Groups Parameters Choose Specific Date Dynamic Date Parameter Mame no spaces Date Range Specific Date Murer ic E oate_Range Dynamic dates can change depending on when the report is run Examples of that is This Year Last Month etc When the report is run the dates are calculated based on the current date This is the most used type of date parameter To choose the type of date parameter add a new parameter with the button enter a parameter name no spaces and the either press the
307. it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it e Start Band Determines a band in which the control starts drawing e Start Point Determines the starting point froma band s upper left corner where the control starts drawing e Width Specifies the line s width in report measurement units 2011 DevExpress Inc 390 Report Designer EN Cross band Box The Cross band Box control allows you to draw a rectangle through several bands This can be useful if it is required to visually encompass a section consisting of multiple band areas i PageHeader one band per page E gt amp E el Detail H E E E Another cross band control available is the Cross band Line In the Property Grid the Cross band Box control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview
308. it is possible to limit the number of visible resources and then scroll between them There is an embedded Resource Navigator control which allows you to scroll between resources The Resource Navigator control is composed of a scrollbar and a set of buttons It may be shown horizontally on the bottom line of the Scheduler control with buttons in the right corner or vertically on the right side buttons at the bottom The position of the control is chosen automatically It is vertical in Day and Week views if appointments are grouped by dates and horizontal in other view modes The mode of operation is rather straightforward you can click the buttons to move back and forth through the list of resources one by one or straight to the first or last one on the list The buttons with plus and minus signs increase or decrease the number of displayed resources by one Sia ene Seam Tuesday July 12 Friday July 15 Tuesday July Friday July 15 et 00 11 00 AM 230 EM fn o Wed nn i3 Saturday Jul 16 Wed July 13 Saturday Jul 16 10 00 AM 10 00 AM 5 00 PM m Sunday July 17 Sunday July 17 iu poCcek Resource Navigator ScrollBar Resource Navigator Buttons 2011 DevExpress Inc 554 Scheduler 555 Navigate Scheduler Time Cells The following table contains the typical navigation operations Clicking a cell Moves focus to the clicked cell selects it UP ARROW DOWN ARROW LEFT ARROW RIGHT
309. ix or postfix to a value obtained from a database or even bind a control to multiple data fields at one time Mail merge is available for the following controls e Bar Code e Check Box e Label e Rich Text e Table Cell e Zip Code To embed dynamic data into a control s static content type in data field names surrounded by square brackets E Dear FirstName LastName J am gladto notify you that the ProductName you y purchased on OrderDate MM ddiyyyy has been shipped g Dear Nancy Davolio lam gladto notify you that the Chai you purchased on 09 20 2008 has been shipped To learn how values formatting can be applied to the embedded data fields e g for them to be treated as currency or date time content refer to Change Value Formatting of Report Elements 2011 DevExpress Inc 196 Report Designer 197 Add Calculated Fields to a Report This document demonstrates how to add a calculated fieldto a report The main purpose of calculated fields is to perform pre calculations of virtually any level of complexity over data fields To learn how to easily perform simple calculations within a single data field refer to Add Totals to a Report In the Report Designer a calculated field is similar to an ordinary data field e g you can bind controls to it and group sort and filter your report against it To add a calculated field to your report follow the instructions below 1 To create a calcula
310. k the ellipsis button for its Formatting Rules property and in the invoked dialog apply the same rule to this band as well Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result In our example you can see that the first category isn t shown So the conditional formatting was applied properly Products by Categories Category 2 Aniseed Syrup Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Genen Shouyu Gula Malacca Sirop d rable Vegle spread Category 3 Pavlova sir Rodney s Marmalade om See Also 2011 DevExpress Inc 283 Report Designer 284 Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Conditionally Change a Label s Text 2011 DevExpress Inc 284 Report Designer 285 Conditionally Change a Label s Text This tutorial demonstrates how to change a label s text if a certain condition is met without using scripts To conditionally change a label s text do the following 1 Create a new report and bind it to a data source 2 To creat
311. ke the image below E Filter Builder OK Jf Cancel J Apply 3 Select a column Now to filter against the Discount column click the condition s link displaying a column name Product Name This will display the list of available columns Select the Discount column in this list 2011 DevExpress Inc et Filter Editor 62 E Filter Builder Order ID Product Marne ProductIo Quantity Unit Price E Filter Builder 4 Select a comparison operator To select the gt comparison operator click the condition s operator link Equals to display the list of Supported comparison operators and select the required operator i Filter Builder Fa And Equals Does not equal gt Is greater than ES Filter Builder Is greater than or equal to and Is less than amp Is less than or equal to A Is between E Is nok between O Is blank Is not blank Is any of eos Is none of The comparison operator list displays only those operators that are supported by the current column s data type For instance the Discount column is of the numeric type and the operator list doesn t display the Begins with operator and other operators that are related to strings 5 Enter a value Now click the value box and enter a comparison value 0 05 E Filter Builder Arid Discount Is greater than or equal to xE 2011 DevExpress Inc
312. l Right z n B Female 65 years and olde F l Limits E E a Vertical 100 E Horizontal 3 sE m F o Margins G a ap All uE 60 30 0 United States Russia Mexico United Kingdom Brazil Japan Germany From wiw qeonive com Customize thelegend s properties Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a Chart s layout Note that you can select the legend directly on the chart preview area 2011 DevExpress Inc 35 a Series 1 a Series 2 Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e General Specifies legend visibility direction alignment spacing limits and margins e Appearance Specifies legend background color and background image e Marker Specifies visibility and dimensions of legend markers e Text Specifies legend text antialiasing color and font e Border Specifies visibility color and thickness of legend borders e Shadow Specifies visibility color and size of the legend shadow 2011 DevExpress Inc 36 Charting Annotations Page Tasks e Create and customize image and text annotations Page Elements Chart preview area Annotations Annotation selector Population Age Structure S00 zoi 260 240 220 200 150 160 140 120 Wn C 2 cc 2 at 5 3 O m amp 100 a0 60 40 20 0 United States Brazil Japan Mexico United Kingdom From www geoniv
313. l ReportHeader one band per report Products by Categories GroupFooterl Group Sorting Summary Keep Together _ Repeat Every Page 2 Then in the invoked Group Sorting Summary Editor check the Enabled option and specify a field and Summary function against which the group should be sorted Group Sorting Summary Editor If required you also can change the default sorting order from descending to ascending and choose 2011 DevExpress Inc 306 Report Designer to ignore null values Click OK to apply the changes and switch to the Preview Tab to view the result Products by Categories See Also Category T Longlife Tofu Category Aniseed Syrup Louisiana Hot Spiced Okra Category 3 Gravad lax R gede sild Category 3 Sir Rodney s Scones Chocolade Maxilaku Scottish Longbreads Category 4 Queso Cabrales Gorgonzola Telno Mascarpone Fabiol Add Totals to a Report Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report 10 00 10 00 10 00 17 00 bef O0 26 00 9 50 39 50 10 00 12 75 20 00 12 50 99 29 21 00 12 50 32 00 65 50 Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Add Page Numbers for Groups 2011 DevExpress Inc 307 Report Designer 308 Cancel Printing If a Report Does
314. l donian E E O E EE E E 475 CHECK TE XE SOS NG cinien annaa a a eraa Ea aE E E a aa Eaa a aE a 476 Undo and Redo Last Operati NnS sararan iinei e a aaia aiai aa Aaa EAA ar EE aa Uaa aaia 478 POP IM AtCUING PE EE N E EE E O E E A E NE N O E E A E ET 479 2011 DevExpress Inc Contents FOr aC TEN a ted aol anlet E E E E a 479 Forma Paragrap hS aa cons eadacunyscvuscoss cpcosuutoecous erusutseunueeae ysctecssanteecouseedecnaysevesstaeeudeaas 481 PT ONY OVO Soca ad seecey So aenntre ses caevencees Gaumesaceneseepenae socsmeeratecansccucsamevuee an sanaenuacens ante seconauueenabeaecussenn tanta yeta doe weeseatuneetatuaeninss 483 LISIS SE i ecatanvarveaccuenecesssacte saree E E E a 484 PURI VID CFC CLES CS a E a 484 Bulleted CISTS rete aaa oa eaten a cue ces ene we wyseae so aenca cuss ateven sexx usscnsenecssuurousouseesnecscsseecsuscencss euros ctuseatacuaventuSeonsenecass 488 INOUE NV OUTAS tS fe obs ctezetic oon vaxeatipaae see E tgsnesc ces sevaneceauntessussscwtos texte oon aavvecuauentutanskned gunustucen vadeatuaanseeseusmsemters 492 MARIOS cscssaecotetsnceaseateren xspeetossvanwenaaande asses e E A Couuiudreuen fraleesaaanenmenicaracastarenavvecutectaneenostcaddsesuereens 497 BES US Ay WA acids ascites areata una seduce valve noth cue ease es ecueenaes trubudamecsstemcesuasnccee E 497 Add and Remove Table Borde rs cccccescseeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesneeeeeesseeeseesneeeesesseeeeeesseseeeesaeeeeeesseeeseesseseeeassesesee
315. lade Gumbar Gummibarchen schoggi Schokolade faanse koeken Tarte au sucre Page Numbers for Groups See Also 4 50 46 00 f ia 0 29 40 O00 43 90 03 90 9 20 01 00 31 23 43 90 9 50 49 30 224 13 Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result Count the Number of Records in a Report or a Group Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report Add Calculated Fields to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc zo Report Designer 211 Add Totals to a Report With Report Designer you can force a data bound control to calculate one of the standard summary functions Average Summary Count Running Summary Percentage Max or Min To calculate summaries totals within a report follow the instructions below 1 To display the result at the bottom of a report the Report Footer band should be present To add it right click anywhere over the report s area and in the invoked Context Menu select Insert Band ReportFooter TopMargin Insert Detail Report ReportHeader oom f PageHeader Er Properties GroupHeader TTT Tittttit Detail GroupFooter B PageFooter BottomMargin 2 Click the field for which a summary will be calculated to select it Then hold down CTRL and drag the field onto the Report Footer area to create an exact copy of the Label that will display the summary v E Detail E
316. lbar rh to o E a E Computer Organize Je Favorite 4 Hard Disk Drives 2 E Desktop Local Disk C d Downloads Gy 35 Recent Places 165 GB free of 224 GB Local Disk D ee Pe aan 241 GB free of 241 GB B Documents a Music 4 Devices with Removable Storage 1 select a file to preview E Pictures G a DVD RW Drive E Videos it Computer thi Network File name The Rich Text Editor enables you to insert graphics of the following types e Bitmap bmp dib e JPEG File Interchange Format jpg jpeg e Portable Network Graphics png e Graphics Interchange Format gif e Tagged Image Format tif tiff e Microsoft Enhanced Metafile emf e Windows Metafile wmf 2011 DevExpress Inc s30 Rich Text Editor 531 Insert Page Numbers Insert a Page Number 1 Click the Header or Footer button on the Header amp Footer toolbar For more information see Header and Footer HELE Header Edit the header of the document The content in the header will appear at the top of each printed page Footer Edit the footer of the document The content in the footer will appear at the bottom of each printed page 2 Point to anywhere in the header or footer area where you want to insert the page number 3 To add page numbers click the Page Number button on the Header amp Footer toolbar Page Number Insert page numbe
317. le Fields Selection and Navigation e Select Cells in Pivot Tables 2011 DevExpress Inc no Pivot Table 120 Data Editing Edit Data in Pivot Tables Edit Cell Values To edit a cell value click the cell and specify a new value Beverages Percent OF Colu a Sales Andrew Fuller 40 248 25 15 14 850 67 14 21 455 68 13 19 642 55 7 10 125 54 10 8 053 16 5 44 757 40 33 622 38 _ 20 17 897 85 21 699 91 13 50 308 21 27 768 70 17 sasaa sass j a 46 599 35 i z 28 568 91 17 Robert King 27 963 83 y a ee M 14 518 98 9 Steven Buchanan 11 000 52 RS a ta 4 809 80 3 G4 1 o a 257 868 16 1009 106 047 05 a009 167 357 15 100 Cell values are specified via editors of different types e g text editor calculator etc depending on the cell data type and pivot table settings Edit Expressions Specific columns allow you to set a regular or Boolean expression which will be used to calculate their values Clicking the column header invokes the Expression Editor used to specify the expression 2011 DevExpress Inc 12 Pivot Table 121 117 260 f Expression editor lif Quarter 4 lif Extended Price gt 40000 600 400 0 To learn more about using the Expression Editor see Expression Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc 121 Pivot Table Data Presentation Sort
318. le via scripts Design e Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Height Specifies the band s height in report units Note Note that this property is tied to the report s Margins Top or Margins Bottom property so that changing this property s value will cause the appropriate Margin value to be changed and vice versa e Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in report measurement units which is to be preserved within the band when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines 2011 DevExpress Inc ao Report Designer ato Detail Report Band for Master Detail Reports The Detail Report band is a type of band used to incorporate one report into another in master detail reports It is quite different from the Detail band since it holds the whole detail report in a master detail report layout and therefore can contain other types of bands within it v E Detail CategoryName E T Detail Report Categories Categories Products ij ReportHeader Y GroupHeader _ CategonesProducts Discontinued LJ v El Detaili CategonesProducts ProductName E gt E ReportFooter 7 ReportFooter one band per report There can be an unlimited number of Detail Report bands nested inside one another b al ReportHeader one band per report Detail 7 Detail Report a ReportHeader gt E Detail Detail Report B
319. lear Filter Sy Filter Editor Best Fit fall columns The Customization Form will be displayed listing hidden columns and bands if any Drag a column header here bo group by khak column Supplier Tan Devling 2 Drag the required column band from the Customization Form onto the column band header panel and drop it at a specific position Drag a column header here bo group by thak column Supplier Product Ma m Antonio del Valle Saavedra Omit Price Customi Product Mame a 1 Tan Devling Note When a band is hidden together with its child bands and columns headers of hidden children are not displayed within the Customization Form Change the Visibility of Fields in Card Views 1 Click the Customize button 2011 DevExpress Inc s Grid Customize Burton Customize Model SLS00 Roadster Trademark Mercedes Benz Hyperlink hktpi UAW mercedes com Picture Description Al kA m w Category Sports a Model CLESS 4MG Cabriolet Trademark Mercedes Benz Hyperlink http Uw mercedes com Picture Description Al 2 To hide specific fields clear corresponding check boxes in the opened window To display hidden items enable corresponding check boxes Custom D ae Sort Filter e Trademark Sort 7 Model Aa _ Category Sort Filter Description x Hyperlink __ Sort Filter e Ficture Fil
320. lect Best Fit all columns Resize Card Fields in Layout Views To resize cards or card fields do the following 1 Click the Customization button displayed within the header panel 2011 DevExpress Inc 93 Record 2 of 9 a Title Sales Represent Title Vice President 5 First Mame Nancy First Mame Andrew Last Mame Dawolio Last Mame Fuller Contact Info Contact Info Address Address City Seattle City Tacoma Postal Code 96122 Region Wh Postal Code 96401 Region WA Country USA Country USA fs nial anna The LayoutView Customization window will open Layoutview Customization Template Card view Layout Hidden It Templatecard idden Items Title it Empty Space tem Label No image data First Mame Last Name dL Separator L l Motes Contact Info Ir Home Phone Address ia ReportsTo City O TithkeOfCourtesy Postal Code Country 4 Customize the card layout using drag and drop and customization menu and preview data in the view Layout page 2 Resize the template card and or fields within the template card as required 3 Close the Customization window to apply the changes 2011 DevExpress Inc oo Selection and Navigation Locate Grid Records In Grid Views you can locate a data row by typing the initial characters of the values contained in this row To locate the nearest row that contains a specific value in a specific
321. lendar Position the caret at the portion of a date time value that needs to be changed To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Numeric Values To increment the value press CTRL UP ARROW To decrement the value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Change Values of Cells That Provide Dropdown Items To select the previous value press CTRL UP ARROW To select the next value press CTRL DOWN ARROW Note this feature is not applicable to all editors Edit Images To copy cut paste load and save images in image editors right click the image and select the required command via the context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc Data Presentation Sort Grid Rows Sort Data in Grid Views To sort records by a column s values and replace existing sort conditions that are applied to the current or other columns click the target column s header until an Up or Down Arrow icon is displayed within the header The Up and Down Arrows indicate ascending and descending sort orders respectively Order ID To sort records by a column s values while preserving existing sort conditions do one of the following e Click a column header while holding the SHIFT key down until an Up or Down Arrow icon is displayed within the header e Right click a column header and select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu that appears L Drag a column header here to group by that column Supplie
322. lick OK Click Next to proceed to the following page 5 On the next page select data members tables or views from your database Note that if you choose several tables e g to create a master detail report the Report Designer creates a data relationship between them if possible 2011 DevExpress Inc 226 Report Designer 227 Report Wizard Choose the table or view The table or view you choose determines which columns will be available in your report What item do you want to access Available item s Selected item A Products To accomplish data source creation click Finish After performing the steps above the report s Data Source Data Member and Data Adapter properties are defined 2011 DevExpress Inc 227 Report Designer 228 Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source Data Member Data Adapter Filter String Print when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count Measure Units Formatting Rule Sheet Style Sheet Watermark AARIA s TH A W a a gogolo o me oone And the Field List reflects the structure of the report s data source GHE myDataset A This means that the report has been successfully bound to the data To learn how report controls can be assigned to data fields refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data 2011 DevExpress Inc 228 Report Designer 22 Con
323. ll then the Cell s height will be decreased to the height of its text If there are other controls below the current Cell they will be moved up to fillthe gap Note that if a control overlaps the shrinking Cell by even one pixel it will not be pushed up by the shrinking Cell 2011 DevExpress Inc 361 Report Designer 362 e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of a Cell can be horizontally split across pages In other words if a Cell occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Cell should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Cell s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Cell will be split despite this property s value e Multiline When this property is set to Yes a Cell processes newline characters found in the text to start a new line For example when editing a Cell s text you can insert a new line by pressing ENTER and in this case the Multiline property will be automatically set to Yes e Process Duplicates Determines the control s behavior when its data source contains consecutive repeating records They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave Suppressed except for the first entry Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the repeated records Suppress and Shrink e Proce
324. llows custom labels to be defined e Strips Allows you to create strips define their visibility name limits appearance etc e Constant Lines Allows you to create constant lines define their visibility name value legend text appearance title etc e Scale Breaks Allows you to enable automatic and or create custom scale breaks and define their appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc 28 Series Views Page Tasks e Customize the view type specific properties of series e Customize the appearance and border settings of series e Add or remove financial indicators Fibonacci indicators trendlines and regression lines and customize their properties Page Elements Chart preview area Series selector Series Views Series 2 Ea Series 1 a F A Series 2 D T Series 3 z E Series 4 C1 Equal bar width a Width oE e E Distance 4 0 H a i z 3 Distance px 14 m g Linked Elements T Axis Xi Primary AxisX an a Axis Y Primary Axis a Pane De fault Pane SJOJEIIPUT peung SAL Puad saul Uoissaibay Customize series view properties of the selected series Note that you may selecta series to be modified on the chart preview Options tabs Chart preview area 2011 DevExpress Inc 29 Previews a Chart s layout Note that you can select a series to be modified directly in the chart preview area a Series 1 Bowes 2 Series selector
325. lly This is done using the Windows Task Scheduler The Report Manager has automatically created a batch job file as listed in the message box and pasted the name of the file to the clipboard for creating a scheduled task using Windows Since there are so many different versions of Windows now and each has it s own interface the details of how to do this is not covered here You can refer to numerous online references about Scheduled Tasks For Windows XP Users press the Start button All Programs Accessories System Tools and Scheduled Tasks You should set the task to only run for a period of time sufficient to process all your reports Itis suggested that you run the reports at night either before or after backups are done For example backups are run at lam and usually run for hour Start the Report Processor after at 2 30am and let it run for 3 hours Then schedule all your reports to run between 2 30am and 5 30am Repository The Repository is the default location where reports are saved after being processed by the Report Processor The repository is set using the Report Manager preferences form as previously discussed To access the Repository click on the Repository block on the Navigator or choose the pull down item View Repository If you set the web preference Create Home Page to yes an index htm file in the repository is created so the repository can be a local static web site for reports and the Page 45
326. look like this FilterString Editor Visual And Order Date Is greater than or equal to FromDate Order Date Is less than or equal to 7ToDate The parameterized report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and in the Parameters section define the required values and click Submit 2011 DevExpress Inc 201 Report Designer 202 AA ae Parameters y11995 H 01 11 95 01 12195 01 12 95 01 13 95 01 16195 10370 10371 10372 10373 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379 10380 10381 10382 10383 Switzerland France Brazil lreland Poland USA Canada UK Sweden Brazil lreland Venezuela Austna UK 195 68 1 17 0 45 890 79 124 12 20 12 20 39 22 21 5 03 39 03 7 99 34 24 Zoom Factor 100 See Also Add Calculated Fields to a Report Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 202 Report Designer 203 Change Value Formatting of Report Elements To apply value formatting for a data bound control s content e g for it to be treated as currency or date time content locate this control click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Format String entry Then in the invoked format string editor choose one of the predefined formatting styles or specify a custom one Edit Text Text labeli Data Binding myDataSet Produc
327. ls placed here will be printed incorrectly HEERA EEA A i 4 Font Times New Roman Foreground Colo MJ ControlText Formatting Rule Collection Formatting Rules Collection E Padding 0 0 0 0 Page Color C white i H a oleD bD ata4dapterl ye dgl ji Preview HTML view Scripts xtraReport1 PaperKind Letter Zoom Factor 100 3l Designer 9 Preview d l scripts i E Group and Sort T The parameter list in the report design will include your Global Parameters My Parameters and any report definition specific parameters NOTE Since report designs are shared by different report definitions it 1s important to be consistent with parameter name between report definitions that use the same report design Itis easier to define one report definition and copy it when sharing a report design Categories You saw Categories mentioned on the Report Definition Details form already Categories allow you to group reports when displaying them for user selection You can edit the list of Categories by clicking on the Categories box on the Navigator or by using the pull down menu Edit Categories Page 31 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual n BEpONI Eisunes erji Category 1of 10 i44 44 4 gt gt bi x You can sort and filter this list To add a new entry simply add it to the bottom of the list The next figure shows how categor
328. ly if the region occupied by them forms a rectangle Otherwise the Group command is not available when right clicking the selection As a result a new group is created Emplovee ID T Birth Date Hire Date You can subsequently rename the group and customize its contents using drag and drop and context menus if required Rename Groups Do the following 1 Right click the group s caption and select Rename 2011 DevExpress Inc 106 Layout Manager Employee ID gt Reset Layout Birth Dy 425 Rename ate T Hide Text E Text Position d a Ungroup LJ Create EmptySpace Item Create Tabbed Group 2 Type a new name and press ENTER Change Group Content To customize the layout of controls within a group use drag and drop Ungroup Elements To ungroup elements right click the group s caption and select Ungroup Employee ID Reset Layout Birth Dy 425 Rename bte T Hide Text E Text Position d g Ungroup LJ Create EmptySpace Item LD Create Tabbed Group 2011 DevExpress Inc 107 107 Layout Manager 108 Create and Delete Tabbed Groups To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Combine Layout Items into a Tab Control 1 Select a layout item that is to be added to a tab control by clicking it You can select multiple items simultaneously by clicking them while holding t
329. m the Custom Web or System palettes See Also Remove a Watermark in Print Preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 162 Print Preview Remove a Watermark in Print Preview To remove a watermark from a document invoke the Watermark dialog Click Clear All then click OK to save changes and close the dialog See Also Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print Preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 163 163 Print Preview EZE Exporting Exporting from Print Preview There are two options available for a document being exported to e Export Document to a File on Disk e Send Exported File via E Mail Export Document to a File on Disk To export a document and save the resulting file on your hard drive do one of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow near the Export Document button Lal e On the File menu choose the Export Document item Choose the required format from the invoked list HTML File MHT File RTF File ALS File ALSA File CSV File Text File Image File Then you may be prompted to define format specific options See corresponding help topics in this documentation for details e g PDF Specific Export Options Once you ve specified exporting options the Save As dialog appears allowing you to enter the file name Then the following message will be invoked Click Yes if you want to preview the exported file Send Exported File via E Mail To send the resulting PDF file via e mail
330. mage Currently the Bar Code control supports only linear 1D symbologies They are listed in the following table Codabar The Codabar is an old format that uses discrete self checking symbology capable of encoding 16 different characters plus an additional 4 start stop characters You should also specify the Start and Stop Symbols and Wide Narrow Ratio properties Code 11 also known as USD 8 was developed as a high density numerical only symbology The symbology is discrete and is able to encode the numbers 0 through to 9 the dash symbol and Start stop characters Codei28s Code 128 has been widely implemented It is a high density symbology which permits encoding messages of arbitrary lengths of any character of the ASCII character set The symbology includes a checksum digit for verification You should also specify the Character Set The recommended setting is Auto Charset 2011 DevExpress Inc 370 Report Designer Code39 Code39Extended Code93 Code93 Extended 2011 DevExpress Inc 371 Code 39 is also known as 3 of 9 Code and USD 3 It can encode uppercase letters A through Z digits O through 9 and several special characters like the Sign The Calculate a Checksum and Wide Narrow Ratio which should be in a range of 2 2 3 properties can also be specified This is an extension of Code 39 also known as Full ASCII Code 39 It is capable of encoding all 128 ASCII characters
331. master detail report with this wizard Click Next to proceed to Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report 2011 DevExpress Inc az Report Designer aza Step 4 Choose Columns to Display in Your Report Purpose Choose fields attributes whose data will be displayed in your report The selected fields and corresponding captions will be automatically added to your report arranged one under another Page Interface The list on the left hand side shows all available fields attributes To select the required fields double click them or drag them to the list box on the right hand side Another way to select fields is to use arrow buttons to move them back and forth Note that you can move multiple fields at once To do this you first need to select them by clicking while holding CTRL or SHIFT or by using SHIFT UP ARROW or SHIFT DOWN ARROW shortcuts Report Wizard Your report can display any of the columns available inthe dataset Choose columns to display in your report aa C Which columns do you want to display in your report Available fields Fields to display in a report E Discontinued 2 EAN13 E ProductiD E QuantityPerUnit E ReorderLevel E UnitsOnOrder E SuppierID cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Note To continue or finish report creation you must select at least one field Result You can stop the wizard at this step by clicking Finish In this case y
332. ment Center Indent oF Color E 128 128 128 Font Tahoma 14pt Regular Antialiasing Word Wrap Max Lines Count 0 H J4 y 0 p Y20P HEYI Y A very lengthy chart title which demonstrates the word wrap feature 4 V d E an 4 8 wW d J O p v _ 4 i dee E a U lt Add chart titles to be displayed within a chart Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout Note that you can select chart titles to be modified in the chart preview area directly 2011 DevExpress Inc 33 Charting aa Chart Title Chart Subtitle Titles management section Allows you to add or remove titles from the titles list and choose a title to be customized Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e Text Sets a text for the selected chart title Note that the basic HTML formatting is supported for chart titles e General Specifies a title s visibility alignment and font options and determines whether the word wrapping is enabled for a title 2011 DevExpress Inc 34 Charting 35 Legend Page Tasks e Customize chart legend s properties Page Elements Chart preview area a oi Population Age Structure a E i Data estimate for mid 2000 Direction TopToBottom Male 0 14 years fat F Male 15 64 years Alignment a B Male 65 years and older Female 0 14 years ae np Lv S Female 15 64 years Horizonta
333. more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL Rtf and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Lines Provides access to the Text property of the control allowing you to input multiple lines of static text Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field Text Allows you to define a line of static text to be displayed To type several lines of text use the Lines 2011 DevExpress Inc 347 Report Designer EEJ property Note that when the control is selected in the designer you may simply start typing the text and it will be automatically entered into the in place editor If the current report has a data source the Rtf property instead of Text can be bound to a data field obtained from the data
334. must be wrapped Country France in apostrophes Name O Neil If a string contains an apostrophe the apostrophe must be doubled Date time constants Date time constants must be OrderDate gt 1 1 2009 wrapped in True Represents the Boolean True InStock True value False Represents the Boolean False InStock False value Represents a null reference one Region that does not refer to any object See Also Expression Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc se Filter Editor Filter Editor This section describes the capabilities provided by the Filter Editor which allows users to visually build filters E gt Filter Editor And Topics in this section e Filter Data via the Filter Editor e Examples of Using the Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc Filter Editor se Filter Data via the Filter Editor Filter Editor The Filter Editor is used to edit filter criteria To create and customize filter criteria use the and buttons embedded into the control and context menus supported by the editor s elements Logical operator combining conditions Adds a new condition Removes this condition Click to change the current operator and addiremove conditions and groups of conditions E Filter Builder Filter conditions a Unit Price Equals 14 00 combined into a grow grop i Product Name Begins with 4 a Discount Is greater than 10 Column Cl
335. n cqColor1 cqColor2 cqColor3 Items underlined must have a BeforePrint script that calls ACE The Script to Clipboard button will assist with the necessary code If a report band is passed then output only goes to the band controls and inputs will come from band controls first and then if necessary other controls on the report You access the scripts by pressing the scripts button on the bottom of the layout window lt 3 Report Designer Uasiuuarids yyy oa E Bx ge oen SY Om aaa zl gt Choose the control from this EEEE m t dropdown list dad cqGaugeImage Picture Box Before Print 2 Validate Report Explorer E 3 xtraReportl Private Sub cqGaugeImage BeforePrint ByVal sender As Object ByVal e As E topMarginBand1 System Drawing Printing Pr intEventargs 8 izi ReportHeader HH PageHeader gt GroupHeader1 a detailBand1 Ag cqGauge A cqGaugeFilters The highlighted text is pasted ol ee after pressing the Script to G Report Explorer Clipboard button v lel LJ Esz Property Grid cqGaugeImage Picture Box BB Appearance Background Colo C Transparent Border Color HB ControlText Border Width 1 Borders Left Right GY ad a wd Designer F Preview Je HTML view cqGaugelmage Loc 0 40 Size 240 225 Zoom Factor 100 4 Group and Sort Choose the control and the Before Print event The highlighted text is the text
336. n a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target 2011 DevExpress Inc 354 Report Designer 355 property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 355 Report Designer 356 Table The Table control is designed to arrange information in a tabular layout It may contain any number of Rows comprised of individual Cells Both Rows and Cells can be selected and customized individually In most aspects a Cell is similar to a Label but can also contain other controls e g Picture Box or Rich Text _ tableCell1 tableCell tableCell3 tableCell4 tableCell5 tableCell6 When a Table is dropped onto a band from the Toolbox it has one row and three columns If you click and drag over several bands the resulting table will be split by the bands into several tables This creates a table header and the detail table with one mouse mo
337. n buttons are displayed if there are no currently visible appointments within the Scheduler control area If there are appointments that refer to a previous or successive date the Previous Appointment and Next Appointment navigation buttons provide the capability to navigate to the corresponding date If there are no appointments in a specific direction the corresponding navigation button is disabled Note that if the Scheduler control currently displays appointments for multiple resources navigation buttons are displayed independently for each resource 2011 DevExpress Inc 557 Scheduler 558 Scheduler More Buttons The More buttons indicate that more appointments exist on a particular date Click these buttons to see all appointments in a more detailed view or to simply scroll to the next appointment Day View Fl a H j P i A P 2 x ra Wo Fa F a Pa Pa a ra i More button Month View Hore button pa 2011 DevExpress Inc s58 Toolbars and Menus s59 Toolbars and Menus This section describes the capabilities provided by toolbars and menus SimplePad C Demo mn Ga File Edit Format Toolbars Help z et lorem Hunc dam juste tempus sit amet euismod a lacinia nec Eros ine 1 Position 7 C iLorem ipsum rtf ch Layout Customization e Open Toolbar Customization Window e Finish Toolbar Customization e Hide and Display Toolbars e Hide and Di
338. n is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Watermark Allows you to customize a report s watermark options For more information about this refer to Create or Modify Watermarks of a Report Behavior Data e Display Name Specifies the name of the report which is displayed in its Design Panel tab Report Display Name EJ Report Export Options Allows you to set the export options for each file type PDF XLS TXT etc These options vary with the file type Measure Units Allows you to choose units of measurement for a report one hundredth of an inch or a tenth ofa millimeter Print when Data Source is Empty Script Language Allows you to choose the programming language to be used in Scripting C Visual Basic or J Script References Allows you to manage the collection of strings that represent the paths to the assemblies used by the Scripts in a report Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Show Margin Lines in Preview The page margin lines are dotted lines shown on the currently selected page in the report s preview Use this property to change the visibility of these lines Vertical Content Splitting Allows you to choose whether report controls outside the right page margin should be split across pages or moved in their entirety to the next page This option is useful for the c
339. name even if you enter another one iNote If you open a document which was previously saved to the hard drive it is impossible to change its page settings e g page size orientation margins etc So the Page Setup and the Scale buttons will be disabled 2011 DevExpress Inc 137 Print Preview ass Load a Print Preview from a File To open a previously saved document click the Open lF button on the toolbar or press CTRL O On the invoked Open dialog define the file and click Open LS Open Look in Lith Public Documents A Name Date modif Type _ Document prnx Files of type Preview Document Files pre Note If you open a document previously saved to the hard drive it is impossible to change its page settings e g page size orientation margins etc So the Page Setup and Scale buttons will be disabled 2011 DevExpress Inc 138 Print Preview 139 Printing and Page Setup Print a Document via the Print Dialog To print a document do one of the following e Click the Print button on the toolbar or press CTRL P e On the File menu click Print The Print dialog will be invoked Print Ex Select Printer T Add Printer me Microsoft XPS Document Writer Send To OneNote 2007 Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Page Range All Number of copies 1 Selection I s Pages 1 57 vi a4 3l Enter either a single page numbe
340. nc sot Rich Text Editor soz Select a Cell Row or Column Select a Cell You can select a table cell in one of the following ways e Double click a cell e Click the left edge ofa cell e Click a cell to be selected Then click the Select button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar and choose Select Cell from the invoked list Select Column Select Row Select Table Note To select multiple cells click the left edge ofa cell and then drag it across other cells Select a Row To select a table row you can do one of the following e Click to the left of a row e Click a cell included into a row to be selected Then click the Select button on the Rows amp Columns toolbar and choose Select Row from the invoked list Select Cell E Select Column Select Table Select a Column To select a table column you can do one of the following e Click the top edge of a column e Click a cell included into a column to be selected Then click the Select button on the Rows amp Columns 2011 DevExpress Inc s02 Rich Text Editor sos toolbar and choose Select Column from the invoked list Fee Select Row E Select Table Select a Table Click any cell of a table Then click the Select button on the Table toolbar and choose the Select Table item from the invoked list Select Cell Select Column Select Row 2011 DevExpress Inc sos Rich Text Editor so Insert a C
341. nd the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it 2011 DevExpress Inc 394 Report Designer 395 Report Bands The documents in this section details the available kinds of report bands and their settings In the Report Designer a report is built upon bands sections of varied type and purpose where report controls are contained Bands are featured in the Designer Tab solely to represent different sections of a report document such as detail report or page header or footer They allow you to select exactly where a control should be printed and how many times Band Types The following band types are available e Detail Band e Groop Header and Footer e Report Header and Footer e Page Header and Footer e Page Margin Bands e Detail Report Band for Master Detail Reports Manage Bands To manage bands in a report click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the Edit and Reorder Bands link Then in the invoked Report Editor you can easily add remove and reorder bands and adjust their options Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source none Report Editor eg GroupHeader 1 Zz ILJ Alternatively you can invoke the Report Editor via any band s Smart Tag 2011 DevExpress Inc 395 Report Designer E im PageHeader fone band per page Pe To quickly insert
342. ndar Add bo Queue Cancel Refer to the section on the Report Queue for more information about this form Running Reports When you run a report you are actually running a Report Definition Report Definitions can be run in three ways 1 A specific report definition can be run from within CleverQ either by choosing a Scorecard from a Dashboard selection or from an additional gauge drilldown 2 You can select a report definition to run manually from the Report List or Report Carousel within the Report Manager 3 You can add a report definition to run to the Report Queue to run at a later time Running reports from within CleverQ will not be covered in this manual Refer to other user manuals for more information Manual Selection To select a report to run you will either use the Report List or the Report Carousel They each have their advantages that will be covered in the next subsections You can also set your starting form to be either of these form rather than the Navigator Report List To bring up the Report List click on the top icon on the Reports block on the Navigator or use the pull down menu item View Reports List Page 35 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Category Mame El Non blanks Banking Balance Sheel Dashboards Banking Dash Gauges F Income Banking Dash Indicators Banking Dashl Parameters Dashboards Scorecard All Dashboard Banking Dashboard Ba
343. ne Address 14 ReportsTo City e TitheOFCourbesy petal Code freson Country Cema V F Customize the card layout using drag and drop and customization menu and preview data in the view Layout page 2 Resize the template card as required 3 Close the Customization window to apply the changes 2011 DevExpress Inc o2 Resize Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields Resize Columns and Bands in Grid Views To resize columns and bands drag the right edge of the target column band header Drag a column header here to group by that column Order ID 4 roduck m 10248 Queso Cabrales m 10248 Singaporean Hokkien Fried Mee m 10248 Mozzarella di Giovanni To change a column s width so that it displays its contents compactly in their entirety do one of the following e Double click the right edge of the column header e Right click the column s header and select Best Fit Drag a column header here to group by that column a Supplier Unit Price E Antonio del valle Saavg z Sort Ascending 421 00 Antonio del valle Saave 1 Sort Descending 35 00 Mayumi Ohno Clear Sorting 6 00 Mayumi Ohno S Group By This Column 23 25 gs Mayumi Ohno E 15 50 E Column Chooser Best Fit Clear Filter Sy Filter Editor Best Fit fall colurnns To change the widths of all columns so that they display their contents in the best possible way right click the header of any column and se
344. ne of two ways The first approach forces the default printer settings to be used when the report is printed while the other one enables you to alter page settings independently e Using settings of the default printer For the orientation margins and paper size you can specify a requirement that applies the corresponding printer settings instead of the report s In this instance the page properties in the Property Grid are disabled and displayed as grayed out This may be useful when the report is printed in several places with different printers and printer settings myReportl Report BK Page Settings Paper Name Default Printer Name Using Settings of the Default Printer Use Landscape Use Margins Use Paper Kind Using Settings of the Default Printer Gets a value that specifies which of the default printer s settings should be used when printing an XtraReport e Specify the report s page settings While designing the report you can specify the page settings via the Property Grid 2011 DevExpress Inc 233 Report Designer 234 age Settings me No 100 49 100 100 Paper Name Printer Name E Using Settings of the Default Printer Use Landscape Use Margins Use Paper Kind You can set the page orientation and modify the margins The margin values are expressed in the report s measurement units You can sele
345. ned next to it Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 376 Report Designer Chart 377 The Chart is a sophisticated control used to embed graphs into your report It graphically represents a series of poin
346. next control in tab order press TAB To select the previous control in tab order click SHIFT TAB Individual controls can be moved using either mouse or keyboard v E Detail They can be precisely aligned to each other using either Snap Gird or Snap Lines For details on this refer to Controls Positioning To resize a control using the mouse select it and then drag a rectangle drawn on its edge or corner v E Detail E E gt a Pade a a E To resize a band drag its header strip v E Detil To resize an element using the keyboard press SHIFT ARROW or CTRL SHIFT ARROW To select multiple elements do one of the following e Click elements while holding CTRL or SHIFT e Click on a blank space and drag the mouse to create a selection frame When the mouse button is released all controls within the selection frame s boundaries will be selected In this case the previous selection is cleared m E _ checkBox a fabell a checkBoxl La n A o m o O o You can also easily align multiple controls or make them the same size by utilizing the Layout Toolbar In addition to copy paste and delete controls simultaneously you can place them within the Panel For more information refer to Controls Positioning See Also Change Fonts and Colors of Report Elements Delete Report Elements 2011 DevExpress Inc 186 Report Designer 187 Change Fonts and Colors of Report Elements To chan
347. ng Basics e Back Up the Current Layout Before Modifying It e Manually Update Report Output e Change Element Layout in Your Report e Change Fonts and Colors of Report Elements e Delete Report Elements Providing Data e Add or Modify Static Information in Your Report e Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Use Mail Merge in Report Elements e Add Calculated Fields to a Report e Add Parameters to a Report Data Representation e Change Value Formatting of Report Elements e Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report e Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report e Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Additional Features e Add Totals to a Report e Add Page Numbers and System Information to a Report e Create or Modify Watermarks of a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 183 183 Report Designer asa Back Up the Current Layout Before Modifying It To guarantee that you will be able to revert your report to its original state you need to create a backup copy Then you can apply changes without worrying that it will be hard to restore your report in case something breaks e TO Save a copy of your report in the Main Menu select File Save As Edit View Format Window New Ctrl N New with Wizard Ctrl W Open Ctrl 0 S Save Cirl S Close Ctrl Fa Exit Then in the invoked standard Save File dialog specify the folder and file name e To save the current layout of your report in t
348. nistrator Create new appointments Edit appointments Invoke the appointment editing form Activate an in place editor for an appointment Change the time boundaries of appointments Drag and drop appointments to another time slot or date Drag and drop appointments between resources Copy appointments Delete appointments Select more than one appointment simultaneously Share the scheduled time between two or more appointments When you drag an appointment to relocate it it may conflict with another This situation is visually indicated as illustrated below 2011 DevExpress Inc 547 547 Scheduler sas Layout Customization Switch Scheduler Views Change Active View The Scheduler is intended to display appointment data using one of the standard Views The currently active view used by the Scheduler can be either selected intentionally or changed according to the Scheduler s internal logic e To change the active view use the corresponding item of the Scheduler s context menu This menu is invoked when you right click any region of the Scheduler control not occupied with an appointment New Appointment New All Day Event New Recurring Appointment New Recurring Event Go to This Day Go to Today Go to Date Fy iu Day View i Work Week View i Month View 9 Timeline View amp tNote Depending on the application vendor some options may be unava
349. nking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year copy Dashboard Definition Gauges Dashboard Definition Gauges Income Income Scorecard Click to expand or collapse the Indicators Profitabili group Indicators Balance Mj 4 Record 1 of 20 is Click here to filter by Category ars grouped by datas Balance Sheet Parameters Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year All Dashboards For This Year Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Gauges Income Scorecard Dashboard Definition Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Balance Sheet Indicators Profitability Analysis Indicators system system system Larry system system system Larry system system system system system system system system The advantage of this form is you can see the reports grouped you can sort and you can filter You can also reorganize the list by dragging columns In the next figure you can see the User ID was swapped for Groups and now you can see report definitions by User ID Page 36 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual ox Banking Dashboard For This Year copy Banking Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year copy Dashboards Banking Dashboard For This Year E system All Dashboar
350. nning of the document 2011 DevExpress Inc aso Rich Text Editor aeo Print a Document Preview a Document Before Printing To display the document as it will look when printed click the Print Preview button on the Common toolbar POS ISA O re rr ial Print Preview Preview and make changes to pages before printing Print a Document 1 Click the Print button on the Common toolbar US ial HD fc ie ose ie has Sih an Print Ctrl P Select a printer number of copies and other printing options before printing Oor press CTRL P The Print dialog will be invoked Print Ma fay Microsoft XPS Docurnent Writer TT Printte file Preferences Find Printer Number of copies f Current Page Pages E Collate LAs 443 Enter either a single page number or a single 722 722 page range For example 5 12 Fe cmoa ter 2 In the Print dialog specify all required settings and click Print 2011 DevExpress Inc aso Rich Text Editor at Print a Document Using Default Settings To send a document directly to the default printer without customizing print settings click the Quick Print button on the Common toolbar lll E iam nes ri ri he u 1 Quick Print Send the document directly to the default printer without making changes 2011 DevExpress Inc ast Rich Text Editor 462 Margins and Page Orienta
351. nnnnnnnnn mennan nennen 187 DOE TE Repor HEME E a a aE AE EEO 188 Add or Modify Static Information in Your RepoOrt ssssennnsusnesnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennum nnmnnn nnnm 189 Display Values from a Database Bind Report Bements to Data nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 192 Use Mail Merge in Report ElOMe nts eeeecceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeasaeeeeeesaeeeeeasseseeeesseeseeasseeeeeaseeeseneseeesenanseesenneeeseoes 196 Add Calculated Fields to a REDO ricer ioc leet ches occ tcctd ok ove Secada ice cane cecwenndicves GocmsvsannencSudanguscesseaiedausabeseateaiusesteusmecxied 197 Add Parameters to a REDON bisa deccts crests a vncensasstentasacecerestuncatassGeutsasusdenaasive dovasietcustaveicesatvercetodtencoddstercucevsaewtoatusdeescvaencesensereess 200 Change Value Formatting of Report ElOMent cceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeseeessneeeeeseeassaaeseseeeesssaeeeseenaesseeeesseeaaseeeeessaoes 203 Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Re port cccccsseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaee ssa eeeeseeeesaaeeeeeseeassaaesesseeaasaesesseeeessaeeesseneassneeessanes 204 Change or Apply Data Filtering to a RE port cccccssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeseeeeeessaaseeeeeeassaaesesseeassaaeeesseneessaeeesseneaneeeeessones 206 Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report ccccseesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesneeeeeeeaeessaeeeeeseeasaaaesesee
352. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn nnn nnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 177 Customize Printing Settings of GridS aaassssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnn mennan nnen 178 Customize Printing Settings of Pivot TableS snnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna nn nennen 179 Customize Printing Settings of Tree VieWS ssssssssssnsnsnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn ananena 180 Warnings and Error Messages ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeeeesseeeeeaaaeeeeeesseeeeeasseeseeesseeseeesseeseeesseeseeassessenaseessenasseeseneneeesones 181 REDOM DESIGNE P sasaina eaaa aaa aeaa ae a Naa a a Aa E a 182 Report Editino BASICS sna a e a A AE A E RE 183 Back Up the Current Layout Before Modifying lt snnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen 184 Manually Update Report Outpu t ssasausnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 185 Change Element Layout in Your Report assssssnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 186 Change Fonts and Colors of Report ElementsS ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
353. nt Go to Today i Go to Date Change View To d 1 New Appointment This item invokes the Edit Appointment dialog shown below The Start time and End time values are initially set to the lower and upper boundaries of the current date and time selection Eo Untitled Appointment Subject Location Start time 1 15 2009 9 00 00 AM H All day event End time 1 15 2009 9 30 00AM Resource Any Show time as Busy _ Reminder Recurrence Fillin other fields if necessary For example use the large text box at the bottom of the dialog to enter text which will be shown as an appointment s description in a Day or a Work Week views Also you can select the Reminder check box to enable appointment notifications 2 New All Day Event Invokes the Edit Event dialog used to create a new all day appointment also called all day event The dialog is identical to Edit Appointment shown above except that in this case the All day event option is checked its time range is measured in days not hours and marked as Free The appointment can be transformed into an all day event and vice versa by checking this box 3 New Recurring Appointment All appointments maintained by the scheduler can either be simple non recurring i e they happen only once Or recurring occurring multiple times within a specified time interval Selecting this menu item invokes the Edit Appointment dialog used to create a n
354. nterprises LLC CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Introduction This document is to be used to learn how to use Report Manager Plus both as a user viewing reports and also as a user who creates reports It is highly recommended that you have previously read all other CleverQ manuals Report Manager Plus is a new addition to CleverQ that will eventually replace the existing Report Manager Report Manager Plus will be simply referred to within this document as the Report Manager since it will be the only Report Manager at some point The CleverQ Report Manager is a powerful reporting tool that runs as a separate program and is launched from within CleverQ The Report Manager is based on the latest technology available and provides numerous and powerful features as listed below Features include e Create reports from almost any data source including CleverQ QBD files Microsoft Access or any ODBC source including SQL Server MySQL Oracle etc e Run reports immediately or later based on a scheduled time using a familiar calendar view day week month timeline or a simple list view e Reports can be previewed printed or emailed Reports can be saved in different file formats including PDF HTML MHT RTF TXT CSV XLS XLXS BMP EMF GIF JPEG PNG TIFF and WMF Reports can be predefined as a system report or a user report User reports can be optionally shared among other users Reports can be categorized based on a system o
355. nto the report s Detail band There are no visible series to represent ina chart Try to add new series or make sure that atleast one of them is visible Il qi uae Note that after you drop the Chart the Chart Wizard may be invoked if its Show wizard every time a new chart is added option is enabled In this example we don t need to use the Wizard so click Cancel to close its window 3 To bind the Chart to a data source click its Smart Tag In the invoked actions list expand the Data Source drop down selector and click Add New DataSource 2011 DevExpress Inc 262 Report Designer 263 Data Source none Data Member There are no visible series to represent in a chart Try to add new series or make sure that at least one of them is visible Data Adapter Formatting Rules N Add New DataSource Run Wizard Annotations Palettes The invoked connection Wizard will guide you through the process of assigning a data source to the Chart For detailed instructions on the Wizard s steps refer to Bind a Report to Data as this process is Similar iNote Note that after these steps the report s Data Source property must be set to None Data Source none Otherwise the Chart will be blank when previewed and repeated as many times as there are records in the data source 4 After the dataset is created it is assigned to the Chart s Data Source property Its Data Member pro
356. ntrols to be executed when the report is being previewed printed or exported Although when in the Report Designer virtually any task can be accomplished without scripting Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Conditionally Change a Label s Text and Conditionally Hide Bands scripting is made available to extend the standard functionality as far as may be required And scripting is the only way to calculate custom summaries this is detailed in the last section of this document Every report element has an set of script events which are individual for each element s type For example the events of the Detail band are shown in the following image Property Grid Scripts Band Scripts After Print After you click New for an event e g the Before Print which is the most used the Scripts Tab is switched on where you can manage and edit all the report s scripts 2011 DevExpress Inc 295 Report Designer 296 Reporti EJ Po Detail Detail Before Print g validate 1 2 3 4 a 6 EB private void Detail BeforePrint object sender System Drawing Printing PrintEventArgs e i Type your script here In this tab for a selected event a script template is auto added in the language specified via the Script Language property of the report You can verify that your report s scripts are valid by clicking Validate The validation result is then displayed in the Scri
357. nunseate 426 Step 6 Sum mary ORUOMS xc cece ccecesed cede hae cade cacenran oe ech edst cca tan eccunctigcessussanndsuascdussanenccatesaensaeecuscusas cee pact vonvescuseuesuestem 429 Step Choose Report Layout a a cc cacen aaae A aa A AAE aa Gotan a E a eaaa aa Eaa E aaa EE sinte 431 Step 8 Choose Report Style sssssssnnnnnnenennnnnnunnnnnnnnnunennnnnnunnennnnnnnnennnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnn mennene 432 Step oS Enter a REDO Tle a a E a a A a aA EE aE A aaa a a A OAA REEE a 433 Lapel Report WIZA O oeoa aa e a a aa aaa aa E 434 Step 1 96lecta Label Tyers e a a a cies 435 Step 2 Customize Label Option cccscsescccccissssescccececnesseteeectonrsencevesssusessevenccasuenersectensasesenetestseersanetennenseeaceenuannsvends 436 Preview Print and Expott Reports ieie aeniea Aaaa A EREA basins RAAD dcestasricedeaaanagdeasesaucsenssaesccseds aE E nE 437 RIDDON n a a a a usta NA 438 Frequently Used Ribbon Commands ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna nnne nnnn nnnm nnnn nnmnnn nnnm 439 ataie hrace DON E A T T A E A A A A E E A A E A A T 441 invok Ribbon Commands a aa aaa aaa a a Eaa a aa a aaa aA Ea Eaa aaa ra daaa A m OARA EEr aA ESENE 442 RICA TEXCEOIOT oomini aes Gian wa anes arent eaate x wal eteae ae eduneen eee eee rues 443 WO XC IECILOR Ukara aaa aa A NAE E EE T a ue Eea aaa eE iE AVAVA 446 Editor Bement S nirani eaaa re eE A NE a
358. o make a report design aware of the parameters associated with the report definition you need to open the report design from the Report Definition Detail form and then press this button The parameters should then show up on the Field List tab Page 48 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Data Connection Use this button to check the data connection to your current QBD file If the report is to an external data source do not press this button Add Data Source You can add multiple data sources to a report This is useful if you have several pivot tables or charts on a single report and each will have a different data source Script to Clipboard If you are going to use the CleverQ Analytical Calculation Engine ACE to feed information into your report you will need to add one or more scripts to the report Pressing this button copies the standard script to the clipboard so you can paste it appropriately into your reports scripts More about that later CleverQ Help If you are going to use the CleverQ Analytical Calculation Engine ACE to feed information into your report this button will bring up some good information to allow you to add controls to your report linked to ACE Page 49 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Special CleverQ Reports As previously mentioned report designs can be connected to external data sources as well as the linked CleverQ Data File If your report is based on data in the linked CleverQ da
359. ocument CTRL CLEAR Selects the entire document CTRL NUM 5 Selects the entire document 2011 DevExpress Inc 470 Rich Text Editor Delete Text 471 The Backspace key deletes one character to the left of the caret The Delete key deletes one character to the right of the caret To delete more than just a few characters select text and press the Delete key The following table lists the default keyboard shortcuts used for deleting text BACKSPACE Moves the cursor backwards and erases the character in that space 2011 DevExpress Inc 471 Rich Text Editor Find and Replace Text Find Text To search for every occurrence of a specific word or phrase 1 Click the Find button on the Editing toolbar L l I ee e I Find Ctrl F mm i Find text in the document Or press CTRL F The Find and Replace dialog will be invoked Find whole words only Regular expression 2 In the Find what box type the text to search for 3 Select other search options that you want and click Find Next 4 To cancel a search click Cancel or press ESC Find and Replace Text To automatically replace text 1 Click the Replace button on the Editing toolbar Replace Ctrl H Replace text in the document Or press CTRL H The Find and Replace dialog will be invoked 2011 DevExpress Inc Rich Text Editor Find and Replace 7 oe
360. oduct Name Category Unit Price Discontinued Unchecked Header E O Previ Gorgonzola Telino Po Dairy Products 9 50 E review EA i roote Manjimup Dried Apples g Produce 53 00 Footer i Filo Mix a Grains Cereals 10 20 T GroupFooter 7 7 Ravioli Angelo gy Grains Cereals 19 50 E HorzLines Camembert Pierrot Po Dairy Products 34 00 mi VertLines if FilterInfo 4 Max 53 00 E 1 Detais Discontinued Checked E Tofu 2 Produce 23 25 E Mascarpone Fabioli PL Dairy Products 32 00 Geitost a Dairy Products 2 50 Radette Courdavault TA Dairy Products 55 00 4 Max 55 00 238 95 G Set up various printing options for the current view L xh cancel Apply e Options tab Allows you to uncheck elements that you don t want to print e Behavior tab Allows you to pre process a grid before printing it For instance you can enable automatic column width calculation or automatic group row expansion 2011 DevExpress Inc 178 Print Preview 179 Customize Printing Settings of Pivot Tables If allowed by your application vendor you can customize additional print settings of a document For example if you are about to print out a Pivot Table you may be able to customize its printing options To do this click the Customize L button on the toolbar The Print Options dialog will be invoked Print Options Options Preview dis aia Sale Year H Horizontal Lines Default
361. of the edit value click on a position where the selection should start drag the pointer to the end position and then release the mouse button Additionally the following keyboard shortcuts allow you to manage selections Clipboard Operations Clipboard operations are supported for editors that support caret moving To copy selected text into the clipboard do the following e Press CTRL C or CTRL INSERT e Open the Editor Context Menu and select Copy To paste text from the clipboard do the following e Press CTRL V or SHIFT INSERT e Open the Editor Context Menu and select Paste To cut some text from an editor into the clipboard do the following e Press CTRL X or SHIFT DELETE e Open the Editor Context Menu and select Cut Delete Selected Text To delete the selected text within an editor do one of the following e Press DELETE or BACKSPACE e Open the Editor Context Menu and select Delete Undo To undo the last text editing operation do one of the following e Press CTRL Z e Open the Editor Context Menu and select Undo Note After you ve undone an operation you can return to the previous edit value by executing the Undo command once again Change Date Time Values 2011 DevExpress Inc a 4 June gt 4 2008 F 5SM TW TF 5 25 26 27 26 29 30 31 ae 1 3 4 5 6 o 9 10 11 le 13 14 15 16 176 19 20 21 22 23 z 25 46 27 26 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 SS I al Today l Clear You can edit these val
362. of the filename If you do include the date time stamp files will not be overwritten and you can accumulate a history of reports Without the data time stamp the files will be overwritten and this is useful if you establish a shortcut to the file and want to shortcut to work all the time Or if you are creating web pages that are part of a website you will need to maintain the same filename You can check off Send to FTP site into Destination Folder If you have correctly setup the FTP preferences the report will be saved to the local repository first then uploaded to the FTP site If the FTP site has subfolders you can direct the file to the subfolder by including the subfolder name in the Destination Folder text box There are a number of formats available including PDF HTML single HTML Multiple MHT RTF TXT CSV XLS XLXS BMP EMF GIF JPEG PNG TIFF and WME If you specify Printer as the format then use the dropdown list to select a printer The Copies field is used only for the Printer If you specify a format that is not the Printer the file will be saved in the Destination Folder which defaults to the preference setup on the Preferences form But you can change this location for any file and the Browse button can be used to select the location Page 40 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual When done with this form press the Add to Queue button You can further edit the queue entry using th
363. of the following e Focus the row and then press PLUS on the keyboard to expand the row and MINUS to collapse the row e Double click the row s header Beh Address City Regior Seattle Wl S Home Phone 206 555 9657 Extension S46 e Click the row s expand button Address 507 20th Ave E Apt 24 en Postal Co Countr 96l 22 USA City Regior Seattle Wl S Home Phone 206 555 9857 Extension 5467 Expand and Collapse Category Rows Do one of the following e Focus the row and press PLUS on the keyboard to expand the row and MINUS to collapse the row S Employee First ak Mancy Last Mame Davolic Title Sales Representative Title OF Courtesy E Ms Birth Date 12 6 1958 Hire Date 511 1992 e Double click the row e Click the row s expand button 2 Employee a First Mame Mancy o Last Mame Davolio Title Sales Representative Title OF Courtesy E Ms Birth Date 12 6 1958 Hire Date 511 1992 Expand Rows Recursively To expand a row and all its child rows that have nested rows focus the row and press MULTIPLY on the keyboard 2011 DevExpress Inc 587 Vertical Grid 588 Resize Rows and Columns in Vertical Grids Resize Rows To resize a row drag the row header s bottom edge vertically 2 Employee First Mame Mancy Last Name t Davolio Title Sales Representative Tithe OF Courtesy E Ms Birth Date 12 6 1958 Hire Date 511 1992 Resize Columns To resize data columns drag a separator between da
364. ollowing illustration demonstrates how it works 2011 DevExpress Inc 19 10 7 Canada usa B o E Series Argument Value Canada 12 31 2000 10 USA 12 31 2001 5 UK 12 31 2002 T n USA 12 31 2000 8 Canada 12 31 2002 6 D UK 12 31 2000 8 12 31 2000 12 31 2001 12 31 2002 Canada 13 31 2001 10 USA 12 31 2002 7 UK 12 31 2001 g For familiar data sources such as Pivot Grid you can choose to automatically adjust the binding and layout settings of your Chart And when you set a Pivot Grid as a Chart s data source the Pivot Grid Data Source tab becomes available Points Series Binding Auto created Series Pivot Grid Datasource Series Properties Choose a datasource pivotGrid1 Data Member myDataset View type none Name prefix Name suffix On this tab you can adjust various Pivot Chart options Points Series Binding Auto created Series Pivot Grid Datasource Data Representation Retrieve Totals Retrieve Data by Columns Retrieve Column Totals Retrieve Empty Cells Retrieve Column Grand Totals Retieve Column Custom Totals mien Retrieve Row Totals Max Series Count es Retrieve Row Grand Totals Max Point Count in Series 0 a Retrieve Row Custom Totals 2011 DevExpress Inc 20 Charting 21 Chart Page Tasks e Define a chart s background color and background image Page Elements Chart a Series 1 pN Series 2 A Series 3 Back
365. on cover the basics of working with reports in the Report Designer This section consists of the following topics e Create a New Report e Bind a Report to Data e Controls Positioning e Change Measurement Units fora Report e Change Page Settings for a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 222 Report Designer 223 Create a New Report This topic explains how to create a new blank report in the Report Designer Before you start make sure to back up the current report To create a new report do one of the following Create a New Blank Report In the Main Menu click File and then New or press CTRL N rile Edit View Format Window New with Wizard r Ctrl W i Open Ctrl 0 lm Save Ctrl 5 Save As Close Ctrl F4 Exit The Main Toolbar contains a button Ld with the same function If there is another report already loaded in the designer you may be prompted whether it should be saved before it is replaced with a newly created report By default the created report contains three bands Page Header and Footer and the Detail band Create a New Report Using the Report Wizard In the Main Menu click File and then New with Wizard or press CTRL W Fite Edit View Format Window Lj New Ctrl N i gt Open Hs Ctrl 0 fe Save Ctril 5 Save As Close Ctrl F4 Exit For more information about this option refer to Report Wizard See Also Controls Positioning Change Measurement Units fo
366. on individual User Interface Elements such as grids navigation panes data editors etc Each element can provide context menus allow numerous mouse operations and support a number of keyboard shortcuts To obtain information about these features browse through the table of contents to locate the element you are interested in e Charting e Editors e Expression Editor e Filter Editor e Grid e Layout Manager e Navigation Bars e Pivot Table e Print Preview e Report Designer e Ribbon e Rich Text Editor e Scheduler e Toolbars and Menus e Tree List e Vertical Grid 2011 DevExpress Inc 3s Charting Charting This section describes the capabilities provided by Charts Sales Volume SO0000 Pol pda o0000 O0000 150000 100000 SO000 Beverages Confections Grains Cereals Produce Meat Poultry Seafood Condiments Dairy Products Topics in this section e Chart Wizard Select Chart Elements Zooma Chart Scroll a Chart Rotate a Chart 2011 DevExpress Inc 9 Chart Wizard Use the chart wizard dialog to quickly and easily create a new chart or modify an existing one Chart Wizard A x AMES Polar Point Polar Line Senes Views Point Labels Chart Tites E a E ja Ab Legend Annotations Choose a chart type you want to use To filter chart types by their groups use the values inthe drop down box The Chart Wizard contains the follow
367. on to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down 2011 DevExpress Inc 351 Report Designer 352 selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control Th
368. oolbar This will invoke the Header and Footer dialog Header and Footer JOA 7 d Font microsoft sans Serif 8 25pt _ Header Image 0 Here is a Header User Name Date Printed Here is a Footer Page of Pages Time Printed Specify header and footer content using the appropriate text boxes depending on the required alignment If needed you can also adjust vertical alignment and font settings Click OK to save changes and close the dialog 2011 DevExpress Inc ms Print Preview am Insert Page Numbers into Printed Documents To insert or remove page numbers from a document first invoke the Header and Footer dialog Focus a text box depending on the required alignment and do one of the following e If you need to simply display the current page number click the Page Number button e If you need to display the page number out of the total number of pages click the Page of Pages button When you click one of these buttons the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position You can surround this alias with any text you like If you no longer need page numbers in your document delete this alias Click OK to save changes and close the dialog 2011 DevExpress Inc a Print Preview 145 Insert Date and Time into Printed Documents If you need to display the date and time when a document is printed first invoke the Header and Footer di
369. or is 120 Undo Zooming Press CTRL Z to return to the state before the first zoom operation in a series 2011 DevExpress Inc oat Scroll a Chart You can scroll a chart only if a chart is already zoomed in therefore its zoom factor is more than 100 Since in this case the entire chart is not visible at one time it s possible to scroll a chart Scroll a 2D Chart To scroll a 2D chart do one of the following e Click a chart and drag it After you click a chart the mouse pointer is changed from M to 4 Then drag the mouse pointer to scroll the diagram e Use scrollbars e Use CTRL ARROW combinations Scroll a 3D Chart To scroll a 3D chart do one of the following e Click the mouse wheel button on a chart and drag it After you click a chart the mouse pointer is changed from M to I Then drag the mouse pointer to scroll a chart s diagram e Use CTRL ARROW combinations 2011 DevExpress Inc a2 Rotate a Chart If you are working with 3D charts you can rotate a chart s diagram This may be required if a chart displays multiple series or data points and it s required to change the current rotation angle to view chart data in detail To rotate a 3D chart s diagram click a chart s diagram and drag it After you click a chart s diagram the mouse pointer is changed from to i Then drag the mouse pointer to rotate the chart 2011 DevExpress Inc Editors aa Editors This sec
370. or the Detail Report band note that you should drop items from the relation node in this example it is the Categories Products section or there will be incorrect output in the report E Detail ene myDataSet _ Categories CategoryName r E Categories Of CategoriesProducts E Detail Report Categones Categones Products fia CategoryID v E Detail i i hf Discontinued t E EAN13 fa ProductID fab EJ Froductame a QuantityPerUnit 5 x fe Reorderlevel I Supplier ID Zs UnitsInStock E UnitsOnOrder 5 CategoryID Ser LategoryName The master detail report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 2 Report Designer C te de Blaye Ipoh Coffee Beverages Condiments _ Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Vegie spread Confections Sir Rodney s Marmalade Gumbar Gummibarchen Schoggi Schokolade Tarte au sucre Dairy Products Queso Manchego La Pastora Mascarpone Fabiol Raclette Courdavault Camembert Pierrot Gudbrandsdalsost Mozzarella di Giovanni See Also Parameterized Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 247 247 Report Designer 24s Multi Column Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a multi column report meaning that each page of the report document is laid out in a specified number of columns To demonstrate the multi column
371. orm that provides access to hidden fields will be displayed Pivot rid Field List Drag Items to the PivotGrid OrderID Produck Name Quantity a a uAdd To Filter Area e Drag a field away from the header panel until the cursor changes its image to the big X Then drop the Then do one of the following header 2011 DevExpress Inc 127 Pivot Table 128 Order Amount a Sales Person 4 EK Quarter 1 M MaE al Warne 6 206 91 10 151 72 Quarter 2 Category ame J Sy ere Drag Items to the PivotGrid Quarter 4 Categor Pome PA eae asta ates ee EA OrderID Grand Total D e Drag and drop a field onto the Customization Form Order Amount a Sales Person Grand Total Category Wame a l Filter ae Display Hidden Fields To display hidden fields do the following e If the Customization Form is hidden open it by right clicking the control s header region and selecting Show Field List from the context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc 128 Pivot Table 129 Order Year Order Amount fountry 4 RS Refresh Data order ie m E Show Field List Show Frefilter Quarter 1 a eA el Donean N paransi carea m PivotGrid Field List Drag Items to the
372. ormatting Rules Collection e Control Smart Tag A control s Smart Tag icon is located at the top right corner of the control For instance the Smart Tag for the Rich Text control is shown in the following image 2011 DevExpress Inc 332 Report Designer 333 sinchTextl See Also Context Menu 2011 DevExpress Inc 333 Report Designer 334 Status Bar The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Report Designer and displays hints about currently selected commands in the Main Menu or toolbars Undo the last operation See Also Component Tray 2011 DevExpress Inc 334 Report Designer 335 Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar allows you to zooma report in and out providing easier control over report s layout q 100 FA If the Zoom Toolbar is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Toolbars Zoom Toolbar See Also Formatting Toolbar Layout Toolbar Main Toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 335 Report Designer EJ Report Controls The documents in this section describe options of each report control available in the Report Designer In general report controls allow you to represent information of different kinds e g simple or formatted text pictures tables etc in you report both static and dynamic and to adjust your report s layout by organizing controls within panels and inser
373. ort with grouping similar the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report This tutorial consists of the following sections e Count the Number of Records in a Group e Count the Number of Records in a Report e Get the Result Count the Number of Records in a Group To count the number of records in a group do the following e Select the Label in the Group Footer area and in the Property Grid expand its Summary category Y ca Grouprooterl E E Summary Running Format String Ignore Null Values Yes Function Gets or sets the arithmetic function to calculate Set the Running option to Group and the Function to Count The Ignore NULL values option is useful for functions like Count or Average because the number of elements counted will depend on it If required you can specify the Format String e g as Units Count 0 Note that value formatting is applied to a summary independently of the general formatting and has a greater priority Count the Number of Records in a Report To count the number of records in a report do the following 1 To add a Report Footer band to your report right click anywhere on it and in the invoked Context Menu choose Insert Band ReportFooter 2011 DevExpress Inc 301 Report Designer 302 Paste Delete TopMargin Insert Detail Report ReportHeader foom t E PageHeader Af Properties GroupHeade
374. ostfix is added as hours d days a Implementing Developer Express MasterView control into Accounting E El x Subject Implementing Developer Express MasterView control into Accounting System Start time 7 5 2008 10 00 00 AM a All day event End time 5 2008 1 00 00 PM Resource Show time as High Reminder er i 0 minutes Implementing Developer MasterView into Accounting System 5 minutes 10 minutes How Does It Work 2011 DevExpress Inc sas Scheduler sa When the time has come for the reminder alert it invokes the notification dialog as illustrated below i 4 Reminders Start time 7 24 2008 4 00 00 PM Implementing Developer Express MasterView control into Accounting System Payables Due Calculator Ledger Inconsistency Receivables Calculator Click Snooze to be reminded again in 5 minutes You can switch the reminders off by clicking the Dismiss or Dismiss All buttons Another option is to shift the alert time by selecting the time interval in the combo box and clicking the Snooze button Then the notification will be postponed for a specified time frame 2011 DevExpress Inc sa Scheduler sas Delete an Appointment Using the Context Menu You can delete the selected appointment using the Delete item of the context menu which is invoked when an appointment is right clicked Open Edit Series Show Time As Label
375. ottom of the Layout Control Then drag this item to the required position Add Splitters To allow controls to be resized even when no customization is being performed you can add a splitter between these controls To add a splitter drag the Splitter item from the Customization form onto the main form Add Separators A separator is just a line that allows you visually separate the Layout Control s areas To add a separator drag the Separator item from the Customization form onto the main form Add Labels To add a static text label to the Layout Control do the following 1 Drag the Label item from the Customization form onto the main form 2 To rename the label right click the created label and select Rename from the context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc 104 Layout Manager 105 Change Text Label Options To perform layout customization first invoke Customization Mode After customization has been completed exit customization mode Rename Labels To rename a layout item s text label right click the item and select Rename from the context menu Employee ID Title En ha l Erstmame Lp Hide Customization Form Job Title Reset Layout a b Rename Report Ta T Hide Text Birth Date Text Position Hide Iter TP Group C Create EmptySpace Item I Size Constraints To rename a group right click the group s caption and select Rename Employee ID l Group Hide Customization Form I First M i
376. our report will look similar to the image below 2011 DevExpress Inc aza Report Designer a25 Reporti Category ID l Product Name hai Units On Order g Unit Price 12 00 Units In Stock 30 Category ID l Product Name Chanz Units On Order 40 Unit Price 19 00 Units In Stock 17 Category ID Product Name Anisead Sym Units On Order 70 Unit Price 310 09 Units In Stock 13 Category ID g Product Name Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning Units On Order 0 Unit Price 32200 Units In Stock 53 If you want to customize your report further click Next to proceed to Step 5 Add Grouping Levels 2011 DevExpress Inc a25 Report Designer az Step 5 Add Grouping Levels Purpose This page allows you to group data in your report For instance if you are displaying car sales information you may want to keep records corresponding to the same model together Each set of records with the same model will become a group with its own header Nested grouping and grouping against multiple fields are fully supported The following image illustrates all basic grouping types No grouping One evel Grouping Nested Grouping Multiple Fields BMW 5251 1 1 2009 1 scoala BMW BMW 525i BMW 5251 1 3 2009 2 525i 1 1 2009 1 ga 1 1 2009 1 BMW 740i 1 3 2009 3 525i 1 2 2009 2 UUD 4 1 2 2008 2 Toyota Camry 1 4 2009 4 740i 1 3 2009 3 2009 2 BMW 740i Toyota Prius 1 5 2009 5 Toyot
377. out View the document as it will appear on the printed page FAIRY TALES Hans in Luck By the Grimm Brothers Some men are born to good luck all aes do or to do comes ng much gain all their geese are swans all then cethem When the print layout view is active the horizontal and vertical rulers are available To show or hide horizontal and vertical rulers click the Horizontal Ruler and Vertical Ruler buttons on the Show toolbar respectively Horizontal Ruler View the horizontal ruler used to measure and line up objects in the document Vertical Ruler View the vertical ruler used to measure and line up objects in the document 2011 DevExpress Inc 467 Rich Text Editor Zoom a Document You can zoom in and out of a document in the following ways e Click the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons on the Zoom toolbar Zoom In Zoom Out Ctrl Subtract Zoom Out e Use the CTRL SUBTRACT and CTRL ADD keyboard shortcuts e Hold the CTRL button and rotate your mouse wheel 2011 DevExpress Inc 468 468 Rich Text Editor aeo Text Editing Select Text To select text in the Rich Editor use the following mouse actions and keyboard shortcuts e Selecting one character To select only one character click before the character hold down the Shift key and click the Right Arrow once e Selecting one word To select one word in a document place the cursor anywhere in the word
378. ows up on the report More about that later On the Right side of the screen click on the tab Field List This will show you the fields contained in the data source You can simple drag these fields right onto the report layout The details of actually creating a report layout and using the various controls are contained in Appendix A of this user manual Special ToolBar Commands There is a special toolbar within the Report Designer that is unique to the Report Manager E Save D amp E Save To File Load Parameters Data Connection Add DataSource Script To Clipboard CleverQ Help Online Help Save Press this button to save your report design Your report design will be saved in the connected QBD file you are using New b Create a new blank report This is only used if you are going to create a new report and not save it in the connected QBD file but rather to an external file Open a Report ia To open a report design saved to an external file click on this button Save to File Most of the time you will save your report to the connected QBD file using the Save button previously described This is necessary to utilize the report design with report definitions and being able to run the report from the Report Manager But if you want save a report to an external file to transfer to another QBD file the Save to File button is the method to save the report design to an external file Load Parameters T
379. page 2 Type text or insert graphics in the header or footer area 3 To switch between the header and footer areas use the Go to Header and Go to Footer buttons of the Navigation toolbar acy Sa Go to Header Activate the header on this page so that you can edit it Haji Go to Footer Activate the footer on this page so that you can edit it 4 If necessary you can align and format text in the header and footer areas as required 5 To finish double click anywhere in the document or click Close on the Close toolbar E Close Header and Footer Close the Header and Footer Tools You can also double dick he document area to return to editing it Create a Different Header or Footer for the First Page 2011 DevExpress Inc 517 Rich Text Editor sis You can skip the header or footer on the first page or create a unique header or footer for the first page of the document 1 Double click the header or footer area on the first page of the document 2 Click the Different First Page button on the Options toolbar PO OF K Different First Page Specify a unique header and footer for the first page of the f document 3 If necessary click the Show Previous and Show Next buttons on the Navigation toolbar to activate the First Page Header and First Page Footer areas Show Previous Navigate to the previous section s header or footer Show next Navigate to the next
380. page Page range 3 7 9 Export watermarks ok N cancel e Export mode Choose one from the available modes to export a document The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages The Single file page by page mode allows export of a document to a single file divided into pages In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files one for each document page In this mode the Page range Page border color and Page border width options are available e Page range Define the pages which will be included in the result Separate page numbers with commas set page ranges using hyphens e Also using the appropriate check box you can choose whether the exported document should include watermarks if they exist 2011 DevExpress Inc 170 Print Preview 171 XLS Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define XLS specific export options using the following dialog XLS Export Options Export mode Different files Page range Loos f Sheet name Sheet name Text export mode Value _ Show grid lines Export hyperlinks hocu cancel e Export mode Choose one of the available modes to export a document The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages The D
381. parameters in a calculated field s expression To close the dialog and save the expression click OK 4 Finally drag the calculated field from the Field List onto the required band just like an ordinary data field F jmi Page Field List nit Pri Q GHE myDataset 3 Discontinued fab EAN13 The report with a calculated field is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 198 Report Designer 199 Product Name Unit Price Order Amount Chang 19 00 760 00 Aniseed Syrup 10 00 700 00 Queso Cabrales 21 00 630 00 Sir Rodney s Scones 10 00 400 00 Gorgonzola Telino 12 50 075 00 Mascarpone Fabioli 32 00 1260 00 Gravad lax 26 00 1300 00 Ipoh Coffee 46 00 2460 00 R gede sild 9 50 665 00 Chocolade 12 75 692 50 Maxilaku 20 00 1200 00 Gnocchi di nonna Alice 36 00 360 00 See Also Add Parameters to a Report Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 199 Report Designer 200 Add Parameters to a Report For your report you can employ parameters which can be requested each time the report is being previewed And based on specified values the report will then being filtered It s also possible to employ parameters in expressions of calculated fields In this example we ll create two date time parameters to filter out orders which don t
382. pecified totals will be displayed after corresponding groups and in the report footer Page Interface This page displays all available numerical and date time fields that aren t used to group data Using the check box table you can specify which functions should be calculated for these fields Sometimes data fields can contain empty values this is different from say zero in a numeric field If you don t want to take these values into account when calculating totals check Ignore NULL values Otherwise these values will be treated as zeros for numeric fields and the earliest system date for date time fields Report Wizard Summary plons What summary values would you like calculated Field Name UnitPrice UnitsInStock UnitsOnOrder Result You can stop the wizard on this step by clicking Finish In this case your report will look similar to the image below 2011 DevExpress Inc 420 Report Designer aso Reporti Category ID Product Name Unit Price Units In Stock Units On Order 1 chai 51800 3a J chans 51900 17 4 Guarana Famtastica 5450 20 0 Sasquatch Ale 14 00 111 0 Steeleye Stout 518 00 20 J Cote de Blaye 42530 17 i Chatrense verte 318 00 go J poh Cof 545 00 17 10 Laughing Lumberjack 514 00 52 Ai Lager Outback Lager 515 00 15 10 Rhonbrau Klosterbiae 57 75 135 J Lakkalikoas 518 00 47 J Sum by Avg 37 98 Max 40 F nisssd Syrup 51000 13 70 Chef Anton s Cajun 522 00 33 0 If you
383. perty defines from which table or view of your dataset the Chart obtains its data And the Data Adapter property is auto defined as well Now to specify the data field which should provide data for the series names so that a new series is created for each record in that data field set the Series Data Member property value 2011 DevExpress Inc 263 Report Designer 264 E Data Bindings Data Adapter Data Member Data Source Pivot Grid Data Source Options Series Data Member Series Name Template g a myDataSet Series Sorting a E GSP Series Template Series Data Member Gets or sets the name of the data field generate and populate series 5 Then adjust the series template which is accessed via the chart s Series Template property First set the Argument Data Member which specifies from where the data for points arguments is obtained chart Chart Series Template i e Argument Scale Type Data Filters Argument Data Member Gets or sets the name of the data field series points Make sure that the Argument Scale Type property is set to an appropriate value Otherwise e g when your data is of the date time type but this property is set to Qualitative the resulting Chart will be seriously affected and incorrectly represent its underlying
384. played by UPC EO symbology as 04252614 and represents the 042100005264 UPC A code check digit included This symbology is a variation of UPC A which allows for a more compact barcode by eliminating extra zeros The first digit is always 1 and the last digit is a checksum digit of the original UPC A code Not every UPC A code can be transformed into UPC E1 E g the control s text string 4210000526 is displayed by UPC E1 symbology as 14252611 and represents the 142100005261 UPC A code check digit included UPCSupplemental2 This is a supplemental two digit barcode Make sure that the control s text string contains two digits UPCSupplemental5 This is a supplemental five digit barcode usually used to indicate the suggested retail price of a book Make sure that the control s text string contains five digits 2011 DevExpress Inc 3 2 Report Designer 373 e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL Tag and Text to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Tag This property allows you to add additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be a
385. port document Also note that there is no Can Grow option for the Subreport control as it always increases its height depending on its contents e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle by the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies a value indicating whether the current control should be printed when set to Yes or hidden No on report generation Data e Report Source Determines a report to be included as a subreport If report classes of the application that invoked the Report Designer are compiled into one assembly then they are available as items in this combo box e Report Source Url Defines an URL of a report definition file REPX to be used as a report source 2011 DevExpress Inc 393 Report Designer 394 Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units The Subreport isn t limited by the visible size of the control The size of its actual content is taken into account when rendering the subreport on the page Note that depending on its contents its width is unlimited and its height is increased e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved arou
386. port Designer E e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Text Allows you to define a line of static text to be displayed To type several lines of text click the control s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click Edit Text or use the Lines property Note that when a Label is selected in the designer you may simply start typing the text and it will be automatically entered into the in place editor If the current report has a data source the Text property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Text Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Xisx Format String Specifies the native XLSX format string for the control s content which is to be preserved when the report is being exported to XLSX This format string is independent from the general value formatting Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Sc
387. port Explorer to select multiple elements hold down SHIFT while selecting and then do one of the following e Press DELETE e Right click the report element and in the invoked Context Menu choose Delete a a EF eT 5 Ering To Front Send To Back Align To Grid kK jE rl Insert Band Insert Detail Report foom b Er Properties e In the Main Menu select Edit Delete File Edit View Format Window Undo Cez Redo Ctrl x Cut Ctrl X I Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Select All Ctrl A Note You can cancel the operation by pressing CTRL Z Note that certain elements cannot be deleted such as the Detail band See Also Change Element Layout in Your Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 188 Report Designer aso Add or Modify Static Information in Your Report In a report staticand dynamic information is displayed using appropriate controls Dynamic information changes through a report such as values from a database which comprise the main report data or service information such as current user name or page numbers Approaches to embed dynamic information to your report are detailed in the following document Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Static information is text or images that aren t obtained from a data source and therefore don t change through the report and don t depend on the current computer Static information c
388. port Wizard allows you to create reports of two kinds standard reports and label reports To create a standard report invoke the Report Wizard dialog and choose the Standard Report option on the Welcome page Report Wizard Welcome to the Report Wizard This wizard helps you automatically create a report according to the selected wizard options Choose a report type and click Next After completing the Standard Report wizard you will get a tabular banded report Depending on how many wizard steps you complete you don t necessarily have to go through all the pages you can apply data grouping display totals select one of the predefined style sheets etc The following image shows a sample report created using the Standard Report Wizard 2011 DevExpress Inc no Report Designer a20 My First Report Category lO 1 FroductID Product Name Unit Price Units In Stock Units On Order 1 Chai 318200 39 0 2 Chane 519 00 17 4 24 Guarana Fantastica 5450 20 J 34 Sasquatch Ale 14 00 111 0 35 Steeleye Stout 18 00 20 J 34 Cate de Blaye 2634 17 i 33 Chartreuse verte 18 00 a2 0 43 Ipoh Coit 346 00 17 10 a7 Laughing Lumberjack 314 00 52 J Lazer 70 Outback Lager 15 00 15 10 73 Eh abrim Elostearbias 97 75 135 a 76 Lakkalikoan 15 00 47 0 Avg 37 98 Category lO Z Product IB Product Name Unit Price Units In Stock Units On Order 3 Anisead Syn 10 00 13 70 Chef Anton s Cam 421 00 53 J Samoning 3 C
389. pplier ID b 3 UnitsInStock k faa UnitsOnOrder pe la gt Parameters T ProductName QuantityP ern 6 Finally you can customize various properties of the tables to improve their appearance For example using the Property Grid you can define their Borders as well as Background Color To customize the cells text options use the Formatting Toolbar A noteworthy feature is the capability to specify odd even styles for the detail table The table report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc m Report Designer 242 Product Unit Quantity Unit Price Chai 10 boxes x20 bags 16 00 Chang 24 12 oz bottles 19 00 Aniseed Syrup 12 550 ml bottles 10 00 Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning 46 6 oz jars 22 00 Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix 36 boxes 21 35 Grandma s Boysenberry Spread 12 8 oz jars 25 00 Uncle Bob s Organic Dried Pears Northwoods Cranberry Sauce 12 12 oz jars 40 00 12 1 Ib pkgs 30 00 Mishi Kobe Niku 18 500 g pkgs 97 00 Ikura 12 200 ml jars 31 00 Queso Cabrales 1 kg pkg 21 00 Queso Manchego La Pastora 10 500 g pkgs 36 00 Konbu 2 kg box 6 00 Tofu 40 100gpkos 23 25 See Also Multi Column Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 242 Report Designer E Label Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a label report containing employee badges using the Report Wizard To create a label report
390. ppressed Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the blank records Suppress and Shrink e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview e Word Wrap When this property is set to Yes text entered into the multiline Label is wrapped to the next line if it doesn t fit the line or comes across a newline character If the this property is set to No text entered into the multiline Label will be displayed on the same line until a newline character is entered Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL Tag and Text to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Lines Provides access to the Text property of a Label in the Multiline mode e Summary Allows you to perform calculations summary max min average etc over a data field For more information on calculating summaries refer to Add Totals to a Report Note Summarization is possible for a single data column only To perform calculations with several data fields use calculated fields 2011 DevExpress Inc 341 Re
391. priate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 348 Report Designer a Picture Box The Picture Box control is intended to display images of numerous formats in a report An image can be loaded from an external file from a bound data source or from a web location using the specified URL a H gt The following image formats are supported BMP DIB RLE JPG JPEG JPE JFIF GIF EMF WMF TIF TIFF PNG and ICO To quickly load an image from an external file use the control s Smart Tag sizing Anchor Vertically Formatting Rules To bind the control to a data field containing images right click the corresponding Field List item and then drag and drop it onto a report This will invoke the Context Menu where you can choose the Picture Box and it will be automatically created and bound to the selected data field GHO myDataSet A categories fia CategoryID Py ture Bo ab CategoryName Rich Text z z
392. printer to use when printing a report Note that the specified printer should be installed on the machine e Using Settings of the Default Printer Specifies which of the default printer s settings should be used when printing a report Parameters e Parameters Allows you to access a report s parameters collection e Request Parameters Allows you to define whether it s required to request the values of a report s parameters when generating the report Printing e Show Print Margin Warnings Specifies whether an error message is shown when the page margins are set outside the printable area e Show Print Status Dialog Specifies whether a print status dialog is shown when a document is being printed Printing Page 1 of myReport1 Structure e Bands Allows you to invoke the Report Editor intended to manage and customize a report s bands 2011 DevExpress Inc 417 Report Designer ais Report Wizard The Report Wizard is a tool that allows you to easily create reports based on built in templates Using this tool you can do the following e Create a new report from scratch In the main menu select File New with Wizard or press CTRL W e Edit an existing report Click the report s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the Design in Report Wizard context link Report Tasks 7 Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder pands Data Source none Data Member Data Adapter none
393. ption k fea Icon _17 tl fing Icon_25 Picture I Parameters e Amore flexible way to create data bound elements is to right click a Field List item and then drag and drop it onto a report This will invoke the Context Menu where you can choose which control should represent your data and it will be automatically created and bound to the selected data field Hal myDataSet A categories fia CategoryID fa CategoryName Be Al Rich Text l ee Check Box ioa Icon_17 E i on 2 Bar Code fip Code ae Basson ap i Using the Smart Tag Click a control s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the Data Binding drop down list and select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 193 Report Designer 194 i i Edit Text Clear Load File None pjes myDataSet Om Categories 1 CategoryI0 CategoryName fab Description i01 Icon_17 3 fina Icon_25 Toi Picture A Parameters x None Data Binding Using the Property Grid Click a control to select it and in the Property Grid expand the Data Bindings branch that holds the bindable options Specify a data field for the required attribute e g Text Ela Property Grid x a labell Data Bindings A Bookmark Navigaton URL Tag Text Binding aes myDataSet Be d Categories cl CategoryID i Categor yName fab Description b fio Icon_17 Sm Icon_25 STT
394. pts Errors Panel Note that scripts are saved to a file along with the report s layout for details on this refer to Back Up the Current Layout Before Modifying It Scripting Specifics 1 Scripting language The report scripts may be written in one of the following languages that the NET framework supports C Visual Basic and J Since J is not installed with the framework installation by default make sure it is present before writing code in it The scripting language is specified via the Script Language property of the Report object It is set to C by default 2 Scripting scope Script execution is performed in the following way The report engine generates a temporary class in memory The names of the variables are defined by the Name properties of the controls and objects they represent When the script is preprocessed its namespace directives are cut from the script code and added to the namespace where the temporary class is defined After preprocessing all scripts are placed in the code of the temporary class Then the resulting class is compiled in memory and its methods are called when events occur Scripting offers many advantages you can declare classes they will become inner classes variables methods etc A variable declared in one script is accessible in another script because it is in fact a variable of the temporary class 3 Reference External Assemblies The Script References property of the Report obj
395. r ARROW keys Moves focus to the next command in the corresponding direction TAB Moves focus to the next previous command SHIFT TAB ESC Moves focus away from the currently focused bar Open and Close Menus To open a sub menu displayed within a bar do one of the following e Focus the sub menu using one of the methods described above and press the ENTER or DOWN ARROW e If the sub menu s name contains an underscored letter then if the bar is focused press the underscored letter if the bar is not focused hold the ALT key down and then press the underscored letter To open a menu displayed within another menu do one of the following e Focus the sub menu and press the RIGHT ARROW e If the menu s name contains an underscored letter press the underscored letter To close the currently opened menu press ESC See Also Invoke Toolbar and Menu Commands 2011 DevExpress Inc 570 Toolbars and Menus 571 Select Commands Invoke Toolbar and Menu Commands To invoke a specific bar or menu command do one of the following e Click the command with the mouse e Focus the command and then press ENTER e If a command is visible and it contains an underscored letter in its name then if the bar or menu that contains this command is focused then press this underscored letter if the bar or menu that contains this command is not focused hold the ALT key down and then press this underscored letter e Press the shortc
396. r Detail GroupFooter zi PageFooter BottomMargin 2 Then place a Label bound to a data field onto it and in the Property Grid expand its Summary category 7 fal ReportFooter one band per report L E Running Total Count 10 Ignore Null Values Yes Running Gets or sets a value spedfying a report area for which the arithmetic function is calculated Set the Running option to Report and Function to Count The Ignore NULL values option is useful for functions like Count or Average because the number of elements counted will depend on it If required you can specify the Format String e g as Total Count 0 Note that value formatting is applied to a summary independently of the general formatting and has a greater priority Get the Result The report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 302 Report Designer 303 Kieaala 3 Ala wx MalH 4 Category 6 lkura 31 00 Camarvon Tigers 62 50 Nord Ost Matjeshenng 29 69 Inlagd Sill 19 00 Gravad lax 26 00 Boston Crab Meat 16 40 Spegesild 12 00 Escargots de Bourgogne 13 25 R d Kaviar 15 00 Units Count 9 Total Count 62 jaa la d Designer LA Preview d HTML View Scripts Page3of3 Zoom Factor 100 See Also Show the Curr
397. r It maintains a consistent layout of controls within a form for you so whenever you resize the form the controls do not overlap You can invoke customization mode to temporarily hide specific editors and then show them again resize the controls save and then restore the layout etc Details TE Performance Attributes Manufacturer Mercedes Benz Model SL500 Roadster Category w Sports se http usw mercedes com Price 83 600 00 Delivery Date 7 24 2002 In stack Record 1 of 15 iea Layout Customization e Start Layout Customization e Finish Layout Customization e Hide and Display Elements using a Layout Manager e Change Element Layout e Resize Interface Elements e Add Empty Regions Separators Splitters and Labels e Change Text Label Options e Work with Interface Element Groups e Create and Delete Tabbed Groups Save and Restore Layout e Save and Restore Interface Layout 2011 DevExpress Inc o Layout Manager 99 Layout Customization Start Layout Customization The layout of controls can be modified in customization mode To invoke customization mode right click an empty Space within the Layout Manager and select Customize Layout Employee ID 1 Title Ms Ren Customize Layout Reset Layout First Mame Nancy L S Davolio Job Title Sales Representative Report To Andrew Fuller Birth Date 12 8 1948 Hire Date 5 1 199 As a result the Customization Form open
398. r parent menu items Customization Categories Commands Editor n o BE File Edit Format Toolbars Help p Jog saal z lu Italic Ctrl I Underline Ctrl U Align Left Ckrl L Description Makes selected text and numbers bold IF the selection is already bold clicking button removes bold Formatting To remove a bar command from a bar drag the bar command away from the bar and drop it when the mouse cursor changes its image to x o lB 4 amp a la Rig You can cancel drag and drop while dragging an item by pressing ESC Note 2011 DevExpress Inc ses Toolbars and Menus see Rearrange Toolbars and Menus To move a bar docked to a form to a new position drag it via its drag widget File Edit Format Toolbars Help z a 4g ii EJ fH e To move a floating bar drag it by its caption Editor File Edit Format Toolbars Help To make a docked bar floating drag the bar away from the form s edges Editor m fa ba File Edit Format Toolbars Help A 7 Line 1 Position 1 2011 DevExpress Inc see Toolbars and Menus 567 Rearrange Bar Commands To rearrange bar commands do the following 1 Open the Customization window 2 Drag a bar command to a new position To copy a bar command press CTRL while dragging amp tNote You can move commands even when the customization window is closed For this purpose hold
399. r Unit Price Antonio del valle Saave sz Sort Ascending 21 00 Antonio del valle Saave 1 Sort Descending 38 00 Mayumi Ohno Clear Sorting 6 00 Mayumi Ohno S Group By This Column 23 25 amp Mayumi Ohno o 15 50 4 Column Chooser Best Fit Clear Filter SE Filter Editor Best Fit fall columns To remove sorting by a column click a column header while holding the CTRL key down You can also select Clear Sorting from the column header context menu Sort Data in Card Views To sort records by a card field s values and replace existing sort conditions that are applied to the current or other fields 1 Click the Customize button 2011 DevExpress Inc Customize Burton am am Category Sports a Model SL500 Roadster Model CLESS 4M Cabriolet Trademark Mercedes Benz Trademark Mercedes Benz Hyperlink 9 EEG YAW mercedes corm Hyperlink http Uw mercedes com Picture Picture Description Description Al keho u 2 In the Customization window that opens click the Sort button that corresponds to the target card field Customize mi ort iter e Trademark Sort Filter v Made __ Sort Fite Category __ sort Filter x Description Filter e Hyperlink Picture Filter To sort records by a card field s values while preserving existing sort conditions 1 Click the Customize button 2 In the Customization window that opens click the Sort bu
400. r a Report Change Page Settings for a Report Bind a Report to Data 2011 DevExpress Inc 223 Report Designer 224 Bind a Report to Data The Report Designer is primarily designed to work with data aware reports meaning that a report obtains its general dynamic data from an external data source most types of which are supported This document describes how a newly created report can be bound to a data source To bind a report to data do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the Data Source drop down list and click Add New DataSource Reporti E a EE ET ETI Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands Data Source Data Member Data Adapter Filter String Ill Print when Data Source is Empty 7 Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty Detail Print Count i ck Li i Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch E Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection Watermark None 1 i 1 1 3 In the first page of the invoked Report Wizard define the dataset name which will then appear in the Field List 2011 DevExpress Inc 224 Report Designer 225 Report Wizard Create a new dataset The dataset contains the tables and columns you need for your report In order to create anew dataset first give it a name 4 On the next page specify the database to be u
401. r or a single page range For example 5 12 Specify the necessary settings and click Print To print a document without invoking the Print dialog see the Print a Document Using Default Settings topic amp tNote If you try to print a document whose margins are outside of the printable area you ll see a warning message Click Yes to print the document anyway if you are sure that your printer supports the specified page margins 2011 DevExpress Inc 139 Print Preview 140 Print a Document Using Default Settings To send a document directly to the default printer without customizing print settings do one of the following e Click the Quick Print amp button on the toolbar e On the File menu click Print To learn how to select a printer number of copies and other printing options refer to the Print a Document via the Print Dialog topic iNote If you try to print a document whose margins are outside of the printable area you ll see a warning message Click Yes to print the document anyway if you re sure that your printer Supports the specified page margins 2011 DevExpress Inc mo Print Preview tat Change Printing Settings via the Page Setup Dialog To start the page setup dialog box do one of the following e Click the Page Setup Ly button on the toolbar e On the File menu click Page Setup The following dialog will be invoked Page Setup S Orientation Margins inches
402. r user defined category Reports can be grouped so a group of reports can be scheduled with a single selection All report designs and definitions are stored in a single file so they can easily be retrieved and managed Includes user defined report filtering e Charts and pivot tables can be included on a report e Reports can include data grouping sorting sub reports pictures advanced styles summaries calculated fields scripting watermarks bookmarks and more e Different reports can be based on different data sources e Reports can be scheduled to run once or in a recurrence pattern i e daily weekly monthly etc e Report designs and definitions can be copied to make new designs or definitions easily e Browse reports using the unique report carousel e Report output can be saved in a user defined folder or repository e An automatically created HTML home page providing a link to folders and reports in the repository can be created to provide a static web site of reports e Reports can be send to an FTP site to be part of a external web site Page 4 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Starting the Report Manager From CleverQ the Report Manager can be started from the Navigator Drop down menu or from within the program when viewing a specific report This includes the additional drilldowns from a gauge or a scorecard from a dashboard When the Report Manager is started from the Navigator or Drop down menu the user can
403. r will be invoked and its contents will be replaced with the pressed character Focus a cell and click the Navigator control s Edit button Edit If a cell editor provides a dropdown you can activate the editor and open its dropdown by pressing ALT DOWN ARROW or F4 Select and Deselect Cell Text Press F2 or CTRL A Close Cell Editor and Accept Changes Made Do one of the following e Press ENTER e Click the End Edit button within the Navigator control 4 4 Record 3of 2155 Jim g End Edit e Click any other grid cell e Focus any other control Discard Changes To discard changes made in a cell press ESC To discard changes made in all cells in a row card do one of the following e Press ESC twice e Click the Cancel Edit button within the Navigator control bjll Record sof 2155 elir l i eR Cancel Edit Open Cell Editor s Dropdown Do one of the following e Press ALT DOWN ARROW or F4 e Click the editor s dropdown button Close Cell Editor s Dropdown 2011 DevExpress Inc For all editors providing a dropdown you can close the dropdown by pressing ALT DOWN ARROW If the calculator is displayed in the dropdown it can be closed via CTRL ENTER Dropdowns displaying lists of items can be closed by clicking an item with the mouse or by selecting an item with the keyboard and pressing ENTER Change Values Change Date Time Values You can edit these cell values without opening the dropdown ca
404. rations To move a field to a different position within the same area you can also use the field s context menu e Right click the field s header to activate the context menu Quantity Year H Quarter s 1994 Total E Andrew Fuller Refresh Data Hide 1 an Order b T7 TT Andrew Fuller Total Show Field List 154 z254 Show Frefilter e Select the required command from the Order menu ta Refresh Data Hide Move to Beginning Move to Left j Show Prefilter Move to Right Move to End 2011 DevExpress Inc 131 Pivot Table 132 Selection and Navigation Select Cells in Pivot Tables Multiple cells can be selected simultaneously and their contents can then be copied to the clipboard This topic Shows how Select Cells and Clear the Current Selection To select a single cell do one of the following e Click the cell Quantity Elvear H Quarter E 1994 1994 Tota Sales Person ef Category Name atra Qtra E Andrew Fuller E Grains Cereals 7 D Meat Poultry 1 jo Seafood Andrew Fuller Total J e Focus the cell using the ARROW keys To select a row or column of cells click the appropriate header Quantity ear 4 Quarter 0g i 1994 1994 Total 1995 Sales Person ef l Category Mame G Andrew Fuller d grains Cereals Fa 470 D Meat Poultry 311 Froduce K 17 37 100 bai Seafood TT ce 397 An
405. re are more than one you need you will need to create more than one data source Once the table or view is selected you can test the connection by using the Test Select Field Value dropdown that will give you a list of the fields or columns in that table or view Page 13 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual HE Data Source Detail Data Source Name Emnes a Data Source Type _ Access ODBC D Cleverd ODBC DSN QuickBooks Data Browse for Access File User Name if req d Password if req d Table Query View Employee Test Select Field Value The field value is only here to test the data source Itis not stored as part of the data source E T NN eres rene E ees You can also check out the source by pressing the View Data button It may appear that you can edit the data but the data is read only and will not be written back to the database HE View Data Pill Es Drag a column header here to group by that column m 300000 934380930 a 11 1999 12 15 2012 1355596848 Jenny Miller Jenny Miller 45N Elm Street Middle m 310000 934380930 8 11 1999 12 15 2012 1355596849 Shane B Hamby Shane B Hamby 2453 West 25th St Baysh 4 4 Record 1of 3 ek il The CleverQ Data Source allows you to create a link to the data structures within your QBD file Several of them have already been setup for you and you may not need to create any new sources to the QBD file The Table Query View called Extracted Da
406. readability of reports with group contents that are several pages long Without a repeated group header at the top of the page the report may be difficult to read This property is also accessible via the band s Smart Tag Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Sorting Summary This property is available for the Group Header band only It allows you to sort groups by a summary function result 2011 DevExpress Inc 402 Report Designer 403 e Visible Specifies whether the bands should be visible in print preview Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Design e Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Layout e Height Specifies the band s height in report units e Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in report measurement units which is to be preserved within the band when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines 2011 DevExpress Inc 403 Report Designer aoa Report Header and Footer The Report Header and Report Footer are the only types of report bands rendered once per report lal ReportHeader one band per report Products by Categories el Detail ral ReportFooter one band
407. refer to Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report and Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report You may use the Group Header bands for grouping by multiple data fields in one of the following ways 1 Add several Group Header bands Specify one group field for each of these bands GroupHeader Ship Country J GroupHeader Ship City J v E Detail OrdenD alj T OrderDate This results in nested grouping of the report s data Den mark Arhus 10367 12 25 1954 Vaffeliernet 13 55 10399 01 31 1955 Vaffeljernet 27 36 10465 04 05 1995 Waffeljernet 145 04 10591 08 07 1995 Vaffeljernet 55 92 10602 08 17 1995 Waffeljernet 2 92 10688 11 01 1995 Waffeljernet 295 09 10744 12 18 1995 Waffeljernet 69 19 10769 01 08 1995 Waffeljernet 65 06 10971 04 02 1996 Vaffeliernet 176 48 10546 04 11 1996 Vaffeljernet 27 20 10994 05 02 1956 Vaffeljernet 65 53 Keabenhawn 10341 11 29 1994 Simons bistro 26 78 10417 02 16 1995 Simons bistro 70 29 10556 07 04 1995 Simons bistro 3 80 10642 03 22 1995 Simons bistro 41 89 10669 10 16 1995 Simons bistro 24 39 10802 01 29 1996 Simons bistra 257 26 11074 06 05 1956 Simons bistro 19 44 Finland Helsinki 10615 08 30 1995 Wilman Kala 75 10673 10 19 1995 Wilman Kala 72 76 10695 11 07 1995 Wilman Kala 16 72 2 Specify several group fields for the Group Fields property of the Group Header band The data will be grouped by certain combinations of field values 2011 DevExpress Inc aoo R
408. rent paragraph with single line spacing CTRL 2 Formats a current paragraph with double line spacing CTRL 5 Formats a current paragraph with one and a half line spacing See Also Apply Styles 2011 DevExpress Inc a82 Rich Text Editor asa Apply Styles To format a text or a paragraph you can apply styles A style is a group of formatting characteristics All these characteristics are applied to a text or a paragraph at once when you apply a style Thus styles allow you to change text and paragraph appearance quicker than setting all formatting characteristics separately Format Text Format Paragraphs A character based style includes characteristics to format text within a paragraph e g font type and size bold and italic formats etc A paragraph based style affects paragraph formatting characteristics such as text alignment line spacing etc It can also include character formatting characteristics To apply a style do the following 1 Select text or a paragraph that you want to format 2 Click or type a required style name in the Quick Styles box on the Styles toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc ass Rich Text Editor 484 Lists Numbered Lists Create a Numbered List as You Type 1 Point to the position within a document from which you want to begin your list 2 Click the Numbering ja button on the Paragraph toolbar o ri a l m E fe ET 5 3 Type the text 4
409. report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 387 Report Designer 388 Page Break The Page Break control s sole purpose is to insert a page delimiter at any point within a report This control is visually represented by a short line attached to the report s left margin as shown in the following image Namie subreportl Page Break control Namie subreport The Page Break control is useful when you need to insert a page break between controls within a band for example to divide subreports so that the second subreport starts printing on a new page Another example of the Page Break s use can be found in the following tutorial Limit the Number of Records per Page tNote Note that when you need a page break before or after printing a certain band you may set its Page Break property to Before the Band or After the Band instead of using the Page Break control In the Property Grid the Page Break control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Formatting Rules Invokes
410. report s Data Source property must be set to None Otherwise the Chart will be blank when previewed and repeated as many times as there are records in the data source 4 After the dataset is created it is assigned to the Chart s Data Source property Its Data Member property defines from which table or view of your dataset the Chart obtains its data And the Data Adapter property is auto defined as well So once again click the Chart s Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the Sertes link 2011 DevExpress Inc 258 Report Designer 259 There are no visible series to represent in a chart Try to add new series or make sure that at least one of them is visible Collection 5 Now in the invoked Series Collection Editor create a series of the required view type e g Bar Then switch to the Properties tab at the right of the editor s window and assign the existing data set object to the Data Source property of the series And assign the required data fields to the Argument Data Member and Value Data Member properties which determine the coordinates for series points Series Collection HART series 1 Appea arante El Data Argument Data Member Products Productante Data Filters Collection Data Source myDataSet Summary Function El Value Data Members Collection Value
411. report s data source Name Determines a report s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Data Source s Schema Allows you to load an XML XSD file containing the schema of a report s data source Designer Options Contains the following options Show Designer s Hints The designer hints are intended to provide tooltips both describing the purpose of certain report elements for inexperienced users and describing the reasons and solutions for possible export or printing warnings By using this property these hints can be turned on or off EHEJ myDataSet Be if 2 Parameters Drag and drop this item to create a table with its items 0f Drag this item with the right mouse button or SHIFT to create a header table with field names or Use the context menu to add a calculated field or parameter DataMember Products Show Export Warnings The export warnings appear when report controls are overlapped indicating that a report layout may be incorrect when exporting to certain table based formats such as XLS HTML or RTF E E gt a RI m Export warning The following controls are overlapped and may be exported to HTML RTF XLS XLSX CSV and Text incorrectly label labeli Show Printing Warnings The printing warnings are intended to notify you that some of a report s controls are placed outside the right page mar
412. report to a data source 3 To add a Page Header to the report right click anywhere on the report s surface and in the invoked Context Menu choose Insert Band Page Header TopMargin Insert Detail Report 2 oom P E Properties ReportHeader GroupHeader Detail GroupFooter i ReportFooter zi PageFooter BottomMargin 4 Now add two Table controls to the report s Page Header and Detail band To do this in the Toolbox click the Table icon Then in the Page Header s content area click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse cursor across the Detail band PageHeader one band per page v Detail PageHeader one band per page ableCelH tableCelb tableCell _ ableCelll tableCel tableCel As a result two tables are created One will be used as a header and the other one for the report s detail information 5 Type the headers into the upper table s cells and bind the corresponding cells in the detail section to 2011 DevExpress Inc 240 Report Designer m the appropriate data fields This can be done by simply dropping these fields from the Field List onto the cells PageHeader one band per page EHO myDataSet MyWa tase 2 products Product Unit Quantity Unit Price faa CategoryID y El Detail G ara Discontinued O Es tablecell m Faal ProductID SE ProductName fab QuantityPerUnit fa ReorderLevel fa Su
413. ress Email Subject CleverQ Report Manager Email Message See attached report Send Test Email The FTP preferences include the required items to send a report file to an FTP site By default the files will be sent to the root folder of the FTP site but you can have subfolders and you can specify the subfolder as the destination folder when defining the Report Queue entry Only reports processed from the queue can be sent to an FTP site The Web preference to Create Home Page if set to yes will create an index htm file in the repository so the repository can be a local static web site for reports and the home page will contain links to the files Files indexed include PDF HTML HTM and MHT If an Index Master htm file exists it will be used as part of the Home Page This allows you to create a custom home page with a logo If you do not have this file a default home page will be created The repository may contain subfolders and these are treated as groups and will appear as a link on the parent index htm and will open a new index htm file created in the subfolder This allows you to group reports and organize the static web site more You might also use this feature to provide security on the website using Windows security to give access to users by subfolder The Data preference is optional and contains the preference PDC which means Preferred Data Connection This is used if you are connecting several reports to a
414. ripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks a Label The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field
415. rm in the next figure and you have all kinds of options for the recurrence pattern as well as the range of recurrence el Suuuinigeot Peeuyenes Aopoinkment time 3 10 52 PM End 9 3 45 00PM 2 Duration 34 minutes Recurrence pattern Daily O Weekly Every days Monthly O Every weekday C Yearly Range of recurrence Start 6 23 2010 No end date End after occurrences End by 7212010 OK Cancel Remove Recurrence Page 44 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Report Queue Processing In order for the reports to be processed in the Queue you will need to start the Report Processor This is done from either clicking on the block on the Navigator labeled Start Report Processor or by using the pull down menu item Tools Process Queue When you do this you will see this message The Report Processor has started and will run as long as the Report Manager is opened To run the Report Processor by itself use the Windows Task Scheduler to schedule the Following File set to run the Report Processor For 5 hours Di CleverQ Test DatalMidstates MidStatesData_ Reports bat This Filename has been copied to the clipboard to assist you with creating the scheduled task The message says that as long as the Report Manager is opened the queue will be processed But normally you will want to run a series of reports after hours and this requires starting the Report Processor automatica
416. rmation on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible 2011 DevExpress Inc 343 Report Designer 344 Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview e Word Wrap When this property is set to Yes text entered into a Check Box is wrapped to the next line if it doesn t fit the line Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Check State Navigation URL Tag and Text to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values froma Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Check State This property allows you to quickly specify the Checked Unchecked Indeterminate state of a Check Box the Indeterminate state is displayed as a grayed out checked box Note that if you only want to use Checked and Unchecked states you may use the Checked property instead e Checked This property allows you to define whether a Check Box is checked or not e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field e T
417. rmines whether a pane s shadow should be visible and defines its color and size e Scroll amp Zoom Enable or disable a pane s scrolling and zooming for specific axes e Scroll Bars If scrolling and or zooming is enabled for an axis adjust the scroll bars visibility position and appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc 26 Axes Page Tasks e Customize axes properties e Customize the appearance of axis labels e Add a constant line and a strip line to an axis e Enable automatic and manual scale breaks Page Elements Chart preview area Axis selector Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 sou caddy a a m TT Wi Logarithmic Optio Salil JUE ISU _ Logarithmic Logarithmic base H H BE B B Customize X and Y axes of the diagram Note that you may select an axis to be modified on the chart preview Options tabs Chart preview area Previews a chart s layout Note that you can select an axis to be modified on the chart preview area directly 2011 DevExpress Inc p k Axis selector Specifies an axis to be customized Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e General Specifies visibility position range and format properties e Appearance Defines color thickness and interlacing options e Elements Customizes title tickmarks and grid lines properties e Labels Specifies position and text for automatically created labels or a
418. ross tab reports creation Visible Specifies whether a report should be created in print preview Calculated Fields Allows you to access a report s calculated fields collection Data Adapter Determines a report s data adapter used to populate the report s data source It is created automatically when the Data Member property is defined To learn more about this refer to Bind a Report to Data Data Member 2011 DevExpress Inc ata Report Designer ats itNote Determines a specific list in a report s Data Source for which the Report Designer objects display data To learn more about this refer to Bind a Report to Data Usually it is not necessary to specify the Data Member property when binding a report to data This property should only be set directly if the dataset contains more than one table Design Data Source Determines a report s data source To learn more about this refer to Bind a Report to Data Filter String Allows you to invoke the Filter String Editor which is intended to easily define a filtering condition for a report s data For more information about this refer to Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to a report for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts XML Data Path Allows you to define a path to data contained in an external XML file The data contained in the file will then be used as a
419. rs into the document Insert a Page Count 1 Click the Header or Footer button on the Header amp Footer toolbar For more information see Header and Footer Header Edit the header of the document The content in the header will appear at the top of each printed Edit the footer of the document The content in the footer will appear at the bottom of each printed page 2 Point to anywhere in the header or footer area where you want to insert the number of pages 2011 DevExpress Inc 531 Rich Text Editor 532 3 To add the number of pages click the Page Count button on the Header amp Footer toolbar z K Page Count 3 Insert total page count into the document 2011 DevExpress Inc 532 Rich Text Editor 533 Insert a Symbol The Rich Text Editor allows you to insert symbols that are not on your keyboard such as copyright symbols trademark symbols paragraph marks To insert a symbol do the following 1 Point to the position within the document where you want to insert a symbol 2 Click the Symbol button on the Symbols toolbar LOL n i E l I seb eal Symbol Insert symbols that are not on your keyboard such as copyright symbols trademark symbols paragraph marks and Unicode characters a I I I I I ee The Symbol dialog will be invoked ore Times New Roman 3 Select the symbol to be inserted and cl
420. s e Designer Tab e Preview Tab e HIML View Tab e Scripts Tab Additional Elements e Component Tray e Status Bar 2011 DevExpress Inc 314 314 Report Designer 315 Component Tray The Component Tray shows components non visual report helpers whose primary purpose is to bind a report to data You can click them to display and edit their settings using the Property grid CaseSensitive False Datasetame nwindDataSet Locale English United States Prefix EnforceConstraints True RemotingFormat Xml SchemaSerializatonMode IncludeSchema Note Component management and data binding configuration are usually performed by system administrators or your application vendor since these areas require advanced knowledge of database connectivity You will rarely if ever need to access component settings when modifying existing reports See Also Status Bar 2011 DevExpress Inc 31 Report Designer ate Context Menu The Context Menu can be invoked by the right clicking a report TopMargin Insert Detail Report ReportHeader Zoom Properties GroupHeader Detail GroupFooter i ReportFooter zi PageFooter BottomMargin or its elements bands and controls This menu provides quick access to frequently used commands e g zooming clipboard operations inserting bands etc The available action set v
421. s 331 OPN cal GUA a escrs tence sans scate nas u es a cucdasantcunsscusmanentssbesseysuecsa tends iencescusenuen cusses sueseae 332 AGU Ss Al E tatee ccs ccc aceneve se comeen neces co ruse crea cee uenc cocseee rather ae seeucaxeen cue eau tens a eit 334 LOOM WO OND AN fire cesta reetcncevare Cosastencus 3 seatacwasanencanira a a case av ecen sense cose vice A E aar EE 335 FRE POM GC Olt 00 ONS sec ccte cesar eccececctcaexed ep cepsesdeven cee sa eneees ccc E cxtcdegerventanecensaunuteceassosuactees 336 LADEE E E A ne atieucucaes sour eucde saaducanueucusdcurcsecssausennteceuchvesvcsk ess oes eaceeae wh paceceneneueneecweddase 340 CHECK BO ae saris ccs cr a cace ste se a Sercecee E Say tens tee ceeesatleves ocean veemmmecetutananteesastatencsnceeectu ata ieeteuws tense 343 RICAN ME a E E E E a a Paaseanerecusmuerascesn 346 PIG Mre BOr a ina un stuccetcssnisctsaasinedcevanncnainenvenaesetecocsa ss eves env ccsunatcestsas ceensatetecvannces nade esseaccuecemuestess 349 Panel Sar a ence seaseedeeas usnteetaantecesstereeccsie 353 MADIG a acs tee a oo uavesteenteceaerearee sete 356 ANG ROW sseceeci re cecnareancnceuane couashencus EE Ctunsidrcee E a 359 TADIC CG aoa ve ceca cxsewemeeecnctncee E seca uaa ceeinnenecuest sect lt nvesncecsucsanseevenbssentunetenuuseasnew ee 361 Enes severest hecresctes racemes E E tenes ustacecean cece osverce case 364 IAG Rice aliecescre care stecaa a Senta cee eccentric uae nnteut ue cea ea den enceu een uecece avian t
422. s Define the fonts that will not be embedded in the complete file to reduce the file size Separate the fonts with a semicolon e Images quality Choose the required document s image quality level The higher the quality the bigger the file and vice versa e Compressed Check this to enable compression e Show print dialog on open Check this if desired Password Security Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 166 Print Preview Password Security Require a password to open the document Restrict editing and printing of the document Change Permissons Passord Printing Allowed _ Enable copying of text images and other content Enable text access for screen reader devices for the visually impaired These options allow you to adjust the security options of the resulting PDF file e g enable open document editing printing and copying protection and specify which changes are allowed Additional Options You can also fill the Application Author Keywords Subject and Title fields See Also Exporting from Print Preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 167 167 Print Preview 168 HTML Specific Export Options When exporting a document you can define HTML specific exporting options using the following dialog HTML Export Options Export mode Single file Page range Loo Page border color HBB Black Page border width 1 Title reporti Character set Unicode UTF 8 Remove carriage
423. s use the settings which are available via the Series Template property Titles Invokes the Chart Title Collection Editor which allows you to manage and customize a Chart s titles Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks the control The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target propert
424. s zip codes charts etc spread across report sections called bands various headers footers and content sections The main interface elements helping you manage these building blocks are Control Toolbox Field List and Property Grid These elements allow you add controls to your report bind them to data and change their appearance and behavior settings respectively To learn more about these and other elements used in the Report Designer use the following links e Report Designer UI The documents in this section are dedicated to the elements of the Report Designer user interface e Report Controls The documents in this section describe options of each report control available in the Report Designer e Report Bands The documents in this section details the available kinds of report bands and their settings e Report Settings This document details settings that affect the entire report 2011 DevExpress Inc 313 Report Designer Report Designer UI The documents in this section are dedicated to the elements of the Report Designer user interface The Report Designer interface is comprised of the following elements General Elements e Control Toolbox e Design Panel e Main Menu Quick Access Tools e Context Menu e Smart Tag Toolbars e Main Toolbar e Formatting Toolbar e Layout Toolbar e Zoom Toolbar Dock Panels e Field List e Group and Sort Panel e Property Grid e Report Explorer e Scripts Errors Panel Tab
425. s Cajun Seasoning Chet Anton s Gumbo Mix Grandma s Boysenberry Spread Uncle Bob s Organic Dried Pears Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Mishi Kobe Niku lkura Queso Cabrales Queso Manchego La Pastora Konbu Conditionally Hide Bands 2011 DevExpress Inc 287 287 Report Designer Navigation The tutorials of this section cover the navigation related features of the Report Designer This section consists of the following tutorials e Add Bookmarks e Create Hyperlinks e Add a Cross Reference 2011 DevExpress Inc 288 288 Report Designer 289 Add Bookmarks This tutorial describes the steps to create a report with bookmarks a so called Document Map This feature allows you to easily navigate through the report during print preview To demonstrate the Document Map feature we ll use a report with grouping similar the one created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To create a report with bookmarks do the following 1 Click the Label in the Report Header band to select it and in the Property Grid set its Bookmark property to the same value as its text i e Products by Categories Navigation ESE Products by Categories Navigation Target Navigation URL Parent Bookmark none Bookmark Bindable Gets or sets the text of a bookmark for this control 2 Now select the Label in the report
426. s Eo Delete Selecting this item removes the current appointment If the current appointment is recurring then the Confirm Delete dialog is invoked Confirm Delete Do you want to delete all occurrences of the recurring appointment Wash or just this one Delete this occurrence Delete the series Edit Appointment Dialog When the appointment is being edited via the Edit Appointment dialog in order to delete the corresponding appointment or series of recurring appointments click the Delete button of this dialog If the current appointment is recurring then the Confirm Delete dialog is also invoked ec Ledger Inconsistency Appointment Subject Ledger Inconsistency Location Label Moderate Start time 7 25 2008 5 00 00 PM H _ All day event End time 7 25 2008 7 10 00 00 PM Resource Peter Dolan f Show time as A Normal _ Reminder Ledger Inconsistency Please fix it lt ba A Keyboard Shortcuts 2011 DevExpress Inc sas Scheduler sae The DELETE key or the CTRL D keyboard shortcut can be used to delete the selected appointment s 2011 DevExpress Inc s4 Scheduler Restrictions for Operations with Appointments Access to several operations may be restricted You may find that you re not able to perform the following operations due to restrictions applied by your application vendor or admi
427. s For This Year Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Gauges Income Scorecard Dashboard Definition Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Balance Sheet Indicators Profitability Analysis Indicators system system system system system system system system system system system system system system Balance Sheet Parameters This Year 4 simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data s Balance Sheet Parameters system Wia Record 1 of 18 gt o gt opi 96 This list allows you to see reports by category You can collapse or expand category groups There is also the ability to filter and sort the list by any of the columns The record selector on the bottom left provides a means to move through the list The scroll bar on the right side of the form also provides a means to scroll through the list Page 6 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual The Report Carousel is a great place to browse report definitions available Repos Balance Sheet Parameters This Year Description 4 simple alphabetical list of parameters grouped by data source UserID system Titlet Balance Sheet Parameters Titlez Category Banking Hll Record 11 of 18 gt P lal From here you can add a report definition to the queue or preview it directly You can click on the form to have the report carousel
428. s Inc 205 Report Designer 206 Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report For your report you can specify a filtering expression of virtually any level of complexity to exclude excessive or undesired data To filter a report s data click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Filter String entry Then in the invoked Filter String Editor construct an expression be Freight Is greater than or equal to 500 0 lt 7 Order Date Is greater than or equal to FromDate Ship Country Is not blank Customer ID Is between 5 lt and 15 amp calculated Field 1 Does not equal amp lt In the Filter String Editor you can either use the Visual expression builder or specify the expression in Text FilterString Editor Freight gt 500 0m And Order Date gt FromDate And Ship Country Is Not Null And Customer ID Between S 15 And calculated Fieldi lt gt 8 Note that it is possible to embed parameters into the expression and also request them each time a report is 2011 DevExpress Inc 206 Report Designer previewed To quit the dialog and save the changes click OK See Also Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report 2011 DevExpress Inc 207 207 Report Designer 208 Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report This document demonstrates ho
429. s a list of service items and currently hidden elements Customization SASE Hidden Items Vi Layout Tree view a E ControlM 163 169 A Controli 163 169 Label Customize Picture Image lig MiddleLeft ImagelInd i P Splitter ImageToT 5 DataNavigator Location 0 0 MaxSize 174 180 Minsize 174 180 TabbedGroup Mame layoutContro RA an Empty Space Item AL Separator i Picture Mame Now you can modify the current layout using drag and drop and resizing operations and commands provided by context menus Context menus that can be invoked by right clicking within the Layout Manager provide various customization commands Different commands are available depending upon the type ofa layout item which has been right clicked a regular control a group or tabbed group 2011 DevExpress Inc 99 Layout Manager 100 Finish Layout Customization To finish customization do one of the following e Close the Customization form by clicking on its close button Customization E ed ie ma e Right click the form and select Hide Customization Form Employee ID Title Gana han J j Erst Name Nancy Hide Customization Form Job Title i Reset Layout Report Ta nee Nene Hide Text Birth Date E Text Position Hide Iter ce Group CJ Create EmptySpace bem Gl Size Constraints 2011 DevExpress Inc 10
430. s content into a bar code of the specified type Multiple standard bar code symbologies are Supported The Zip Code control transforms its content into a zip code The width of a zip code s segment is adjustable The Chart is a sophisticated control used to embed graphs into your report It graphically represents a series of points using numerous 2D or 3D chart types A Chart can be populated with points both manually by specifying arguments and values for each point and dynamically by connecting it to the report s data source or binding it to a separate one The Pivot Grid control represents dynamic data obtained from an underlying data source in a cross tabulated form to create cross tab reports similar to Pivot Tables in 337 Report i i se ae Microsoft Excel Column headers display unique values from one data field and row headers from another field Each cell displays a Summary for the corresponding row and column values By specifying different data fields you can see different totals This allows you to get a compact layout for a complex data analysis Page Info The Page Info control is intended to add page numbers and system information the current date and time or the current user name into your report As with many other controls you can format this control s content Page Break The Page Break control s sole purpose is to insert a page delimiter at any point within a report
431. s for the control e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of controls contained in a Panel e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both Note that if the Anchor Vertically property is set to Bottom or Both the Can Grow property see below values are ignored and don t participate in calculating a final height value of this control e Can Grow When this property is set to Yes the control s height can be automatically increased if required to display the text If there are other controls below the current control they will be pushed down to 2011 DevExpre
432. s item has been expired ee G EF ProductName Y TopMargin EHE Detail m label2 This item has been expired Chai This item has been expired Chang This item has been expired Aniseed Syrup This item has been expired Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning This item has been expired Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix This item has been expired Grandma s Boysenberry Spread To embed dynamic information to a report if this information is contained in the report s data source this can easily be done using one of the following approaches e Using the Field List e Using the Smart Tag e Using the Property Grid After a control is bound to data you may wish to employ additional features which are listed in the final section of this document e Special Capabilities Using the Field List e To bind an existing report control to a data field click the required field item in the Field List and then drag and drop it onto the control The yellow database icon inside it will indicate that it s been successfully bound 2011 DevExpress Inc 192 Report Designer 193 a myDataSet Sie Categories CategoryID fat iona E Sm 101 Icon_25 l Picture a Parameters e To add a new data bound control simply drag the required data field from the Field List onto a report band This will create a Label bound to this data field ar myDataSet 35 Categories E Categor yID Categor yName See Descri
433. scending and descending sort orders respectively Department m Eg Engineering m j Finance To sort nodes by a column s values while preserving existing sort conditions do one of the following e Click a column header while holding the SHIFT key down until an UP or Down Arrow icon is displayed within the header e Right click a column header and select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu that will appear Erdaak Sort Ascending Department Location Corporate Hea pnterey Sort Descending an Francisco POPEATER A H Column Chooser onterey a i hey Best Fit Best Fit all columns To remove sorting by a column click a column header while holding the CTRL key down 2011 DevExpress Inc 576 Tree List of7 Layout Customization Expand and Collapse Nodes in a Tree List Expand and Collapse Nodes Do one of the following e Focus the node and then press PLUS on the keyboard to expand the node and MINUS to collapse the node e Click the node s expand button Department Location m Corporate Headquarters Monterey ps and Marketing l San Francisco m rss Finance Monterey m E Engineering Monterey Location Corporate Headquarters Monterey D pis and Mercing Emam 3 z Finance Monterey o E Engineering Monterey Indicator Cells Expand Nodes Recursively To expand a node and all its child nodes that have nested nodes focus th
434. scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Visible Specifies whether the band should be visible in print preview Sort Fields Invokes the Group Field Collection Editor which enables you to specify the fields for sorting the records within the band the sorting order Ascending Descending for each field and the order sequence For more information refer to Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the band for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts Name Determines a band s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via scripts Height Specifies the band s height in report measurement units Snap Line Padding Specifies the padding in report measurement units which is to be preserved within the band when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines 2011 DevExpress Inc 398 Report Designer 399 Misc e Keep Together with Detail Reports When this option is on the Detail Band will be always printed on the same page together with its child Detail Report Band or multiple bands 2011 DevExpress Inc 399 Report Designer aoo Grouping Bands The Group Header and Group Footer bands are shown above and below each group Usually you don t need to manually manage these bands as they are auto created via the Group and Sort Panel For more information
435. sed If it is absent in the drop down selector containing existing connections click the New Connection button Report Wizard Choose a data connecton From this information youll be able to choose the tables and columns for your dataset in the next step Choose from the list of data connections currently in the Wizard or add a new connection if the one you want is not listed Which connection should the wizard use Connection string Be Then in the invoked Data Link Properties dialog explore the Provider tab to choose your data provider 2011 DevExpress Inc 225 Report Designer 226 E Data Link Properties esa Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to Loess qare Engine OLE DE Frovide Microsoft OLE DE Pervik ku Analysis Services 9 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAF Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle 4 nT P o J es J e Then switch to the Connection tab and specify the path to your data source hail J aT i 1 rt f Cx Jj 1 Select or enter a database name C ADatabases nwind mdb 2 Enter information to log on to the database User name Admin Password Blank password Allow saving password To quit the dialog and apply the changes c
436. several pages In general if the contents are too large to fit on a single page then the band is started on a new page and continues on the following page Level Specifies the nesting level of a group band The lower the level number the closer the group band is to the Detail band The numeration starts at zero It is the parameter that identifies the Group Header Group Footer band pairs This option is auto defined when using the Group and Sort Panel Page Break Use this property if the current report design requires that the band s section should be separated from previous sections or follow ups Specify the Before the Band or After the Band values to insert a page break before or after the current band In many cases this property may be used instead of the Page Break control Print at Bottom This property is available for the Group Footer band only It determines whether the band should be printed at the bottom of a page or immediately after the last group s details If a report contains several Group Footers with their Print at Bottom properties set to different values then the outer Group Footer has the highest priority This feature is helpful when the Page Break property of the Group Header band is set to After the Band In this instance each group starts a new page and the Group Footer has two distinct places to reside after the last row or at the bottom of the page Repeat Every Page This property improves the
437. so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both The property setting is useful for data bound Labels located between upper and lower controls which are allowed to resize depending on their contents Note that if the Anchor Vertically property is set to Bottom or Both the Can Grow and Can Shrink property see below values are ignored and don t participate in calculating a final height value of this control e Angle Specifies the rotation angle of the text The measurement unit is a degree and the orientation is counter clockwise Since standard HTML does not support text orientation this parameter is ignored when a report is displayed within a web page 2011 DevExpress Inc 340 Report Designer sat e Auto Width Specifies whether or not a Label s width should be automatically determined based on its text e Can Grow When this property is set to Yes a Label s height can be automatically increased if required to display the text If there are other controls below the current Label they will be pushed down to prevent them from overlapping Note that if a control overlaps the growing Label by even one pixel it will not be pushed down by the growing Label e Can Shrink When this property is set to Yes and the text does not completely fill a Label then the Label s height will be decreased to the height of its text If there are other controls below the current Label they will be move
438. splay Bar Commands Rearrange Toolbars and Menus Rearrange Bar Commands Restore the Default Layout of Bar Commands Navigation e Keyboard Navigation in Menus and Toolbars Select Commands e Invoke Toolbar and Menu Commands 2011 DevExpress Inc s59 Toolbars and Menus seo Layout Customization Open Toolbar Customization Window Opening the Customization window activates the customization mode where you can e Rearrange hide and display bar commands e Change display options of bar commands e Hide bars etc To open the Customization window do one of the following e Right click any bar or the empty space and select Customize File Edit Format Toolbars Help z oo Standard wo Format w Font Statusbar vw PaintStyle Customize e Click the dropdown button displayed at the right edge of any bar Then select Add or Remove Buttons and then Customize File Edit Format Toolbars Help x EI E H mr D arrn Fu FFraroe Hgg QF re Ye C Standard e Double click the empty space not occupied by any bar File Edit Format Toolbars Help z A 4l h jogulal oeal op The Customization window will be opened containing three tabs 2011 DevExpress Inc sco Toolbars and Menus set Customization Toolbars Commands Options Toolbars MainMenu v Standard m Format Font StatusBar PaintStyle The Toolbars tab allows you to hide specific bars and displ
439. splay Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data amp tNote When controls overlap the report may be shown incorrectly when exported to some formats Red markers and a report tooltip will warn of this situation You may switch off the red warning marks via the report s Show Export Warnings property Export warning The following controls are overlapped and may be exported to HTML RTF XLS XLSX CSV and Text incorrectly label2 label1 To learn how report controls can be relocated and resized refer to Change Element Layout in Your Report and Controls Positioning 2011 DevExpress Inc 339 Report Designer EJ Label The most basic Label control is intended to display text in your report It can represent static or dynamic text or both In addition it can be used to calculate standard summary functions across a data field The Label s text can only be formatted as a whole So if it s required to differently format parts of text use the Rich Text control m gt a After a Label is added to a report you can customize its text appearance and other properties which can be accessed in the Property Grid The most important properties are also available via a control s Smart Tag which makes it easy to perform common operations And the Formatting Toolbar allows you to easily adjust a Label s text formatting In the Property Grid the Label control s properties are divided into the
440. ss Inc 353 Report Designer 354 Data Design Layout prevent them from overlapping Note that if a control overlaps the growing Panel by even one pixel it will not be pushed down by the growing Panel Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this control should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when the control s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the control will be split despite this property s value Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL and Tag to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible
441. ss Null Values Determines whether to process Null blank values if they appear in the control s data source They can be processed as is when the property is set to Leave suppressed Suppress and suppressed with the blank space printed instead of the blank records Suppress and Shrink e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview e Word Wrap When this property is set to Yes text entered into the multiline Cell is wrapped to the next line if it doesn t fit the line or comes across a newline character If the this property is set to No text entered into the multiline Cell will be displayed on the same line until a newline character is entered Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of a Cell s properties Bookmark Navigation URL Tag and Text to a data field obtained from the report s data source and to apply a format string to it For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e Lines Provides access to the Text property of a Cell in the Multiline mode e Summary Allows you to perform calculations Summary max min average etc over a data field For more information on calculating summaries refer to Add Totals to a Report No
442. ssdeces ce caseccct te detiesesc cn cdccss devstade Ven icsncceecuaicceancdsnasdexaneveacteudenactiecyacy san cune ssceveanestuteussueccecs 552 Navigate Scheduler RES OUNCES dicscceentteeke coc cctseanseuti va lncade tb ccttchs esevdve caved sinceussmevenntnetncccasvusennonctucaneetedssanarencenbeseatentesoetecs ves einde 554 Navigate Scheduler Time CONS vise rsii acc cease cescncsaccececbusstuseceecccwus tadwedtuaaitce dev osustehstceesacuabvsnenmectcussedeteceacadverstcetessunncvncudaussudeveee 555 Scheduler Navigation BUTTONS isinin aaa a aaa a aa A odes ss savted once taneces tonsa aE EAA catesensenscdbonosansacnetectaassnnentese 557 Scheduler More BUON S aaa aaa a aa a a a a a ea ceccacosnssvedecycutasysexdaeacucaseaneaccocusuensuedces 558 TOOIDars and MGQUS serasa N A E NOEN 559 Layout Customization nosini a aa E EE E winced EA a EE E Goati e A A lev Aae aae a E a NG 560 Open Toolbar Customization WindoOW jisicseccisccdsecicencivicdiviinwitdecudaecial teed Havent nde iin ieee 560 Finish Toolbar Cus toimiZ avo Mocidades iaai i A aE E aA aE E aE AEEA E Ea A 562 Hide and Display Toolbars js siceicustveiy isn oonan raaraa aa anaiai raa aa aha Eae dai Ok reka aa E a a ENa 563 Hide and Dis play Bar Com mandS iecvccscsvccccincieia deceit sce cwcscvicesecacnieviaboveassneea seu veavadkesacewscesevstersunsudivavsauecosenusunnduuelvacuseuaveulanervan 564 Rearrange Toolbars and Me lnu ccccesceecssesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeseeesseesee
443. ssessseesseesees 498 Customize a Style of Cell Borden S vissgcce co cicivcccciel sacisctee sts zeanctecacuaaessaccedeusscsveteboutscenasececusiesincheetteabatenden qrassmanteucuecdaveasensese 501 Se lect a Cell ROW OF COMM ict Acssc access eccrccn cr E E S E E E A E E E 502 inserta Cell Row or GC OUI i asena E a A A Aa A AE EAE ARRENE E NENEA E RERAN i 504 Delete a Cell ROW O OO a aaa a A Eaa a ECAA Aa E RRE 509 Merge or oP UN NS corsa a a couareeveantewe coe a venansene tance teas gstatiucsnoecectuatnseetecomaritads 513 PAO TN PE XG alo OG ONS i stcrnaos fevecastad a a usenet teas E custo oeages debe wcruancnmetacussdacterte aa a a a 515 Set Back Ground COIOF OF CONS serna E a A nesavets a E E A sevens E E AEEA 516 Header and OO OM orison scecestacueccasaecouanageewsneueitcesctecceccsaeute saan acteenntacussuurcoscasunccussususeaeesecncse sb acuesusenteeauuaraenteaueecususareecosse 517 Em bedding Fie lds M l WC Re a bbe teceu a a E a a a E Eo a aa aa EE AEEA AARAA AEE Ea EA 520 Document Prorecto eaaa aa EO a a us aE EAE AAE aE 522 Protect and Unprotect a Document s sssssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn mennun nnnnnn mnnn nnen nnmnnn nnmnnn nnne 522 Edita Protected DOCUM E E a a e a a aa aE ERa ait 524 Miscellaneous sinn a E a E saranteccoueivest suns en seusrsetes se 525 mser a BookMark a nE a E ESA Aaaa E Ea eaaa ra eE a AS 525 MSE AV OS BUI osa E A ox EEEE E E E AA 527 BIS GPU ay ACC Bre aKeniesnnnan a
444. st for the Even Style and click New Property Grid This will create a style and assign it to the control s Even Style 3 Now expand the Even Style property and adjust the required options e g set the Background Color to ControlLight B Styles Even Style Background Color Border Color He Mot set Border Width Not set Borders Not set Font Not set Foreground Color EB Not set Name controlStyle1 Padding 0 0 0 0 Text Alignment Not set Odd Style none style none Background Color If required perform the same steps to create and assign an odd style as well Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 271 Report Designer See Also Product Chai Chang Aniseed Syrup Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning Chef Anton s Gumbo Mix Grandma s Boysenberry Spread Uncle Bob s Organic Dried Pears Northwoods Cranberry Sauce Mishi Kobe Niku Kura Queso Cabrales Queso Manchego La Pastora Konbu Tofu Understand Styles Concepts Store and Restore Style Sheets Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance 2011 DevExpress Inc Unit Quantity 10 boxes x20 bags 24 12 oz bottles 12 550 ml bottles 46 6 oz jars 36 boxes 12 8 oz jars 12 1 Ib pkgs 12 12 oz jars 18 500 g pkgs 12 200 ml jars 1 kg pkg 10 500 g pkgs 2 k
445. stiaeiie EEE A 113 Navigation Pane ssnin ien a A E a UEa a a aa a e i Oa Ira 114 Navigation Bar aiana raa a aa a ae a E Ae E EE AE EA aa vou aE Eaa a AAEE ea ANEA NEAGA 117 PIVOU lable catana nidceactcdiesseiesdeesesanrens ee usitacsciuedoveesdedausanciecuenc 119 Data Edit O eiaeia aaa a tance la vente Mine vane ved onewes Eae O CARRE Ea aA a Vaa a T aaa aaa aot a TAE 120 Edit D ta In PIVOL Table S rrisnin aE aa a eta EEA EO vide teats pecidncieerameevenveeets 120 Data Presentaatio cunin a a eaaa E E AA tans REENE AO EEE Ea EE AOE EE A EAEE AEAEE OERE AEA AaS 122 Sort Data IM PIVOE VA le S oaa a a O E a E a a a a a SE N NE 122 Filter Data im Pivot Table Satonen a a aaa an aeaa Aa OAE aaa E A AENA 123 Layout CUSTOM IZALIOM nan aena EEE E E E T EE E ATEENA 126 Expand and Collapse Groups in Pivot Tables cccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeessaaeseseeeaasaaeeeeeeeeasseeeesseeeesseeeessnenaneneeees 126 Hide and Display Pivot Table FieldS nnaussnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn nn nnne nnn 127 Reorder Pivot Table FieldSicisians sveina ra aaa aaraa aa UWE aE aa earar a E Aa aa aa A a aii 131 Sle cHomand Navigatio Mansas a e aky aaa raa Ria EE a E NE SAEN 132 select Cells in Pivot Tables ci ilicccsscsiccessissedsadssevaenscsusesiesscasansenusiesensacednavavenuransatseureessssdessevanswussanuecusndscnendeesssudeevecncawensnssie 132 PENEPTE Wah ON es att ce rec el ese a
446. sting style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Behavior Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of the control can be horizontally split across pages In other words if the control occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Zip Code Should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Zip Code s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Zip Code will be split despite this property s value Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts Segment Width This property setting specifies the width of the lines in pixels used to draw the numbers in the zip boxes of the control Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 375 Report Designer 376 Data e Data Bindings If the current report is bound to data this property allows you to bind some of the control s properties Bookmark Navigation URL Tag and Text to a data field obt
447. stomize F 5 i on in ia Em iE Li EE ik ow Em EE m u La Laz La BE Lai m is i Lo m E m LLN E oa T MA This allows you to preserve an entire page view whether you resize the preview window scroll a document or choose a multiple page view mode Enable the Continuous Layout View To enable the continuous layout view on the View menu point to Page Layout and then click Continuous 2011 DevExpress Inc a58 Print Preview 159 f Preview Status Bar Customize Jy ih T TH baad qt l ka kzl k E T ka EN E Laii LLS E La Lk Er iE E E LAN E Em l EE Er m m FE EEEEEEEE ERED GT EEGEG HE This allows you to continuously scroll a page layout view 2011 DevExpress Inc 159 Print Preview 160 Watermark and Background Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print Preview Invoke the Watermark Dialog To add a watermark to a document click the Watermark i button on the toolbar or click Watermark on the Background menu The Watermark dialog will be invoked Add a Text Watermark To add a text watermark open the Text Watermark tab Watermark Text Watermark Picture Watermark Text some Wa termark Text Direction BackwardDiagonal Color Font Verdana Size x Bold _ Italic Transparency 0 255 Page Range All C Pages separated by
448. style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of a Row can be horizontally split across pages In other words if a Row occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether this Row should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Row s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then the Row will be split despite this property s value e Scripts This property contains events which you can handle with the required scripts For more information on scripting refer to Handle Events via Scripts e Visible Specifies whether the control should be visible in print preview 2011 DevExpress Inc 359 Report Designer 360 Data e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be acc
449. t Returns either TruePart or lif Quantity gt 10 10 0 FalsePart depending on the evaluation of the Boolean Expression IsNull Value Returns True if the specified Value IsNull OrderDate is NULL IsNullOrEmpty String Returns True if the specified String IsNullOrEmpty ProductName object is NULL or an empty string otherwise False is returned 2011 DevExpress Inc 53 Expression Editor sa Math Functions Abs Value Acos Value Asin Value Atn Value Atn2 Valuel1 Value2 BigMul Value1 Value2 Ceiling Value Cos Value Cosh Value Exp Value Floor Value Log Value Log Value Base Log10 Value Power Value Power Rnd Round Value Returns the absolute positive Abs 1 Discount value of the given numeric expression Returns the arccosine of a number Acos Value the angle in radians whose cosine is the given float expression Returns the arcsine of a number Asin Value the angle in radians whose sine is the given float expression Returns the arctangent ofa number the angle in radians whose tangent is the given float expression Atn Value Returns the angle whose tangent Atn2 Value1 Value2 is the quotient of two specified numbers in radians Returns an Int64 containing the full BigMul Amount Quantity product of two specified 32 bit numbers Returns the smallest integer that is
450. t or turn a picture into a report s background Note that watermarks are visible only in Preview and HTML View modes To create a new watermark in a report or to modify the existing one do the following 1 Click the report s Smart Tag and in its actions list click the ellipsis button for the Watermark entry Reporti E Y BME Design in Report Wizard Edit and Reorder Bands p r _ Data Source myDataSet Products ProductsTableAdapter II pa ES ES Ess Print when Data Source is Empty T Detail Print Count when Data Source is Empty EHEH Detail Frint Count Li b i iT 1 Measure Units Hundredths of an Inch x A Formatting Rules Collection Formatting Rule Sheet Collection Style Sheet Collection Watermark None EE 1 Pa 1 1 il I 1 2 In the Text tab of the invoked Watermark dialog define the required properties for the text watermark 2011 DevExpress Inc zs Report Designer 219 Watermark Text Direction F Font Om Oras a7a O Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Gey Cae 3 Then switch to the Picture Watermark tab to load the image to be used as a watermark and define its properties such as Size mode Alignment vertical and horizontal Tiling Transparency Page Range etc Watermark Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 J can
451. t Designer 359 Table Row The Table Row Control represents a single row within a Table ableCell1 tableCell2 tableCell3 ableCell4 tableCellS stableCel ableCell7 This control is useful for changing the layout of the entire row Although in this document a Row is described as a separate control in fact most of its properties are actually applied to the Cells contained within the selected row In the Property Grid the Table Row s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 44 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Row e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various
452. t Designer RETO E ICC a r R a a E E a E E a 313 Report Designer UDe araa ea AE aE E Ea aaa ra eE a aA As ENESA 314 COM DOM E aV a A a E E a A O AEA 315 CONTENEMEN a A toutes neucescuseauencussessueseaee 316 CONT OVO ONO N zire a a a digest ceeeecanasancumencaee eines 317 DESIN Pane lore E E a E E E AR 318 Desine r ka cd cranaeanenssweneetetene seamen 319 FIS CUS Tora a E E E E sustucecenuencutneecusceast 320 Formatting Toolbar a a E O a seams E ETO 321 Gro p and SOLU Pane lesie a a aA Ea E EE er aA EEE 322 HIME WS Ws TaD anope o a a a EEEE 323 LAV OUE TOI AN oaa a cscs e acca seadeeteeasusnten ean teeeestereeecnst 324 Ma MENU os 2 28a Oo wave se E cussaay tect saarineceveun ener epsavensetnasteneeseunsvoeasteuacussauns eruaiansnn users eseousunensapenseuese 325 Man O OND AN ee a a E E E E AA 326 PAS VIC Ww TAD a E teas ccstcann easenstuesnssni quinine cd csanacanenssueneenetenecesece at 327 PROD CEU Gil siaares sc ctec nace re tcce Sessa accenesaevnseec tee ean utvducucess goatee cduceasa can ucucusscuecodassausennteceucnuen cet esaus aes edceeae Wiss racconseeureescwecdes 328 PRO DOCU EOI ORG Misco ive cease Ser sa nen eens stents cia civceen E O veeauressecaagetedsarauteccuseivesteuns eeceusnseee ote 329 CHD US B TrOrS Pane korea a aA Ea EE van nacnnavice Hivacucasanveauaewaruancnmetacumsddctunsactdue ace mecsubndiencudasssudcasss 330 SOG FUDD ye AO cee ae cease a R ssevsevenen comtugy ave oeeeeeuattauns ociaavnantactenseteawesecsauneaseusasauanie
453. t every step in the Label Report wizard e Step 1 Select a Label Type e Step 2 Customize Label Options 2011 DevExpress Inc asa Report Designer a35 Step 1 Select a Label Type Purpose When you need to print out stickers or say water proof labels you need to purchase the appropriate paper Every supplier will provide it s own specific label size or label position within a paper sheet To make it easier for you to produce labels this wizard step lists several label paper suppliers and their products Once you ve selected a supplier and a product paper and label type the report will change its settings so that your labels will be printed exactly where they re supposed to without you having to adjust the label position and size manually Page Interface On this page choose the supplier from the Label Products combo box and a particular product from the Product Number list The box on the left hand side will be updated to show you label dimensions for the currently selected product Report Wizard Label Infonmaton Select one of the predefined labels by specifying the Product and its ID The type selected defines the label s size and the type of paper used Side margins Label Products Top margin itch AOne Product Number 26466 Name Badge Label Information Vertical pitch Width 210 Height 167 Page type AS Number Across Page size 827 x 1169 If you don t need further cus
454. t measurement units which is to be preserved within the band when controls it contains are aligned using Snap Lines Misc e Print On This property specifies whether the band should be printed on the same page with Report Header and Report Footer bands 2011 DevExpress Inc 407 Report Designer 408 Page Margin Bands The Top Margin and Bottom Margin bands represent the top and bottom page margins Unlike other bands they are not accompanied by strips displaying their titles in the Design Panel Top Margin Page 1 of 7 a PageHeader one band per page gt El Detail b PageFooter one band per page Bottom Margin Page 1 of 7 They are intended for displaying page numbers or some sort of supplementary information e g current system time or the user name In the Property Grid the properties of these bands are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the controls contained within the band e Font Specifies the font settings for the controls contained within the band Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the controls contained within the band This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4
455. tArgs e Calculate a summary totalUnits Convert ToDouble GetCurrentColumnValue UnitsOnOrder l private void OnSummaryGetResult object sender DevExpress XtraReports UI SummaryGetResultEventArgs e Round the result so that a pack will be taken into account even If 1t contains only one unit e Result Math Ceiling totalUnits pack e Handled true 2011 DevExpress Inc 297 Report Designer 298 Visual Basic Declare a summary and a pack Private totalUnits As Double 0 Private pack As Double Private Sub OnSummaryReset ByVal sender As Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Reset the result each time a group is printed totalUnits 0 End Sub Private Sub OnSummaryRowChanged ByVal sender As Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Caleulate a Sunmary totalUnits Convert ToDouble GetCurrentColumnValue UnitsOnOrder Bnd Sub Private Sub OnSummaryGetResult ByVal sender As Object ByVal e As DevExpress XtraReports UI SummaryGetResultEventArgs Round the result so that a pack will be taken into account even if it contains only one unit Result Math Ceiling totalUnits pack Handled True Bnd Sub Finally switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 298 Report Designer 29 Chang 40 Ipoh Coffee 10 Outback Lager 10 Total Packs 4 Anseed Syrup 70 Lowsiana Hot Spiced Okra 100 Total Packs 12 Sir Rodney s Scones 40 Cho
456. ta Note that zooming is unavailable for 2D Pie 2D Doughnut Radar and Polar charts Zoom In a Chart To zoom in a chart do one of the following e Hold down SHIFT and click After you press SHIFT the mouse pointer is changed to a Then move the mouse pointer to the chart region to be zoomed into and click while holding SHIFT The magnification factor is 300 e Press SHIFT and select a region on a diagram After you press SHIFT and the mouse pointer is changed to H Then select a region by clicking and dragging munis After releasing the left mouse button a chart is zoomed into the bounds of the selected region ona diagram Note This feature is available for 2D charts only e Use CTRL PLUS SIGN In this case the magnification factor is 120 e Use the mouse wheel In this case the magnification factor is 120 Note that if you press SHIFT and can t zoom in anymore the mouse pointer is changed to A then a chart is already zoomed in by 100 times 10000 This is the maximum possible zoom factor allowed Zoom Out of a Chart To zoom out of a chart do one of the following e Hold down ALT and click After you press ALT the mouse pointer is changed to S Then move the mouse pointer to the region to be zoomed out and click while holding ALT The magnification factor is 300 e Use CTRL MINUS SIGN In this case the magnification factor is 120 e Use the mouse wheel In this case the magnification fact
457. ta is the link to any data that CleverQ has extracted Understanding the structure of this query will help you in creating your own custom reports based on this data Refer to the other CleverQ manuals for more information on this data structure The CleverQ Data Sources pre configured include Page 14 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual This is a complete breakdown of each dashboard gauge and indicator with all the internal properties for all elements This is similar to Dashboard Details except the indicator element and properties are not included There are up to 8 filter data sources each listing the values of the filters based on the extracted data Gauge Definitions This is a breakdown of each gauge and indicator with all the internal properties of each Indicator Category This is a simple list of indicator categories This is a list of all indicators and their properties This is a list of all parameters and their properties PDC Preferred Data Source The PDC allows you to connect to a data source using the preference PDC as a connection string This is an advanced option and like an ODBC connection allows ultimate flexibility on connecting to a variety data sources Report Designs A Report Design is defined as all the information that describes what the report will look like what it will contain where the data comes from and any calculations to be made It also contains what parameters are going
458. ta columns horizontally 2 Employee First Name Nancy Andrew Last Mame Davolio Fuller Title Sales Repres Vice Presiden Title OF Courtesy W ms Gor Birth Date 12 8 1958 2119 1952 Hire Date 511 1992 514 1992 To resize the header column do one of the following e Drag the header column s right edge 2 Employee 4 First Name Nancy Andrew Last Mame a avolio Fuller Title Sales Repres Vice Presiden Title OF Courtesy W ms E Dr Birth Date 12 8 1958 2119 1952 Hire Date 511 1992 514 1992 e Press CTRL LEFT ARROW to decrease the header column s width Press CTRL RIGHT ARROW to increase the header column s width e To resize headers to the minimum width while making sure all content is visible double click a header s right edge 2011 DevExpress Inc 588 Vertical Grid seo Navigation Clicking a data cell Moves focus to the clicked cell Clicking a row header Moves focus to the corresponding row while preserving column focus ARROW keys Moves focus to the next cell in the corresponding direction TAB Moves focus to the next previous cell SHIFT TAB HOME Moves focus to the first last cell within the current END row PAGE UP Moves focus one page up or down PAGE DOWN CTRL HOME Moves focus to the first cell of the grid control CTRL END Moves focus to the last cell of the grid control CTRL TAB Moves focus away from the control to the next control in tab order 2011 DevExpress Inc sss
459. ta field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 374 Report Designer 375 Zip Code The Zip Code control transforms its content into a zip code The width of a zip code s segment is adjustable Ele In the Property Grid the Zip Code s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control Foreground Color Specifies the color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an exi
460. ta file you would have already established a data source within the Report Manager That data source might include some already defined system sources having to do with parameters indicators gauges or dashboards You might also connect to a data source internal to the linked CleverQ QBD file that contains the extracted data If you need to use the CleverQ Analytical Calculation Engine ACE to feed information into your report some special items need to be done 1 Controls need to be added to the report layout with special names depending on the inputs and outputs required for ACE 2 One or more scripts need to be added to the report to cause ACE to process the report At any time you can press the CleverQ Help button to see help similar to the following table which is a reference guide to the ACE controls ACE is used in one of three modes 1 Calculate a formula only 2 Return the value of an Indicator and the Indicator s properties 3 Return the image of a Gauge and the Gauge s properties Controls Labels are placed on a report and named as shown in the following table below Bold blue items are required depending on the mode Formula only Indicator Gauge Light blue items are optional Blue items need to be set to a value either directly or bound to a data source or parameter When a report is printed the items listed in the table in black can be displayed on the report in a label control or other specific control as noted
461. te Summarization is possible for a single data column only To perform calculations with several data fields use calculated fields e Tag This property allows you to add some additional information to the control for example its id by which it can then be accessible via scripts If the current report has a data source the Tag property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Tag Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Text Allows you to define a line of static text to be displayed When a Cell is selected in the designer you may Simply start typing the text and it will be automatically entered into the in place editor 2011 DevExpress Inc 362 Report Designer 363 tableCel6 To type several lines of text use the Lines property If the current report has a data source the Text property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Text Binding drop down selector select the required data field For more information on this refer to Display Values from a Database Bind Report Elements to Data e XIlsx Format String Specifies the native XLSX format string for the control s content which is to be preserved when the report is being exported to XLSX This format string is independent from the general value formatting Design e Name Determin
462. te Busy Out OF Office Edit Appointment Dialog Selecting the Open item of the context menu invokes the Edit Appointment dialog which allows editing the properties of the current appointment Note that if the appointment is a part of a recurring series then this item allows only the current appointment to be edited but not the entire series The appointment with changed start end times still belongs to the series but is marked exception The visual indicator of an exception is the crossed recurrence sign 2011 DevExpress Inc 539 Scheduler sao mec Richard Fisher s meeting Appointment 1 28 2009 4 45 00PM 2 Resource To edit the entire series of recurring appointments it s necessary to select the Edit Series item of the context menu instead In this instance the Edit Appointment dialog is shown with a different window icon Time fields are inaccessible fj Monthly Meeting Appointment The Recurrence button of the Edit Appointment dialog serves to edit the recurrence pattern When clicked it opens the following window 2011 DevExpress Inc s4 Scheduler sat i Appointment Recurrence Start 2 30 00PM H End 4 45 00PM Duration C Daily O weeny AY 23 ofevery 1f month Monty The Wednesday ofevery 1 EJmonthts C Yearly D No end date End after occurrences End by A recurring appointment is marked with a sign In place Editing A sin
463. ted field in the Field List right click any data member and on the invoked menu choose Add Calculated Field GHA myDataSet Bl Products w Discontinued fab EAN13 Edit Calculated Fields E ProductID Sh ProductName Remove All Calculated Fields or ReorderLevel f SupplierID fa UnitPrice UnitsInStock F UnitsOnOrder arameters 2 In the Field List select the created field to show its properties in the Property Grid Among these options make sure to change the Field Type property to an appropriate value Behavior DataMember Products Data Source myDataSet Expression Design Name calculatedField1 Field Type Specifies the type of the value returned 3 Now let s create an expression for the calculated field Click the ellipsis button in the Expression section to invoke the Expression Editor You can also invoke this dialog by right clicking your calculated field within the Field List and selecting Edit Expression 2011 DevExpress Inc 197 Report Designer 198 Expression Editor The type of this field is ab ProductName fab QuantityPerUnit f ReorderLevel f UnitsInStock ofa UnitsOnOrder Parameters Click Fields to see the field list Double click field names to add them to the expression string Use the toolbar to add operators between field names Note Note that it s also possible to employ
464. ter Change the Visibility of Fields in Layout Views 2011 DevExpress Inc 1 Click the Customization button within the header panel Ooo Bele Oe Customization Title Sales Represent Title Vice President 5 First Name Nancy First Name Andrew Last Mame Davolic Last Name Fuller Contact Info Address Al City Seattle Contact Info Address Al City Tacoma Postal Code 98122 Region WA Postal Code 98401 Region WA Country USA Country USA Ill 2 To hide a field in the Layout View Customization Window drag and drop the field from the Template Card onto the Hidden Items list To display a hidden field drag it from the Hidden Items list onto the Template Card at the required position Grid Layoutview Customization Template Card view Layout Templatecard Hidden Items lama Tile O OOOO O A a i i Label Mo image data First Mame Last Mame a JC Separator EEE Ss Notes Contact Info Home Phone ia ReportsTo Led O TithkeofCourtesy Cancel wW Apply Customize the card layout using drag and drop and customization menu and preview data in the view Layout page 3 Click OK or Apply 2011 DevExpress Inc Rearrange Grid Columns Bands and Card Fields Reorder Columns and Bands in Grid Views To reorder columns drag and drop a column header to a new position Drag a column header product Mame aa y Prod
465. the Magnifier Tool to switch between 100 and fit whole page views Simply click anywhere in the document to toggle views 2011 DevExpress Inc 150 Print Preview 151 Zoom Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor To zoom to a specific zoom factor do one of the following e Click the Zooming dropdown list button The following list will be invoked 100 500 200 150 100 T9 50 25 Page Width Text Width Whole Page Two Pages Choose one of the zoom factor presets e You can manually enter any value into the Zooming box i 2011 DevExpress Inc 51 Print Preview 152 Zoom Print Preview to Show Whole Pages or Fit Content Zoom Documents to Fit Page Content To zoom to the page or text width click the Zooming box The following list will be invoked 500 200 150 100 75 25 Page Width Text Width Whole Page Two Pages e To zoom to the page width click Page Width e To zoom to the text width click Text Width Note If the preview window will be resized later the current zoom factor will also be changed to fit the current page or text width Zoom Documents to Display Whole Pages First invoke the zooming dropdown see above e To display one whole page ata time click Whole Page e To fit two pages into the current view click Two Pages Note If the preview window will be resized later the current zoom factor will be also changed in order to
466. the Print Preview section of this documentation Export a Report In the Preview Tab you can export your report to files in different formats The resulting files can either be saved to the hard drive or sent by e mail The following documents describe the basics of report exporting and format specific export options e Exporting from Print Preview e PDF Specific Export Options e HTML Specific Export Options e MHT Specific Export Options e RTF Specific Export Options e XLS Specific Export Options e XLSX Specific Export Options e CSV Specific Export Options e TXT Specific Export Options e Image Specific Export Options 2011 DevExpress Inc 437 Ribbon The Ribbon organizes commands into a tabbed interface providing quick and intuitive access to these commands New Document 1 Ribbon Simple Pad A S ht Mew Document 1 Topics in this section e Frequently Used Ribbon Commands e Minimize Ribbon e Invoke Ribbon Commands 2011 DevExpress Inc ase Frequently Used Ribbon Commands Frequently used commands are typically displayed within the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Ribbon Quick Access Toolbar Home Alternative Page Gallery Page a banal Tr ee _ New Save Paste Select All Format Find Exit File Edit Skins Find Exit To add any command to the Quick Access Toolbar right click the command and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar Find Exit
467. the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation 2011 DevExpress Inc 373 Report Designer 374 e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure within a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks If the current report has a data source the Bookmark property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Bookmark Binding drop down selector select the required data field e Navigation URL and Navigation Target Use the Navigation URL property to specify a URL for web browser navigation when a user clicks a Bar Code The web browser displays a page in a window ora frame as specified by the Navigation Target property Note that a URL should have an appropriate prefix e g http You can create cross references within the report by assigning the name of the target control to the Navigation URL property and setting the Navigation Target property to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a da
468. the faster The wodd may very likely not always think of them as they think of themselves but what care they for the world what can it know about the matter Ome of these lucky beings was neighbour Hans Seven long years he had worked hard for his master At last he said Master my time is up I must go home and see my poor mother once more so pay pay me my wares and let me eo S se ee eee ck dan Tea oe aluro _ mH m kg Text Editor UI e Editor Elements e Toolbars e Ribbon Interface File Operations e Create a New Document e Load a Document e Save a Document e Print a Document Margins and Page Orientation e Margins and Page Orientation Viewing and Navigating e Navigate through a Document e Switch Document Views e Zooma Document Text Editing e Select Text 2011 DevExpress Inc ms Rich Text Editor a e Delete Text e Find and Replace Text e Use a Clipboard e Check Text Spelling e Undo and Redo Last Operations Formatting e Format Text e Format Paragraphs e Apply Styles Lists e Numbered Lists e Bulleted Lists e Multilevel Lists Tables e Insert a Table e Add and Remove Table Borders e Customize a Style of Cell Borders e Select a Cell Row or Column e Insert a Cell Row or Column e Delete a Cell Row or Column e Merge or Split Cells e Align Text in Table Cells e Set Background Color of Cells Header and Footer e Header and Footer Embedding Fields Mail Merge e
469. thin a report called a document map For an explanation and help refer to Add Bookmarks Options e Data Field Options Allows you to customize the options which control the presentation of the data fields e Data Options Allows you to define whether a Pivot Grid s fields must be case sensitive or not e Options Chart Data Source Provides access to the options controlling the display of the Pivot Grid s data in a Chart e Print Options Allows you to customize the print options of a Pivot Grid e View Options Allows you to customize the Pivot Grid s display options All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2011 DevExpress Inc 384 384 Report Designer 385 Page Info The Page Info control is intended to add page numbers and system information the current date and time or the current user name into your report As with many other controls you can format this control s content E gt a a mY E E In the Property Grid the Page Info control s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H e Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control e Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar e Foreground Color Specifies the t
470. time You also can adjust the Snap Grid Size which is measured in the measurement units set for your report The Snap to Grid option specifies whether controls are snapped to the Grid when they are moved as usual with no additional keys being hold down When the Snap to Grid option is enabled the default move behavior works in the following way e For controls to be aligned to the Snap Grid while being moved Using the keyboard move them using the ARROW keys Using the mouse move them as usual e For controls to ignore the Snap Grid while being moved Using the keyboard move them using ARROW keys while hold down CTRL Using the mouse move them while hold down ALT Disabling the Snap to Grid option swaps the default manipulation to its opposite you should press CTRL or ALT to enable the Grid snapping Snap Lines Instead of the Snap Grid for control positioning and alignment you can utilize the Snap Lines These are guide 2011 DevExpress Inc 230 Report Designer 231 lines appearing when a control is being moved and indicating the distance to other report elements bands and controls v E Detail For each report element you can modify its default Snap Line spacing paddings for bands and Panel and margins for other controls using the Property Grid Spedfies the inner indents to be maintained when Specifies the control s margins that are maintained report elements are al
471. ting page breaks at the required positions In the Report Designer the available controls are listed in the Control Toolbox from which they are dropped onto the required bands You also can extend the standard functionality of each control by writing scripts for its available events This document consists of the following sections e Available Controls e Add Controls to a Report Available Controls The following table lists the available controls in the same order as in the Control Toolbox For each control s options description refer to the corresponding document Label The most basic Label control is intended to display text in your report It can represent static or dynamic text or both In addition it can be used to calculate Standard summary functions across a data field The Label s text can only be formatted as a whole So if it s required to differently format parts of text use the Rich Text control Check Box The Check Box control is intended to display True False or Checked Unchecked Indeterminate states in a report by displaying or not a check mark which can be accompanied by a text description Rich Text The Rich Text control allows you to display formatted text in your report It can represent static or dynamic text or both You can load content to the Rich Text from an external TXT or RTF file which can also contain images and then format any part of it The formatting options include font face
472. tion Change Page Margins 1 Click the Margins button on the Page Setup toolbar Select the margin sizes for the entire document or the current section Top 0 5 Bottom Left 0 5 Right Moderate Top 1 Bottom Left 0 75 Right Wide Top 1 Bottom Left 2 Right Change Page Orientation 1 Click the Orientation button on the Page Setup toolbar Orientation Switch the pages between portrait and landscape layouts Split Text into Columns 1 Click the Columns button on the Page Setup toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc a2 Rich Text Editor 463 Split text into two or more columns 2 From the invoked list select the number of columns into which the document text should be split 2011 DevExpress Inc a3 Rich Text Editor aea Viewing and Navigating Navigate through a Document You can navigate through a document in the following ways e Use the mouse device to click anywhere in the document e Use the mouse device to drag the scroll box to move through the document e Rotate the wheel button to scroll up and down the document e Use keyboard shortcuts The following table lists the default keyboard shortcuts to navigate through a document PAGE UP Moves the cursor backward by the number of lines in the current control s window minus one PAGE DOWN Moves the cursor forward by the number of lines in the current control s window minus one CTRL LEFT ARROW Moves the cursor to
473. tion describes the capabilities provided by the editor controls Job Tite Sales Representative Report To Andrew Fuller 7 Birth Date 3 February 2009 December 1948 a Address Info Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Country USA 26 29 30 1 2 3 74 8 9 10 Oty 13 14 15 16 17 507 20th Ave E 21 22 2a 24 Address Apt 2A T 278 79 30 31 3 4 5 6 7 Home Phone 206 555 9857 Clear Ka 4 Record 1of9 gt o mi l i Topics in this section e Working with Dropdown Editors e Editing Values Selecting Text and Using the Clipboard e Editor Context Menu 2011 DevExpress Inc aa Editors as Working with Dropdown Editors Open Editor s Dropdown Do one of the following e Focus the editor and press ALT DOWN ARROW or F4 e Click the editor s dropdown button Close Editor s Dropdown For all editors providing a dropdown you can close the dropdown by pressing ALT DOWN ARROW ESC or F4 If the calculator is displayed in the dropdown it can be closed via CTRL ENTER Dropdowns displaying lists of items can be closed by clicking an item with the mouse or by selecting an item with the keyboard and pressing ENTER 2011 DevExpress Inc 4s Editors a6 Editing Values Selecting Text and Using the Clipboard Select and Deselect Editor s Contents To select all text within an editor you can invoke the Editor Context Menu and choose Select All To select a part
474. to add and remove grouping fields define data fields to be used as grouping criteria and the grouping order ascending or descending In most scenarios it s quick and practical to use the Group and Sort Panel rather than manually adjust the band s group fields collection However this is the only way to assign multiple group fields to a single Group Header Group Union Determines whether group rows can be printed on different pages in this case both Group Union and Group Footer Band Group Union are set to None or the entire group will be printed on a single page if the Group Union is set to Whole Page Also if a group can be split across pages but you don t want a Group Header to be printed on a page if there is no data row below it in case a group starts at the bottom of the page and there is enough room for only a Group Header you may set the Group Union to With First Detail In this case if a Group Header is alone on a page it will be moved to the beginning of the next page It is the same for the Group Footer If you don t want it to be printed alone on a page you may set its Group Union to With Last Detail and the last group row from the previous page will be moved to the next page to be printed together with a Group Footer This property is quickly accessible via the band s Smart Tag Keep Together When this option is on the report tries to fit the band contents entirely on one page not allowing it to split across
475. to be used to create the report when the report is run A Report Design does not contain the values of any parameters any data the destination of the report the format of the report i e pdf xls htm or when it is going to be run The time destination and format of the report is determined either when a report 1s previewed as requested by the user or when the report is processed by the report queue The values of any parameters are determined by the Report Definition which will be covered in a later section By not having a Report Design contain these various elements it allows one design to be used several times for different purposes You can use one report design to display data for last year and then with a different report definition using the same report design you can use it again to display data for this year You can access the report designs by clicking on the Report Design block on the Navigator Or you can use the pull down menu item File New Report Design to create a new one or use the pull down menu item Edit Report Designs to select an existing report design to edit or view When viewing existing report designs you will see the following form Page 15 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual aL Report Design Lis Dashboards Cleverg system Dashboards Default Data Range Cleyvera system Dashboards Gauges Indicators ClaverQ system Gauge Indicator List CleverQ sy ster Gauges Clever system Indicator Graphs Cl
476. to create the next item on the current level 5 To finish the list press ENTER twice Make a Multilevel List from the Selected Text You can make multilevel list from existing lines of text in two ways The first one is to use the Paragraph toolbar 1 Select the text lines that you want to transform into a list 1 2 Click the Multilevel list gt button on the Paragraph toolbar m re 3 Use TAB and SHIFT TAB or the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons of the Paragraph toolbar to change levels Another way to do the same thing is to use the context menu 1 Select the text to be transformed into a list 2 Right click within the document and select the Bullets and Numbering item from the invoked context menu 2011 DevExpress Inc a2 Rich Text Editor 493 Physiology Skeleton Cut Mouth Copy Ears Legs Paste Claws Increase Indent Whiskers JE Decrease Indent Behavior Sociability Cohabitation EELE Play rae E Bookmark a Hyperlink Font 3 In the invoked Bullets and Numbering dialog click the Outline Numbered tab and choose the list style that you want to apply Bullets and Numbering 4 Use TAB and SHIFT TAB or the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons of the Paragraph toolbar to change levels Create Your Own List Style You can create your own style fora multilevel list on the basis of one of the existing list styles by changing 2011
477. to enhance the visual representation The following pictures illustrate the appearance of the control in grouping mode e Appointments are grouped by resources wooo o See also the Navigate Scheduler Resources topic 2011 DevExpress Inc s50 Scheduler 551 Zoom the Scheduling Area In Day View Work Week View and Timeline View you can use CTRL PLUS SIGN CTRL MINUS SIGN or CTRL MOUSE WHEEL to zoom in and out of the Scheduler s area Zooming in allows you to display content in more detail Speaking technically this action makes the scale step Smaller Thursday January 01 11 00 AM 12 00 PM New employee interview l 2 00 PM 3 00 PM New product concept presentation 2011 DevExpress Inc 551 Scheduler 562 Selection and Navigation Navigate Dates in the Scheduler Using the Context Menu Right clicking within the main area of the Scheduler control opens the context menu which contains items for navigating through dates ETI New Appointment New All Day Event if New Recurring Appointment New Recurring Event oe oe Go to Today Ly Go to Date Change View To They are e Go to This Day Only available in the Week View and Month View modes This item is active when only one day is selected and when activated displays
478. tomization click Finish to complete the report adjustment If manual correction of label or paper size is required click Next 2011 DevExpress Inc ass Report Designer ase Step 2 Customize Label Options Purpose On this page you can manually adjust settings that were automatically specified in the previous step based on your supplier and product choice Page Interface Editors on this page allow free customization of all parameters specified on the previous page The pane on the left hand side provides a label dimensions preview based on current values Report Wizard Customize the Label s Optons You can adjust the label s parameters here if required Side margins Label Width Label Height Vertical Pitch Horizontal Pitch Top Margin Number Across Side Margin Page Size A4 827 x 1169 Click Finish to complete report setup 2011 DevExpress Inc a Report Designer 437 Preview Print and Export Reports Preview and Print a Report To switch a report to the print preview mode click the Preview Tab You will see your report populated with data and broken down into pages as specified When in the Print Preview mode you can print out your report using the appropriate menu and toolbar commands Note To learn more about the options available in the print preview mode refer to
479. tory Name Calculated Value Formula v detailB and1 Indicator_Definitions IndicatorName O ip value Indicator Definitions Formula Max Indicator Definitions RatioMaxalue 24 0 High Indicator _Definitions RatioValue2 Key Indicator_Definitions RatioValue1 key Indicator ore Hoe i cl al Sil aa hat l Background Colo C Transparent Min Indicator Definitions RatioMin alue _ Tested Border Color E ControlText Border Width 1 v PageFooter one band per page Borders None xtraReporti Report Appearance A Pit D Gal ra all fi AA a J it i SSS E E SSS Font Times New Roman Wednesday June 23 2010 Foreground Colo MM ControlText Formatting Rule Collection i i Formatting Rules Collection Padding 0 0 0 0 gi SF dataSet1 28 oleDbDataddapter1 Preview HTML view w Scripts xtraReport1 PaperKind Letter Zoom Factor 100 At this point refer to the later section about Report Design and Appendix A Parameters NOTE Parameters within the Report Manager are different from Parameters within CleverQ A Parameter is a means to control what data is processed and displayed on a report Parameters fall into three categories Data My and Global Data Parameters A Data Parameter is a parameter that is normally used to control the filtering of a report It can specify a particular class employee data range etc These p
480. tour of a Shape if applicable It is transparent by default e Foreground Color Determines the color of a Shape s contour This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 e Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the control during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Line Width Here you can set the width of a line used to draw the Shape expressed in the measure units defined by the report s Measure Units property To learn more about this refer to Change Measurement Units fora Report e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of the control e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Behavior e Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of the control so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both e Angle The value in degrees specifies the rotation an
481. trol during report generation and define the precedence of the applied rules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Table s cells Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements Such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of a Table s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior Data Anchor Vertically Specifies the vertical anchoring style of a Table so that after page rendering it stays attached to the top control bottom control or both Keep Together Specifies whether the contents of a Table can be horizontally split across pages In other words if a Table occupies more space than remains on the page this property specifies whether the Table should be split between the current page and the next or whether it will be printed entirely on the next page This property is in effect only when a Table s content does not fit on the current page If it does not fit on the next page either then
482. trols Positioning This document describes how to easily construct professional looking reports by precisely aligning their elements to each other For this the two following facilities are introduced in the Report Designer e Snap Grid e Snap Lines You can choose which mode to use for controls alignment within your report by setting its Snapping Mode myReport Report Draw the Grid Yes Row Count for Preview 0 Snap Grid Size 12 5 Snap to Grid Yes Snapping Mode Snap to Grid Specifies the mode in which report elements are snapped to each other when they are resized or Snap Grid When a report is being designed in the Design Panel it is lined up by the Snap Grid This helps to establish the distance between report elements and to precisely align them to each other v E Detail To quickly align a control to the report s Snap Grid right click the control and in the invoked Context Menu click Align To Grid 2011 DevExpress Inc 22 Report Designer 230 Bring To Front Send To Back Insert Band b Insert Detail Report foom b Er Properties You can choose whether the Snap Grid should be visible by selecting your report and setting the Draw the Grid option in the Property Grid myReport Report GI Row Count for Preview Snap Grid Size 12 5 Snap to Grid Yes Snapping Mode Snap to Grid Draw the Grid Gets or sets a value indicating whether to draw the grid at design
483. ts UnitPric Format String summary FormatString Editor Category Sample DateTime 100 00 Number Percent foe Currency Standard Types 0 00 To quit the dialog and apply the changes click OK Similarly when the mail merge is employed for a control s dynamic content to apply a value formatting to an embedded data field select it in the in place editor and click the control s smart tag Then in the invoked actions list specify the required format Data Binding Format String 40 50 00 Formatting Rules Collection Note that when a summary function is being applied to a control s dynamic content value formatting is applied separately via the Summary Editor as described at Add Totals to a Report Independently from the general or summary value formatting you can specify a native XLSX format string which is to be preserved when the report is being exported to XLSX This can be done via a control s XIsx Format String property 2011 DevExpress Inc 203 Report Designer 204 Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report This document demonstrates how to sort a report s data Note that as with data grouping sorting can be performed only if a report is bound to a data source In this example we ll use the report created in the following tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To sort records in a data aware report do the following 1 Switch to the Group and Sort Panel and click
484. ts using numerous 2D or 3D chart types A Chart can be populated with points both manually by specifying arguments and values for each point and dynamically by connecting it to the report s data source or binding it to a separate one For more information about this control refer to Charting 3 ae 3 6 a a4 ta ie o o There are many available Chart types you can choose from To name a few these are Bar Point Line Pie and Doughnut Area Radar and Polar Range Bar Gantt Candle Stick and Stock charts A Chart control contains multiple elements diagram series series points axes legend titles labels strips constant lines etc When any of these elements is selected the Property Grid shows only the properties which correspond to the selected item Visual Chart elements which can be highlighted or selected are described in Select Chart Elements The Chart control is data aware in a different manner than the other report controls Consider three common report scenarios 1 Static data for a Chart s series is provided manually It can be done using the Series Collection Editor invoked by the Chart s Series property It allows you to manually define values and arguments for each series point 2 Chart s series are created automatically getting their data from the Chart s Data Source and dependent on the rules defined by the Series Template property This approach is described in Chart with Dynamic Series 3 Eac
485. tton that corresponds to the target card field while holding the SHIFT key down To remove sorting by a card field 1 Click the Customize button 2 In the Customization window that opens click the Sort button that corresponds to the target card field while holding the CTRL key down Sort Data in Layout Views To sort records by a card field s values and replace existing sort conditions that are applied to the current or other fields do the following 1 Hover over the target card field within any card The sort Eh and filter buttons will appear Title Sales Represe First Mame Janet Last Name Leverling City Kirkland 2 Click the sort button until its image changes to a black arrow 4 or Yh These images indicate ascending and descending sort orders respectively To sort records by a card field s values while preserving existing sort conditions 2011 DevExpress Inc 1 Hover over the target card field within any card The sort and filter buttons will appear 2 Hold the SHIFT key down and click the sort button until its image changes to a black arrow L amp or h To remove sorting by a card field 1 Hover over the target card field within any card The sort and filter buttons will appear 2 Hold the CTRL key down and click the sort button until its image changes to a gray arrow h 2011 DevExpress Inc Grid Group Grid Rows Group Data To group by a specific column do one of the following
486. tutorial Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report To conditionally hide bands in a report do the following 1 Select the Group Header and click its Smart Tag Then in the invoked actions list click the ellipsis button for the Formatting Rules option GroupHeader Group Header Tasks Edit and Reorder Bands Category Group Fields Collection croup Union None Level 0 EE Sorting Summary Group Sorting Summary Collection Rules available in a report Rules applied to a control In the invoked Formatting Rules Editor click the Edit Rule Sheet button 2 Now in the invoked Formatting Rule Sheet Editor click the te button to create a new rule Then set its Visible property to No and click the ellipsis button for the Condition property 2011 DevExpress Inc 281 Report Designer 282 Formatting Rule Sheet Editor Condition Editor CategoryID lt 2 EHO Products Mr cateo 7 Discontinued ab QuantityPerUnit E SuppierD f UnitsInStock fa UnitsOnOrder 2011 DevExpress Inc 282 Report Designer 283 To quit the Formatting Rule Sheet Editor click Close 4 Back in the Formatting Rules Editor move the created rule to the dialog s right section Applied Rules to make it active Formatting Rules Editor formattngRule 1 And do the same for the report s Detail band That is clic
487. types of parameters A Report Definition can contain values for the data parameters but also the report definition can have it s own parameters Editing a Report Definition To access the list of report definitions click on the Report Definitions block on the Navigator or use the pull down menu item Edit Report Definitions Page 22 CleverQ Report Manager User Manual Creating a New Report Definition To add a new Report Definition use the pull down menu item File New Report Definition or press the button on the Report Definition List If you use the Report Definition List you will need to refresh the list before you can Edit View the definition Drag a column header here to group by that column Report Definition Mame Title 1 Jes User ID All Dashboards For This Year All Dashboards For This Year BEE shboards Stem m Balance Sheet Parameters This Balance Sheet Parameters Parameters by Source system m Banking Dashboard Banking Dashboard Dashboards Default Data Range system m Banking Dashboard For This Year Banking Dashboard For This Year Dashboards system a Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Dashboard Definition Dashboards Gauges Indicators system a Gauges Gauges Using Monthly Data For This Y Gauges system m Income Scorecard Income Scorecard Scorecard system m Indicator Graphs For Profitability 4 Indicator Graphs For Profitability Analysis Indicator Graphs system al Indicators Balan
488. uct w roduc Lain Discount 10248 14 00 lz 0b Queso Cabrales 10246 9 80 10 0 Singaporean Hokkien F 10246 34 60 5 0 Mozzarella di Giovanni 10249 15 60 J O Tofu 10249 t42 40 40 0 Manjimup Dried Apples To reorder bands drag and drop a band header to a new position Formi Band 2 Band 2 r Band 2 Discount 11 Queso Cabrales 47 Singaporean Hokkien F 10 9 80 D o 72 Mozzarella di Giovanni 5 34 50 0 o 14 Tofu J 15 60 0 o 51 Manjimup Dried 4pples 40 42 40 D So Rearrange Card Fields in Layout Views Do the following 1 Click the Customization button displayed within the header panel 2011 DevExpress Inc s Record 2 of 9 a Title Sales Represent Title Vice President 5 First Mame Nancy First Mame Andrew Last Mame Dawolio Last Mame Fuller Contact Info Contact Info Address Address City Seattle City Tacoma Postal Code 96122 Region Wh Postal Code 96401 Region WA Country USA Country USA fs nial anna The LayoutView Customization window will open Layoutview Customization Template Card view Layout Hidden It Templatecard idden Items Title Empty Space Item is 7 Label No image data First Mame Last Mame JE Separator l Motes Contact Info Home Phone Address ia ReportsTo City O TithkeOfCourtesy Postal Code Region Country
489. ues without opening the dropdown calendar Position the caret at the portion of a date time value that needs to be changed To increment the value press UP ARROW To decrement the value press DOWN ARROW Or use the mouse wheel Change Numeric Values 25 50 H To increment a value press UP ARROW To decrement the value press DOWN ARROW Or use the mouse wheel Change Values of Editors That Display Items in the Dropdown TA Dairy Products ij Beverages q Condiments Confections E Dairy Products js Grains Cereals D Meat Poultry E Produce To select the previous value press UP ARROW To select the next value press DOWN ARROW Or use the mouse wheel To learn how to open and close dropdown windows see Working with Dropdown Editors Edit Images To copy cut paste load and save images in image editors right click the image and select the required command via the context menu Paste Delete Load Save 2011 DevExpress Inc Editors as Editor Context Menu Text editors support a context menu providing common commands To open the menu right click an editor lunar SAA fe Cut 1A Copy A X Delete Select All 2011 DevExpress Inc as Expression Editor 49 Expression Editor Expression Editor The Expression Editor allows you to edit various Boolean or regular expressions in controls Current expression You can edit the expression manually using the k
490. ules To learn more on this refer to Conditionally Change a Control s Appearance e Padding Specifies indent values which are used to render the contents of a Label e Style Priority Allows you to define the priority of various style elements such as background color border color etc For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Styles This property allows you to define odd and even styles for the control as well as to assign an existing style to the control or a newly created one For more information on style inheritance refer to Understand Styles Concepts e Text Alignment Allows you to change the alignment of the control s text This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar Behavior e Angle Specifies the rotation angle of a Cell s text The measurement unit is a degree and the orientation is counter clockwise Since standard HTML does not support text orientation this parameter is ignored when a report is displayed within a web page e Can Grow When this property is set to Yes a Cell s height can be automatically increased if required to display the text If there are other controls below the current Cell they will be pushed down to prevent them from overlapping Note that if a control overlaps the growing Cell by even one pixel it will not be pushed down by the growing Cell e Can Shrink When this property is set to Yes and the text does not completely fill a Ce
491. ument Map feature to quickly navigate to a required section Show or Hide the Document Map To show or hide the document map click the Document Map six button on the toolbar Go to a Specific Bookmark To go to the specific bookmark click it in the Document Map and the appropriate text will be highlighted in the document i Beverages productname product Unt Pree C te de Blaye Chai 1 18 00 3 Chang 2 19 00 2 gt i Guaran Fantastica 24 54 50 i Sasquatch Ale 34 14 00 1 Steeleye Stout 35 13 00 Cote deBlaye 38 263 50 El Produce Chartreuse verte 39 518 00 I Seafood 2011 DevExpress Inc 156 Print Preview 157 Search for a Specific Text in Print Preview To search for a specific text within a document click the Search T button on the toolbar or press CTRL F The Find dialog will be invoked Find what Some text to findi Search Options Match case _ Match whole word _ Search up In this dialog you can input the text to find and specify whether to match case or the whole word during the search or set the search direction To start searching or search again click Find Next or press ENTER 2011 DevExpress Inc 157 Print Preview 158 Switch Print Preview Display Mode Enable the Facing Layout View To enable the facing layout view on the View menu point to Page Layout and then click Facing f Preview E Toolbar Continuous Status Bar Cu
492. umn report is now ready Switch to the Preview Tab and view the result 2011 DevExpress Inc 248 Category 1 Chai Sasquatch Ae C te de Blaye Ipoh Cofee Outback Lager Category 2 Aniseed Syup Chef Anton s Gumbo Mi Genen Showy Sirop d rable Category 3 Pavlova Sir Rodney s Scones Gumbar Gummibarchen Chocolade Valkoinen sukbs Scottish Longbesds Report Designer 249 Chang Chartreuse verte Laughing Lumberjack Lager Chef Anton s Cajun Seasoning Northwoods Granbeny Sauce Gula Malacca Vegie sprmed Sir Rodney s Mannabde NuNuCs Nu Mougst Gere Schoggi Schokoede Mazxilaku Tarte au suce See Also Label Report 2011 DevExpress Inc z Report Designer 250 Cross Tab Report This tutorial describes the steps to create a cross tab report using a Pivot Grid control This feature should not be confused with the master detail report or table report To create a cross tab report do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Drop the Pivot Grid control from the Toolbox onto the report s Detail band 3 To bind the pivot grid to a data source click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the Data Source drop down selector and click Add New DataSource Data Source Data Member Data Adapter OLAP Connection String Add New DataSource Formatting Rules Field Area fora New Field Row Area Add Field to Area Run Designer
493. und cube create specific Pivot Grid fields and bind them to the required fields in the data source If the OLAP Connection String property is set to a valid string the value of the Data Source property is cleared Setting the Data Source property to a valid object clears the OLAP Connection String property e Prefilter When this property is expanded in the Property Grid you can set its Enabled property to Yes and use the Criteria property to invoke the Pivot Grid Prefilter dialog This dialog allows you to build complex filter criteria with an unlimited number of filter conditions combined by logical operators It provides a set of logical operators that significantly simplify the process of creating filters for text numeric and date time fields Note The Prefilter is not supported in OLAP mode Design e Name Determines a control s name by which it can be accessed in the Report Explorer Property Grid or via Scripts Layout e Location Specifies the control s location in report measurement units e Size Specifies the control s size in report measurement units e Snap Line Margin Specifies the margin in report measurement units which is to be preserved around the control when it is aligned using Snap Lines or when other controls are aligned next to it Navigation 2011 DevExpress Inc 383 Report Designer e Bookmark and Parent Bookmark These properties are intended for the creation of a hierarchical structure wi
494. unt Country ts m ee Refresh Data UK c Show Field List Show Prefilter 4 j ar 2 jy Grains Cereale Order Quarter nne Dodsworth E Quarter 1 PREEUPETETEPETUTETT Teter eee F After building and applying a filter via the Prefilter the filter panel at the bottom of the control becomes visible It displays the current filter criteria 28 Product Sales Shipped Year Category Mame if 1994 Grand Total r ayGrainsiCereals O f o o 6 086 02 52 902 37 58 988 39 16 120 46 30 160 15 t96 280 61 9 177 08 t47 431 56 t56 665 64 15 652 56 toz 435 02 76 087 583 47 036 12 e4 989 10 290 025 22 Edit Prefilker Filter Panel E3 Category Mame lt gt Beverages And Shipped Year lt 1995 To modify the current filter open the Prefilter You can now open it by clicking the Edit Prefilter button To temporarily disable the filter uncheck the button To remove filtering click the E3 button See Filter Data via the Filter Editor for information on the filtering capabilities of the Prefilter To learn how to create filter criteria via the Prefilter please see Examples of Using the Filter Editor See Also Filter Data via the Filter Editor Examples of Using the Filter Editor 2011 DevExpress Inc 125 Pivot Table 126 Layout Customization Expand and Collapse Groups in Pivot Tables Expand Collapse Groups of Values
495. using the Detail Report band do the following 1 Create a new report 2 Bind the report to a data source And on the Reports Wizard s last page select the required data tables and click Finish Report Wizard Choose the table or view The table or wiew you choose determines which columns will be available in your report What item do you want to access Available itemfs Selected item Products Categories If possible the Report Wizard will automatically create the data relationship e g by the common key field between the selected tables CategoryID T ProductID CategoryName ProductName Description SupplierlID Picture CategorID QuantityPerUnit UnitPrice UnitsInSteck UnitsOnOrder ReorderLevel Discontinued Then if the relation is successfully created you ll see the corresponding node in the Field List 2011 DevExpress Inc 245 Report Designer 246 pes myDataSet Be H Categories fs CategoriesProducts E Categor yID S CategoryName Sh Description fina Icon_17 iog Icon_25 final Picture Products FP Parameters 3 Now to add a Detail Report band right click anywhere on the report s surface and in the invoked Context Menu point to Insert Detail Report When the report s data source contains a data relationship it is displayed in the Context Menu Er Properties 4 Then drop the required data fields from the Field List onto the corresponding bands As f
496. ut assigned to the command If a command is displayed within a menu its shortcut is displayed next to the command s name if assigned Shortcuts for toolbar buttons are typically displayed in hints 2011 DevExpress Inc 571 Tree List Tree List This section describes the capabilities provided by a multi column tree view which displays hierarchical data Supports data editing sorting summary calculation and many other features pepariment ts pee LastOrder i 408 1555 1 2354 zi 15 2001 ac Engineering Pian Meee 408 555 1234 8 12 2001 ja Finance 40 000 Monterey 408 555 1234 5 5 2005 E Sales and Marketing t22 000 San Francisco 415 555 1234 3 5 1999 be Field Office Canada 500 000 Toronto 416 677 1000 S ifeoo Field Office East Coast 500 000 Boston 617 555 4234 5 5 2005 je Marketing 1 500 000 San Francisco 415 555 1234 9 17 2001 E Pacific Rim Headquarters 600 000 Kuaui 808 555 1234 5 25 2000 Data Editing e Edit Cells in a Tree List Data Presentation e Show Summaries Totals in a Tree List e Sort Tree List Nodes Layout Customization e Expand and Collapse Nodes in a Tree List e Hide and Display Tree List Columns e Reorder Tree List Columns e Resize Tree List Columns Selection and Navigation e Navigation in a Tree List e Select Tree List Nodes 2011 DevExpress Inc Tree List Data Editing 573 Activate Cell Editor Do one of the following e Click a cell e Focus a cell
497. various parts of a regular expression to use them in replacement expression for example to rearrange the parts of the expression A regular expression may have up to 9 tagged expressions numbered according to their order in the regular expression To enter a tagged expression in the Replace with box enter its index after the symbol amp or select it from the list of tagged expressions EETA Reaiece Find what Replace with Tagged expression 1 Cead Tagged expression 2 Math ce Tagged expression 3 Find whole words only Tagged expression 4 Regular expression Tagged expression 5 Tagged expression 6 Tagged expression Tagged expression 6 Tagged expression 9 5 Click Find Next Replace or Replace All 2011 DevExpress Inc 474 Rich Text Editor 475 Use a Clipboard The Rich Text Editor allows you to move and copy text and images using the Clipboard To move or copy text or image 1 Select the text or image you want to move or copy 2 Depending on what you want do one of the following e To move the selection click the Cut button on the Clipboard toolbar or press CTRL X or press SHIFT DELETE This cuts the selection from the document and places it on the Clipboard ae a C r a I I I I 1 f I I I I I 1 st Cut Ctrl X Cut the selection from the document and put it on the Clipboard e To copy the selection click the Copy CH button on the Clipboard toolbar or press CTRL C or press CTRL INSERT
498. ve Y i PageHeader one band per page v E Detail 7 PageHeader one band per page tableC el tableCelb tableCell6 m tableCel tableCelb When you drag and drop an entire data table from the Field List a Table with cells bound to the corresponding data fields is created automatically A table s elements are managed by using its Context Menu tableCell1 tableCell tableCell3 aZ Row Above Delete Paste in Column To Left X Delete qty Column To Right Insert Band b g Cell Insert Detail Report foom Properties 2011 DevExpress Inc 356 Report Designer 357 The whole Table or its individual Row or Cell can be selected either in the Report Designer the Report Explorer or the drop down selector of the Property Grid In the Property Grid the Table s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance Background Color Specifies the background color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar H Borders Border Color and Border Width Specify border settings for the control Font Specifies the font settings for the control Some of these settings are available in the Formatting Toolbar Foreground Color Specifies the text color for the control This option is also available in the Formatting Toolbar 4 Formatting Rules Invokes the Formatting Rules Editor allowing you to choose which rules should be applied to the con
499. w to group a report s data Note that data grouping can be performed only if a report is bound to a data source To group records in a report do the following 1 Create a new report and bind it to a data source In this tutorial we ll start with the following report ij ReportHeader one band per report Products by Categories v E Detail ProductName E UnitPrice 2 Now switch to the Group and Sort Panel and click Add a Group In the invoked list choose a data member across which the report is to be grouped Note that grouping across calculated fields is Supported as well Group and Sort 4 Add a Group WA Add a Sort Delete Move Up Move Down HTI Products ESF CategoryID LFF Discontinued fb EAN13 Ba ProductID Spr Froduct ame fab QuantityPerUnit Bal ReorderLevel TE SupplierID fa UnitPrice E UnitsInStock If multiple groups are created you can specify the priority for each group by selecting it in the Group and Sort Panel and using the Move Up and Move Down buttons 3 After this a Group Header band is added to the report with the specified data member being set as its grouping criterion Now it s only left to drop the corresponding item from the Field List onto this band so that it s displayed as a header for each group GroupHeader GHE myDataSet products smj CategoryID ari Discontinued a hee 7 of eT a ProductID ab ProductName If required you
500. want to customize your report further click Next to proceed to Step 7 Choose Report Layout 2011 DevExpress Inc ao Report Designer ast Step 7 Choose Report Layout Purpose This page sets the layout of elements in your report If you haven t applied data grouping you can specify how data field values are arranged into a table one under another etc If report data is grouped you can choose one of the available indentation styles for nested elements Additionally this page allows you to specify the page orientation for your report Page Interface The following options are available if data grouping has been applied Report Wizard E How would you like to lay out your report The report s layout specifies the way in which the selected data fields are arranged on report s pages EKHE AMEE i EXE if ix KK KE a a a a cc J If data hasn t been grouped you will see the following report layout options Layout Columnar Tabular _ Justified If you want to customize your report further click Next to proceed to Step 8 Choose Report Style Otherwise click Finish to complete report customization 2011 DevExpress Inc ast Report Designer 432 Step 8 Choose Report Style Purpose Apply a predefined style sheet to your report Page Interface Select one of the predefined styles from the list box Report Wizard What style would you like an The r
501. wed je a ReportHeader one band per report gt GroupHeader1 Y GroupFooterl E at myDataSet Products TableAdapter Sd Designer LA Preview HTML View Scripts Report 100 O F On the Designer Tab multiple reports can be opened at once each in its own Design Panel The Design Panel provides the following tabs switched at the bottom e Designer Tab Allows you to modify your report e Preview Tab Shows a print preview and enables you to print out your report or export it to a file on disk e HTML View Tab Shows the report output in HTML format e Scripts Tab Allows you to manage your report s scripts See Also Control Toolbox 2011 DevExpress Inc ste Report Designer E Designer Tab The Designer Tab allows you to customize a report manage its bands and controls and define their properties g ReportHeader one band per report y GroupHeader Category Categoryl pj 8 el Detail ProductName _ 9 UnitPrice GroupFooter Units Count Count UnitPrice ReportFooter lone band per report See Also Preview Tab HTML View Tab Scripts Tab 2011 DevExpress Inc E Report Designer 320 Field List The Field List window serves the following purposes e Displays the list of all available data fields attributes you can show in your report and allows you to create report
502. whether the selected series should be visible define its name and select a view type Options tabs The following tabs are available on this page e Series Options Specifies argument and value scale types point sort order visibility in legend and legend text e Top N Options Specifies whether the Top N Values feature is enabled and allows you to control this feature s options e Point Options Specifies the format of values displayed in chart labels e Legend Point Options Specifies the format of values displayed in the chart legend 2011 DevExpress Inc 16 Charting Data Page Tasks e Provide data fora chart e Bind a chart or individual series to a data source e Customize an argument and a value scale type e Customize the view type of auto generated series e Apply data filtering and sorting e Adjust the Pivot Chart settings Page Elements Data providing tabs Points Series Binding Auto created Series auil Series 1 Argument aul series 2 A e Use the Points tab ta manually enter data points Or use other tabs to bind each series to a datasource or auto created series from a datasource Value 2054 4 536 6 789 8 953 foe You can provide data for a chart using the following tabs e Points tab e Series Binding tab e Auto created Series tab Points Tab Use it to manually enter data points for series 2011 DevExpress Inc Points Series Binding
503. y Hide Bands Conditionally Change a Label s Text 2011 DevExpress Inc 267 267 Report Designer 268 Understand Styles Concepts This document describes how you can provide a professional look to your reports by effectively adjusting the appearance of its elements This document consists of the following sections e The Appearance Properties e Styles Priority and Inheritance The Appearance Properties In the Report Designer a report and each of its elements bands and controls has a complete set of appearance options such as Background Color Borders Font Foreground Color Text Alignment etc By default these properties aren t specified meaning that their real values are obtained from a control s or band s parent which is the report itself So the appearance specified for a report is distributed to all its child elements Similarly the appearance of a band is translated to the controls it contains v E Detil labeli label label4 Appearance El Background Color E Tomato Border Color Border Width Borders E Font Foreground Color Formatting Rules E Padding E Style Priority Styles Text Alignment MS Black 2 All Arial 9 75 pt CI White Collection 0 0 0 0 Style Priority Collection Middle Left In turn a control s appearance can be adjusted independently from its parent 2011 DevExpress Inc 268 Report Designer 269 la
504. y s Scones Gorgonzola Telmo Mascarpone Fabiol Gravad lax Ipoh Coffee FRegede sild Chocolade MMaxilaku Gnocchi dinonna Alice Wimmers gute Semmelkn del Lowsiana Hot Spiced Okra Scottish Longbreads Outback Lager Longhfe Tofu Total Units 750 See Also Change or Apply Data Filtering to a Report Change or Apply Data Grouping to a Report Change or Apply Data Sorting to a Report Sort Groups by a Summary Function Result 2011 DevExpress Inc 21 3 Report Designer ata Add Page Numbers and System Information to a Report This document describes how to insert page numbers or other system information e g current date and time user name etc into a report Generally this information is displayed within the Page Header and Footer or Page Margin bands To add page numbers or system information to a report locate the Control Toolbox and drag and drop the Page Info control le b PageHeader one band per page a a Cla Then follow the instructions below for your specific task e Add Page Numbers e Add System Date and Time e Add the User Name Add Page Numbers 1 Select the Page Info control click its Smart Tag and in the invoked actions list expand the drop down list for the Page Information entry lt Page Info Tasks Page Informaton Current of Total Page Numb Start Page Number None Page Number Format Current of Total Page Numbers Running Band Page Number Roma P
505. y to _self For more information refer to Create Hyperlinks If the current report has a data source the Navigation URL property can be bound to a data field obtained from the data source To do this expand the Data Bindings property and in the Navigation URL Binding drop down selector select the required data field 2011 DevExpress Inc 381 Report Designer 382 Pivot Grid The Pivot Grid control represents dynamic data obtained from an underlying data source in a cross tabulated form to create cross tab reports similar to Pivot Tables in Microsoft Excel Column headers display unique values from one data field and row headers from another field Each cell displays a summary for the corresponding row and column values By specifying different data fields you can see different totals This allows you to geta compact layout for a complex data analysis The Pivot Grid has a designer which allows you to easily adjust its layout It can be invoked using the control s Smart Tag Data Source myDataSet Data Member Products Data Adapter ProductsTableAdapter OLAP Connection String Formatting Rules Collection Field Area for a New Field Row Area Add Field to Area Run Designer For more information on using this control refer to Pivot Table In the Property Grid the Pivot Grid s properties are divided into the following groups Appearance e Appearance Allows you to define the appearance properties suc
506. yout Birth DY 425 Rename pte T Hide Text fl Text Position d g Ungroup C Create EmptySpace bem LD Create Tabbed Group To add a group as a tab page to an existing tab control drag the group s caption onto the tab control s header area Rename Tab Pages 2011 DevExpress Inc 109 Layout Manager ono Do the following 1 Right click a tab header and select Rename Employee ID Title Hide Customization Form First STA gt Reset Layout a b Rename T Hide Text E1 Text Position Hide Iter LJ Create EmptySpace bem Birth D 2 Type a new name and press ENTER Customize Tabbed Groups To customize the layout of controls and the order of tab pages within a tab control use drag and drop Ungroup Tabbed Groups To disassemble a tab control into regular groups right click the tab control s header area and select Ungroup Tabbed Group Hide Item EP Group LJ Create EmptySpace Item Fa Ungroup Tabbed Group E Add Tab Employee ID Title IE Aer SS Rane aap a a a a Groupl Group Hide Customization Form First Mame gt Reset Layout As a result the tab control will be destroyed and all its tab pages will be displayed as regular groups one below another 2011 DevExpress Inc no Layout Manager 111 come Gl Birth Date 12 8 1948 Hire Date 5 1 1992 2011 DevExpress Inc Layout Manager 112 Save and
507. yout Toolbar The Layout Toolbar allows you to easily align report elements to one another change their size to match one another and customize spacing and z order joe e hile Reales If the Layout Toolbar is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Toolbars Layout Toolbar See Also Formatting Toolbar Main Toolbar Zoom Toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 324 Report Designer 325 Main Menu The Main Menu contains various commands grouped in four sub menus These menu items duplicate various commands available in the Report Designer s Toolbars and allow you to switch between different Tabs and hide or show the available Toolbars and Panels File Edit View Format Window Designer Preview HTML View 48k Scripts Toolbars b Property Grid Field List ly Group and Sort la Scripts Errors To switch focus on the Main Menu press ALT 2011 DevExpress Inc 325 Report Designer 326 Main Toolbar The Main Toolbar contains buttons which provide the capability to create new reports save and load report layouts cut copy and paste report elements and undo redo actions in the Report Designer Dem Xxo t 3 C If the Main Toolbar is hidden you can enable it in the Main Menu by selecting View Toolbars Main Toolbar See Also Formatting Toolbar Layout Toolbar Zoom Toolbar 2011 DevExpress Inc 326 Report Designer Preview Tab The Previ

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuale dell`operatore      Spot User Manual - Skylab Mobilesystems  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file